Home

SH7046 E8000S Emulator HS7046EBK81H User`s Manual

Contents

1. il Break condition When the user program stops is satisfied the trace memory stores trace information from the address at which the trace acquisition condition was satisfied Figure 5 52 Example of Range Trace Mode The conditions for range tracing are shown in table 5 59 Information is acquired when all of the specified conditions an AND condition are satisfied Table 5 59 Range Trace Conditions Condition Description Address bus Satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus Satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Access type Satisfied when the bus status condition is as specified Read write Satisfied when the read write matches the specified condition External interrupt Satisfied when the external interrupt signal levels match the specified conditions External probe Satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match the specified conditions 181 Table 5 60 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions Range Trace Trace Condition A Trace Condition B Trace Condition C Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O Access type O Read Write O External interrupt O O O O OF O x x O X Xx External probe
2. Operating frequency 50 MHz Address K 12 X 3 Ay 516 K a j 9 Y14011 Extal input 12 5 MHz A TRIG 40 gt 44 Hardware break condition trace condition satisfaction cycle Unit ns Figure 5 85 Pulse Output Timing Note No pulse is output from the trigger output probe when a software break condition is satisfied In addition the timing of the pulse output and the pulse width differ according to the condition 230 5 11 Memory Areas 5 11 1 The Allocation of Emulation Memory Use the Memory Mapping dialog box to set up this emulation memory Select Memory from Configure Map The Memory Mapping dialog box will be displayed Memory Mapping Figure 5 86 Memory Mapping Dialog Box 231 Table 5 94 Configuration Items of the Memory Mapping Dialog Box Option Description From To Mapping Displays memory address ranges and memory type settings Target Device configuration Displays the memory mapping of the emulation memory block Short Block 0 15 Large Block 0 11 internal ROM area ROM AREA internal RAM area RAM AREA and internal I O area INTERNAL I O System memory resources Displays the remaining capacities of the emulation memory Map type Selects the map type cannot be specified Edit Allows modification of the memory allocation information selected by From To Mapping by displaying the Ed
3. eeeeseeseeessseeesesrerresrsresresreerssrerrsrerrrsresreeresrerrssene 219 Options on the Count Page eee e eoep aree eae EAEn Eee 220 Menu Items for Displaying the Results eeeeeseeceeeceenceceeeeeeneeceeeeeeneecesreeeneeees 221 Display Format of Results When Address is Selected oe eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 222 Display Format of Results When Count is Selected eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneees 223 Display Format of Results When Graph is Selected eee ee eeeeeeeseceeeeeeees 224 System Status Window Configuration eee ceseceecseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensees 227 Session Sheet Configuratio ennenen E E A EEA 227 Platform Sheet Configuration eesesssesseeseseesseeesersseessrsererersserrserssressresseesseeeeeseet 228 Memory Sheet Configuration eseseseseerersrerersererererereersrerersererererereenseererereeessee 229 Events Sheet Configuration eseseseseseseseseesserestesseesseseeretssersrrssressressresseeeeeseet 230 Configuration Items of the Memory Mapping Dialog BOX 0 eee eee 232 Items Displayed in the System Memory resources List BOX 0 eee eeeeeee 232 Configuration Items of the Edit Add Memory Mapping Dialog Box 233 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box ee 234 Stack Trace Window Options 00 eeseceecesseeceseeesneeceeeeeeaeeceseeeeneeceeeeeneeceereseneeess 235 Options in the Pop up Menu eee ee cesecsecseecneeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeensecaecaeesa
4. Address 1 H2000 Address 2 H2000 s lt s Address 3 H2000FE st t lt sSCS Address 4 Address 5 Address 6 Address H 200FFE r Reset Point Address Figure 5 19 Break Sequence Dialog Box The Break Sequence list box will now display the specified addresses Click the OK button to close the Break Sequence dialog box The display returns to the Sequence page The Sequence Point list box will display the specified software sequential break conditions Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Table 5 24 Break Sequence Page Options Option Description Sequence Address 1 to Sets a breakpoint address in the sequence of points to be passed Point group Address 7 as a numerical or symbolic value One to seven pass points can box be set At least two points must be set Reset Address Sets the reset point as a numerical or symbolic value A reset Point group point need not be set box When a software sequential break is placed the instruction at the specified address is replaced It is only possible to set a software breakpoint in the RAM area including the standard emulation memory and the internal ROM area However it is not possible to set a software breakpoint at an address that satisfies any of these conditions 133 e The address holds H 0000 e The address is used as part of a software sequential breakpoint e The address is
5. 157 Table 5 43 Specifiable Internal Break Conditions Break Condition U1 Break Conditions Break Condition U Break Condition U2 to U4 Reset Address O either of the two O either of the two O PC conditions conditions x Data o o X Read Write 0 0 X Access type o o X Satisfaction count O X X Notes O Can be specified X Cannot be specified 1 A PC condition cannot be specified 2 This condition is used as the reset point condition for internal sequential breaks Setting an Internal Break The setting of Break Condition U1 is taken as an example Select Add from the menu in the Breakpoints window and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Condition U page Point Sequence Condition 4 ConditionB Condition C Condition U Condition Edit Reset Reset All Sancel Apply Help Figure 5 37 Break Dialog Box Condition U Page 158 Table 5 44 Condition U Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Break Condition U Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 4 Settings for channels U1 to U4 R Settings for Break Condition U Reset Edit Modifies the Break Condition U setting selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Break Condition Un dialog box n channel number Reset Clears the Break Condition U settings selected in the Condition list box
6. 65 4 2 Running the HDI e To run the HDI select the SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software Hitachi Debugging Interface from the Start menu Accessories Startup MS DOS Prompt OY Windows Explorer lon Programs AY Documents Edy settings Doe ter pa Run Loa ot Cy Shut Down Figure 4 1 Start Menu The HDI window as shown in figure 4 2 is displayed Here the Select Session dialog box is displayed Select the target MCU name of the installed HDI and click the OK button If the emulator mode is not correctly set the HDI will not operate normally In such a case make the settings related to the MCU such as the MCU operating mode in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box Table 4 2 lists the setting examples of the CPU Operating Mode when running the sample program 66 Table 4 2 CPU Operation Mode Dialog Box Setting Example Page Option Setting Value Device Pin Counts Operating Mode Auto select NORMAL Use Pin Counts and MD3 0 of User System Device SH7047 Pin Counts 100 MD Pin Clock Mode MD3 2 Clock Mode 0 Operating Mode MD1 0 MCU Mode 0 Pin Select IRQO to WAIT HIGH Registers Vcc Down Detection CS0 to CS6 2 6 V Level H UDI JTAG H UDI JTAG CLOCK 2 5 MHz CLOCK Restart the HDI after modifying the CPU Operating Mode dialog box To display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box click the Setting button in the CPU O
7. Emulation Mode Description Emulation mode Setting Time interval Time interval measurement mode 1 The Time interval measurement measurement mode execution time between satisfaction of Break mode X X 1 2 or 3 between satisfaction Condition U2 and Break Condition U1 is of specified measured The user program is suspended as conditions soon as Break Condition U1 is satisfied after For details referto Break Condition U2 has been satisfied section 5 7 2 Time interval measurement mode 2 The total Measuring execution time between satisfaction of Break Execution Time Condition U2 and Break Condition U1 is between Satisfaction measured Program execution is not of Specified suspended Conditions Time interval measurement mode 3 The total execution times between satisfaction of Break Condition U2 and Break Condition U1 and satisfaction of Break Condition U4 and Break Condition U3 are measured Program execution is not suspended Elapsed time of Time interval measurement mode 4 The Time interval measurement condition execution time over which the condition Condition B satisfaction mode specified as Condition B on the Execution Mode1 page is satisfied Break disabled Software breaks software sequential breaks No break mode hardware breaks hardware sequential breaks and internal breaks are disabled during program execution Note In cycle reset mode the RES signal is output to the MCU regardless of the MCU s
8. Table 3 5 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog Box Option Description Display Area Displays the results of testing by the diagnostic program COMMAND Accepts commands for the diagnostic program STOP Terminates testing by the diagnostic program and enters the program s command input mode END Ends the diagnostic program and initiates the HDI Set the diagnostic program according to the Descriptive Notes on the Diagnostic Program for the SH7046 E8000S Emulator provided on the CD R Click the END button or the STOP button to terminate the diagnostic program After the program has been terminated enter Q in the COMMAND edit box Close the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM dialog box and restart the HDI DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM x E8000 TEST amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAM DIAG SYS Version No X XX XX XX XXXX Copyright C Hitachi LTD XXXX Please key in TEST PARAMETER OPERATOR TEST EXECUTE Y N gt ofl COMMAND a STOP END Figure 3 32 Terminating the Diagnostic Program by Clicking the STOP Button A file named E87046 INI will be created in the HDI installation directory This is a target setting file Whether or not the diagnostic program should be initiated with the HDI is defined in the Diagnostic Program resource information of the E8000 HDI TARGET entry The diagnostic program is available for installation 63 E8000 HDI TARGET Diagnostic Program Y To disable the u
9. There are three ways to set the conditions Time measurement mode 1 The emulator measures the execution time of the subroutine between lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and counts the number of times it is executed The emulator starts to measure on prefetching of instruction in the range of lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and stops measuring on prefetching of instruction outside the specified range The emulator restarts measurement when another instruction is prefetched from the specified range The emulator increments the number of passes when it passes through the lt startopt gt and fetches the instruction from lt endopt gt The emulator does not measure the performance of subroutines that were called from the target subroutine Specification mode time1 Time measurement mode 2 The emulator measures the execution time of the subroutine between lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt and counts the number of times it is executed The emulator starts to measure on prefetching of instruction at lt startopt gt and stops measuring on prefetching of instruction at lt endopt gt The emulator increments the number of passes lt countopt gt whenever it passes through the lt startopt gt and fetches the instruction from lt endopt gt The emulator also measures the performance of subroutines that were called from the target subroutine Specification mode time2 Time measurement mode 3 The emulator starts to measure on prefetch
10. Troubleshootins PAD 2 2 40 css ae BSS ieee en i 61 Figure 3 30 Diagnostic Program Initiation Confirmation Dialog Box eee eeeeeeeeteeeees 62 Figure 3 31 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog BOX ieee cee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeerenseensees 62 Figure 3 32 Terminating the Diagnostic Program by Clicking the STOP Button 0 0 63 Fisure 4 1 Start Meni n en ent csenssates aces oseapeancesdinagoa EE ERE TTE a s 66 Fisyre 42 HDI Window nose niere oS see EREE EEE E ENEE EE E EEE EE ES 68 Figure 4 3 Memory Mapping Dialog Box before Setting eesesseseeseerssresrsreesrsrerreresrrnsesrrerss 69 Figure 4 4 Add Memory Mapping Dialog BOX ue ec eceecceesceseceeceseceaeceaecneecaeesaeseneeeneees 70 Figure 4 5 Memory Mapping Dialog Box at Setting s sessessesessssesesreerssrsrrssrsrreesrenresreressenees 71 Figure 4 6 Load Program Dialog BOX sseessesseseseseeesesreerssrerrssesressrstenrrsrenrsserensestenresrenreseerrseee 12 Fiure 47 HDI Dialog BOX e aea r aa a a na Oa ua Sietesvastestecesdiibonsberscoes 72 Figure 4 8 Open Dialog Box 0 eee ceeecesecssecneecaeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesecaeesaecsaecaaecaeesaeseneeeeeees 73 Figure 4 9 Source Window Displaying the Source Program eee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Figure 4 10 Source Window Setting a Software Breakpoint 0 eceeeeesseceeeeecseceeeeeesseeeenees 75 Figure 4 11 Source Window Break State ceesecssecesececseeceeeeeceaeceeeeecaeeeeeeecsaeeeeneec
11. l Don t Care D bus cycles Figure 5 29 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Delay Page Table 5 35 Delay Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no delay condition Input area Sets a delay condition values as a number of bus cycles The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 32767 can be set here Notes 1 Break Condition A shares hardware with Trace Condition A Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition A has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition A 2 Break Condition B shares hardware with Trace Condition B Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition B has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition B 146 3 Break Condition C shares hardware with Trace Condition C and Performance Analysis Therefore when any channel of Trace Condition C or a Performance Analysis setting has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Break Condition C 4 When a hardware break condition has been satisfied execution may continue for two or more instructions before it stops Other hardware break conditions may thus be satisfied before execution stops If this is the case two or more causes of termination will then be displayed Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition A history of hardware break conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B can be displayed in the Condition dialog
12. C Byte C Word Long Nonusermask User mask Figure 5 39 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Data Page Table 5 47 Data Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no data condition Value Sets a data bus value as a number Byte Sets byte data access cycles Word Sets word data access cycles Long Sets longword data access cycles Non user mask Sets no mask condition User mask Sets mask conditions Mask Sets the mask bits if User mask is selected Masked bits on the data bus satisfy this break condition regardless of their values 162 c Bus State Page Use this page to specify conditions for the read or write cycle and access type Address Data Bus State Count Bus State C All Data C DMA DTC Read Write C Read Write Figure 5 40 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Bus State Page Table 5 48 Bus State Page Options Bus State Group Box Option Description All All bus states satisfy this condition Data Data access cycles satisfy this condition DMA DTC DMA DTC cycles satisfy this condition Read Write Group Box Option Description Read Write Either read write cycles satisfy this condition Read Read cycles satisfy this condition Write Write cycles satisfy this condition 163 d Count Page Use this page to specify a satisfaction count condition Address Data Bus State Count r Co
13. SUBROUTINE TIMEOUT The timeout condition specified in Performance Analysis 1 has been satisfied SUBROUTINE COUNT OVERFLOW The maximum number of passes condition specified in Performance Analysis 1 has been satisfied TRACE BUFFER OVERFLOW The break is due to a trace buffer overflow WRITE PROTECT Execution of the program was terminated because of an attempt to write to a write protected area GUARDED PROTECT Access to an access prohibited area was attempted 121 Operating Status Display While the user program is in execution the MCU s operating status is monitored and displayed on the HDI window s status bar This function allows the user to observe the progress of the program The display is only updated when the status changes Table 5 18 is a list of the operating status messages Table 5 18 Operating Status Display Display AB XXXXXXXX Meaning During execution of the user program the address from which operations are fetched is displayed here Reset The MCU has been reset The RES signal is low Running Execution of the user program has been initiated This message is displayed once the execution has been started or restarted Note that this message is deleted when AB xxxxxxxx Starts to be displayed Sleep The MCU is in its sleep mode Standby The MCU is in its standby mode TOUT A xxxxxxxx The value displayed is the value on the address bus The bus termination
14. The Platform sheet has the following contents 227 Table 5 91 Platform Sheet Configuration Item Description Connected To The name of an emulator that is connected CPU The type of target MCU Operating Mode Auto Select Whether or not automatic detection of the number of pins on the user system and the inputs on the MD pins was enabled when the system was last initiated Enable Enabled Disable Disabled Clock Mode MD3 2 The current clock mode Operating Mode MD1 0 The current operating mode MD Value E8000S The values set for the mode pins E8000S which are currently set MD Value User System The values set for the mode pins which are input from the user system Pin Counts Device The number of pins of the supported MCU set IRQO to H UDI JTAG Clock Settings of the CPU Operating mode dialog box Clock source The clock that is selected Run status Whether or not the user program program is being executed Running is displayed during execution and Break is displayed during stop Cause of last break The cause of termination by a break XXXX H XXM xxS xxxxxxUS xxxNS amp H Hour M Minute S Second US Microsecond NS Nanosecond x Number Interval Time Count 2 gt 1 MAX 2 gt 1 MIN 2 gt 1 AVE 2 gt 1 Interval Time Count 4 gt 3 MAX 4 gt 3 MIN 4 gt 3
15. 11 To cancel all internal breakpoint conditions BCUC 262 6 2 3 Hardware Sequential Break Specification Command CSQ e Setting CONDITION_SEQUENCE CSQ e Display CONDITION_SEQUENCE CSQ Command syntax and parameters e Setting csq lt type gt lt action gt e Display csq lt type gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Sets hardware sequential break type a b Specifies Condition A B lt action gt Keyword Enables or disables hardware sequential function off No sequential specification break Sequential break trace Sequential trace stop Description e Setting This command specifies hardware sequential break or sequential trace stop which are the conditions set by the user in hardware break condition Break Condition A B or trace condition Trace Condition A B The user must set the conditions by using the BCS or TAS command e Display This command displays the conditions currently set Examples 1 To specify Break Condition A as sequential break CSQ A BREAK 2 To specify Trace Condition B as sequential trace stop CSQ B TRACE 3 To cancel trace stop specification of CONDITION B CSQ B OFF 4 To specify the contents set for CONDITION A CSQ A Display gt CSOQ A Break Condition A Sequential 263 Notes e The emulator clears all conditions set to Break Condition A B and Trace Condition A B when hardware break condition Break Condition A B and trace condition Trace Condi
16. 488 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us or 6 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns If the user specifies a time other than the available values the emulator will display instead of the setting 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions 1 Execution time interval measurement mode 1 2 3 Time interval measurement mode 1 2 3 uses Break Condition U to measure time intervals in the execution of the user program a Execution time interval measurement mode 1 Measures the execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 until the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 After Break Condition U2 has been satisfied the user program stops on the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 BREAK CONDITION SEQUENTIAL U will be displayed as the cause b Execution time interval measurement mode 2 Measures the total execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 until the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 Program execution does not stop after Break Condition U1 and U2 have been satisfied and total of the execution time between the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 and Break Condition U1 is obtained c Execution time interval measurement mode 3 Measures the total execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 until the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 and from the satisfaction of Break Condition U4 until the satisfaction of Br
17. Appendix C Connecting the Emulator to the User System eeeeeeeeeeeee 329 C 1 Connecting tothe User SysteM seisis ieii oeri ie neee esr En rE rE oei is 329 Cid Inst lling IC Sock t ssciiiieioren orn enon eE EEEE E E REEE E 330 C 1 2 Connection Using the HS7046ECH81H ssseseessesesssseesesresresrsrrsresreeresreeresrerrssee 330 C 1 3 Connection Using the HS7047ECH81H esseseeeseeesssreesssresrssrrrreresrreresreeresrerrseen 333 C 2 Precautions for User System Connection 0 0 0 c cee eeccescesecesecesecseeceeecaeeeaeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeneeens 336 C 3 Connecting the Cables for Tracing eeseeeeeseerseesesreerrseeersstrrrerertesresrentssrerrnserrreresrenreset 337 C 3 1 Connecting the cables for tracing trace cables to the emulator 337 C 3 2 Connecting trace cables to the evaluation chip board o00 eee eee eeeeeeeeee eee 337 C 4 Installing the MCU on the User System oo eee eeeeeeeeeeesceeecesecseceaeceaecaeesaeseneeeatens 339 Appendix D MCU Internal Module Support ee eeeeseeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeenaeen 343 Dil Memory Space sesira ioris n oi orae tes cele eeescs Arte dabei oa EE EEEE a Eae EEES 343 D 1 1 Intermal ROM Avte a ensirep setting alate EEE 343 D 1 2 Intemal VO Area eiieeii inene ei edie oes E ETEK ed RE E 343 Di1 3 External Memory Area us icscctcscececissue seat iss sv issacesvctdscesscesseascepdeceszesbagaanenspexseevenessse 343 D 2 Low Power consumption Mode Sleep Software Standby and Hardware Standby 344 D 2
18. IRag _ rR High High High C Low C Low C Low C Don t Care Don t Care C Don t Care AN High Low C DontCae C DontCare Figure 5 27 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Interrupt Page Table 5 33 Interrupt Page Options IRQO to IRQ7 Group Box Option Description High Sets the high level of this external interrupt signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of this external interrupt signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no external interrupt signal state condition NMI Group Box Option Description High Sets the high level of the NMI signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of the NMI signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no NMI signal state condition Note When using signals IRQO to IRQ7 set the corresponding pins correctly in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box 144 f Count Page Use this page to specify a satisfaction count condition Figure 5 28 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 34 Count Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no satisfaction count condition Input area Sets the satisfaction count condition as a number of passes The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 65535 can be set here 145 g Delay Page Use this page to specify a delay condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay
19. Reset All Clears all Break Condition U settings in the Condition list box Click the list entry to select condition 1 in the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Break Condition U1 dialog box The Break Condition U1 U4 dialog boxes have the pages shown in table 5 45 Table 5 45 Break Condition U1 U4 Reset Dialog Box Pages Channel Page Description Break Condition U1 Address Sets address or PC conditions Data Sets data conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle and access type conditions Count Sets the satisfaction count conditions Break Condition U2 Address Sets address or PC conditions to U4 Data Sets data conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle and access type conditions Break Condition U Address Sets a reset point for the sequential break condition Reset Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Break condition U1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition U page The Condition list box will now display the specified internal break conditions as condition 1 Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Internal break conditions are specified for the other channels in the same way The following sections describe each page 159 a Address Page Use this page to specify the address bus conditions Figure 5 38 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Address Pa
20. TRACE_MODE 6 2 20 TM Sets and displays the trace mode TRACE_SEARCH 6 2 21 TS Searches for trace information TRACEACQUISITION_CLEAR 6 2 18 TAC Clears trace conditions that have been set TRACEACQUISITION_ 6 2 18 TAD Displays trace conditions that DISPLAY have been set TRACEACQUISITION_SET 6 2 18 TAS Sets conditions for acquiring 250 trace information 6 2 1 Hardware Break Commands BCS BCC BCD BCE e Setting BREAKCONDITION_SET BCS e Cancellation BREAKCONDITION_CLEAR BCC e Display BREAKCONDITION_DISPLAY BCD e Enable or Disable BREAKCONDITION_ENABLE BCE Command syntax and parameters e Setting bes lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt accessopt gt lt prbopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt irqopt gt lt countopt gt lt delayopt gt e Cancellation bce lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Display bed lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Enable or Disable bce lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Sets a hardware break condition type a b c Break Condition A B C lt channel_number gt Numeric or Sets 1 to 8 p or r When setting a break condition string channel number specify 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or 8 When setting a hardware sequential break specify p or r p Sequential point r Reset point
21. Trace Condition C1 to C8 General Selects the range trace mode Address Sets address bus conditions Bus State Sets access type conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace condition A1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified trace conditions will now be displayed as condition in the Condition list box Click the Close button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The options on each page are the same as those of the corresponding Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes except the General page For details of the options on each page refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break Subroutine Tracing Mode Overview Access to instructions and operands within the range between the specified start and end addresses of the subroutine is traced in this mode However if another subroutine is called by the specified subroutine the called subroutine will not be traced Eight channels for each of Trace Conditions A B and C 24 channels in total can be specified Trace Condition A1 is used as an example of setting a range trace condition 183 Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box w
22. 100 V to 240 V AC power Figure 3 9 Connecting the Frame Ground 34 3 3 7 Setting the Host Interface Switch CAUTION Do not change the settings of host interface switch SW1 The host interface consists of eight switches as shown in figure 3 10 The switch state becomes on when the switches are pushed to the left and the state becomes off when the switches are pushed to the right To change the console interface settings turn switches S1 to S6 off and switches S7 and S8 on in the console interface switch SW1 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 ON state ma ma a ON state b OFF state Swi Side view of SW1 ON OFF states Figure 3 10 Host Interface Switches 35 3 4 Setting Up with Windows Operating Systems The following describes the setup procedure for Windows operating systems Since hardware is set up during installation the installation procedure may differ according to the operating system and interface used ISA PCI PCMCIA or LAN Proceed with installation according to the procedures for the environment in use To connect the host computer to the emulator either a PCI interface board HS6000EICO1H and HS6000EIC02H PC interface card HS6000EIPO1H PC interface board HS6000EII01H or a LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H can be selected For details on the connection of the PC interface board ISA bus specifications refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifica
23. 40 n is the number of n is the number of waits waits The basic bus cycle software wait is shown in figure A 1 The user system interface circuits connected to the user system are shown in figure A 2 319 CK A17 to AO RD When read D7 to DO When read twsb2 twR WRx When written D7 to DO When written Note tRDH Specified from the earliest negation timing from A17 to AO CSn or RD Figure A 1 Basic Bus Cycle Software Wait 320 MCU in the emulator User system HD151015 EPM7512AE MD3 MD2 MD1 MDO EPM7512AE EPM7512AE FWP Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 1 321 MCU in the emulator User system EPM7512AE PVcc PVcc PA13 TDO PA15 TRST PA10 TCK PA10 TCK PA12 TDI PA12 TDI PA14 TMS EPM7512AE PA14 TMS PD4 _AUDRST D4 PD4 _AUDRST D4 PD5 AUDMD D5 PD5 AUDMD D5 PD7 AUDSYNC D7 PD7 AUDSYNC D7 PD6 AUDCK D6 PD6 AUDCK D6 PDO AUDATAO DO PDO AUDATAO DO PD1 AUDATA1 D1 PD1 AUDATA1 D1 PD2 AUDATA2 D2 PD2 AUDATA2 D2 PD3 AUDAUA3 D3 PD3 AUDAUA3 D3 EPM7256AE _ASEBRKAK NC _ASEBRKAK 47kQ NC _DBGMD PVcc 4 7kQ PE13 _MRES PE13 _MRES LVTH16374A EPM7512AE _WDTOVF Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 2 322 MCU in the emulator User system PVcc PVcc _BACK _BREQ EPM7512AE HD151015 AHC14 AHC14 NMI LVTH163
24. 5 16 Source Window Expanded Function 0 0 0 ceececsseceseecsseceeeeecsseceeeeecaeceeneecaeceeeeeesaeeeees 243 5 16 1 Setting BP Column jc cc3sccscehtecast ce sscasvesiscesscodavnsdescevestsesssnsoedspesasssdavecsus sepsvaessees 243 Section O Command ING hg oot ca are Manto rte gas eesti ea Reade was Besse dep R 245 OA bist Formats nt tect atin E PLS LE el a 245 OLY Description ies sess ce soecs soe skss E tet iges beh hast cabana stan otk ss teks ce cbettsvass ptave stat tvesseesees 245 Old Formate tea cnatnceaed iis Rice tie ern aa are Ae ere ee 245 6 1 3 Parameter Type Input ss sosirii ase dire ant nettle r E EEEE 246 61 4 Examplesisiss cctssiie cd Hina E E eA ea co unladen ea ia ened 246 62 Listiof Commands lt 4 AEE SPE E nhl eh teeth thas 246 6 2 1 Hardware Break Commands BCS BCC BCD BCE cc ccceseeseeeeeees 251 6 2 2 Internal Break Commands BCUS BCUC BCUD BCUE ee 259 6 2 3 Hardware Sequential Break Specification Command CSQ eeeesseeesreeeneeees 263 6 2 4 Software Break Commands BP BC BD BE uu ccccesessececeeeeeensaeees 265 6 2 5 Software Sequential Break Commands BSS BSC BSD BSE eee 267 620 GHECK CHEGKEK 2 ccsse2hkst cpt eet eH AA ORE ES 270 EXT CEOCK CK iin siciice ciel ndcvies r ee bb et che ene ee ea ea eto 272 6 2 8 Coverage Commands CVS CVC CVD cc ceecceencecsseceeeeeceseceeneeceaecesneeenaeeeeee 274 60 29 DEVICE TYPE DE errn E tiie seecte en
25. AVE 4 gt 3 Results of execution time interval measurement mode 1 2 3 Run Time Count The results of measuring the program execution time results of measuring Go to Break or of measurement in the execution time interval measurement mode 4 Condition A Sequential The Condition A sequential points that have been passed Condition B Sequential The Condition B sequential points that have been passed Interval Timer counter The timer resolution used to measure execution times setting in the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution combo box of the Configuration dialog box Bus timeout Timeout detection time settings in the Bus timeout combo box of the Configuration dialog box 228 Table 5 91 Platform Sheet Configuration cont Item Description Multi break PRB1 Multi break function selection of the Enable the multi break for External probe No 1 check box of the Configuration dialog box Internal ROM Option Writing to internal ROM area is enabled or disabled selection of the Internal ROM Option Write enable for the internal ROM check box of the Configuration dialog box RES signal Selection of whether or not to permit the input of the RES signal selection of the RES signal check box of the Configuration dialog box BREQ signal Selection of whether or not to permit the input of the BREQ signal selec
26. AddressH OFFF Address H 1FFF Address H 3FFF Figure 5 69 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 e Example of subroutine measurement mode 2 In subroutine measurement mode 2 the emulator starts to measure the execution time after it has passed the start address and continues to measure the time until it reaches the end address An example of the use of subroutine time measurement mode 2 is described below Here the start address is assumed to be H 1000 and the end address to be H 1 FFF When the user program is running the emulator will start to measure the execution time of the user program from the start address H 1000 until the user program reaches the end address H 1LFFF When the emulator starts to measure the execution time it will continue to measure until the user program reaches address H 1FFF or until user program emulation breaks Therefore the emulator will continue to measure the execution time of the user program after execution of the user program has jumped to address H 3000 208 Address meoee Address H 1000 Address H 3000 Measurement range Address H OFFF Address H 1FFF Address H 3FFF Figure 5 70 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 Example of subroutine time measurement mode 3 In subroutine time measurement mode 3 the emulator starts to measure the execution time of the user program in the start address range specified by the user and continues to measure the execution time of the
27. Descriptions on the usage of the function of execution time measurement by specifying conditions are given below Consider the conditions for starting and stopping of measurement then set them in Break Condition B1 to B8 and Trace Condition B1 to B8 Select Time interval measurement Condition B in Emulation mode on the General page of the Configuration dialog box Execute the user program The results of measurement will be displayed in Run Time Count in the System Status window The maximum measurement time will change with the time set as The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box The maximum times are approximately 9999 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 488 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us and 6 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns If the execution time exceeds the measurement time the emulator will display When conditions are not set for Break Condition B or Trace Condition B execution time measurement will not take place when Time interval measurement Condition B is selected in Emulation mode on the General page of the Configuration dialog box The following limitations apply when this function is used e All settings of software software sequential and hardware sequential breaks will be ignored 205 e Trace acquisition conditions will be ignored e Trace halt mode cann
28. Displays the Input Function Range dialog box in which a start address is entered as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the corresponding start and end addresses are automatically displayed When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 is selected Set the start and end address ranges General Address m Start Address Range Start Hss a End H128 End Address Range Start H124 A End Figure 5 75 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page Table 5 80 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 is Selected Start Address Range Option Description Start Sets the start address in the start address range as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address in the start address range as a numerical or symbolic value ie Displays the Input Function Range dialog box to which a start address in the start address range is input as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start address and end address in the start address range are automatically displayed 215 End Address Range Option Description Start Sets the start address in the end address range as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address in of the end address range as a numerical or symbolic value Displays the Input Function Range dialog box to which a start address
29. Item Description and Format PRB External probe PRB signal state X4x3x2x1 xn is the state of PRBn 0 low level 1 high level Time Stamp Time stamp xxxHxxMxxSxxxxxxUxxxN H hour M minute S second U microsecond N nanosecond Clock Number of clock cycles from the end of the previous bus cycle to the end of the current bus cycle xx Hexadecimal value Up to 255 clock cycles can be counted When execution has continued for more than 255 clock cycles is displayed here Only one of Time Stamp or Clock can be displayed at a time Source The corresponding line of source code to the program counter Clicking in the Source column activates the Source window and jumps to the corresponding line The contents of the source column are not displayed in external bus trace Note The correspondence between pins and signals must be set correctly set in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box to correctly trace the IRQO to IRQ7 and BREQ signals The voltage level used by the VCC voltage is specified in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box 5 6 4 Trace Search Functions The emulator has the two functions for searching for trace information that are shown in table 5 67 Table 5 67 Trace Search Functions Search Function Description Trace Filter Displays all trace information that satisfies the specified conditions Trace Find Jumps to the next record of trace information that satisfies the specified
30. Normal execution Executes the user program from the current PC program counter address Click the Go button Select Go from the Run menu Execution from the reset vector Inputs the RES signal to the MCU obtains the PC and SP stack pointer values from the reset vector then execute the user program Click the Reset Go button Select Reset Go from the Run menu Execution from a specified address Executes the user program from the specified address Place the mouse cursor on the Source window Then click the Go To Cursor button or select Go To Cursor from the Run menu Specify a start address for the Program Counter in the Run dialog box then click the Go PC button Execution to a specified address Specifies the end address and executes the user program up to that address Specify a start address for the Program Counter in the Run dialog box specify an end address for Stop At in the Run dialog box then click the Go PC button More than one address can be specified as an end address Any of the various modes of emulation listed in table 5 15 can be specified by selecting Emulation mode from the General page of the Configuration dialog box 116 Table 5 15 Emulation Mode Emulation Modes Description Emulation mode Seiting Cycle reset mode The emulator periodically inputs the RES signal to the MCU during realtime emula
31. board correctly connected Connect correctly Connected to CHEEK Can emulation the user commands be system passed CHECK comman User system defect passes when entered normally CHECK the user system System command is disconnected System defect passed defect SS E System defect Are the connections and settings of the END host computer correct Are the transmission procedure and speed of the emulator and host computer correct System defect Modify to the correct Connect correctly procedure and speed Figure 3 29 Troubleshooting PAD 61 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program A description of the diagnostic program is given below When the HDI is started up the following dialog box is displayed HDI ES This is immediately initiates the diagnostic program Do you want to initiate the diagnostic program Figure 3 30 Diagnostic Program Initiation Confirmation Dialog Box When the Yes button is clicked the diagnostic program is initiated and the following dialog box is displayed DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Ea E8000 TEST amp MAINTENANCE PROGRAM DIAG SYS Version No X XX XX XX XXXX Copyright C Hitachi LTD XXxx Please key in TEST PARAMETER OPERATOR TEST EXECUTE Y N off COMMAND Po STOP END Figure 3 31 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog Box 62
32. interrupt and other signals Vcc Down detection level Sets the low Vcc detection level H UDI clock setting 97 Sets the input clock for the H UDI Hitachi Debugging Interface JTAG interface 5 2 1 Configuration Dialog Box Select Configure Platform from the Setup menu to open the Configuration dialog box Configuration Ed General Execution Made1 Execution Mode2 CPU Operating Mode CPU SH7046 Clock Emulator Clock 12 5MHz2 Me Emulation mode Normal nd J Prohibit R W on the fly Emulator PCI Card Driver Figure 5 1 Configuration Dialog Box Use this dialog box to set the emulation conditions for the emulator 98 Table 5 3 Configuration Dialog Box Page Description General Selects the MCU driving clock and specifies the emulation mode enabling disabling of memory access during emulation whether or not interrupts are accepted during emulation with step execution and produces a dialog box for the setting of driver software Execution Mode1 Sets the unit of time for counting by the execution time measurement counter timeout detection period for emulation commands multibreak mode and whether or not writing to the internal ROM area and several control signals area are enabled Execution Mode2 Sets the conditions for the output of a trigger when a break occurs and sequential conditions Condition A and Condition B trace break or unused
33. lt mode gt Keyword Sets whether to enable or disable break conditions enable Enables break conditions disable Disables break conditions 251 Description of the bcs command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies address condition To specify an address break condition address lt address gt not To specify an address range break condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt not To mask address address mask lt maskdata gt not lt address gt Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Mask value Add not to specify an address or range outside which the user program should break However do not add not when specifying c as lt type gt 252 Parameter lt dataopt gt Description Specifies data condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify an 8 bit data break condition data lt data gt byte lt position gt not To specify a 16 bit data break condition data lt data gt word lt position gt not To specify a 32 bit data break condition data lt data gt long not lt data gt Specify data value numeric lt position gt Specify valid position of the data bus value high upper word low lower word byte3 upper byte of the upper word byte2 lower byte of the upper word byte1 upper byte of the lower word
34. the data bus width and size of the data being accessed For details see appendix E 4 Hardware Break Function Figure 5 24 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Data Page 140 Table 5 30 Data Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no data bus condition Value Sets a data bus value as a number When a bit is masked the bit always satisfies the condition regardless of its value Byte Sets byte data access cycles Word Sets word data access cycles Long Sets longword data access cycles Position Specifies the location of effective data on the bus Select one of the following settings High Word High order words can be specified with Word Low Word Low order words can be specified with Word Byte 3 Upper bytes of upper words can be specified with Byte Byte 2 Lower bytes of upper words can be specified with Byte Byte 1 Upper bytes of lower words can be specified with Byte Byte 0 Upper bytes of lower words can be specified with Byte Outside Range Sets the condition as any value other than those specified Non user mask Sets no mask condition User mask Sets the mask conditions Mask Sets the mask bits if User mask is selected When a bit is masked the bit always satisfies the condition regardless of its value 141 c Bus State Page Use this page to specify access type and read or write cycle conditions
35. 1 Hardware Standby Mode eee ecceeceescesecesecssecaecaeecaeeeaeseaeseeeeseseenseesseenaes 344 D 2 2 Sleep and Software Standby Modes cece escesecesecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeenseenseenaes 344 D3 IMLOrrUptsyss scesccsies tech sets secesoes hess cesbsd sceh gehts Ss tasbes ds sues doses coed T 344 D 4 Control Input Signals RES BREQ and WAIT eeecceeeeeeseeceseeeeeeceseeeeneeceeeeeneeeeee 344 D5 Bus State Controller c sscsseis soins sesszerecaeves caeascevesegseeponvesidebintses shes voeoeeek sath oops shdebiatanes steebaant 345 D 6 A D COnVertetiss si ss cos ak oi aereo sreds acu soa deen cg hen boutes dots we cbuch uk coupe cbedeed ved beebe AE A E ei 345 D 7 Emulator Status and Internal Modules 0 00 eee ee eeeesecesecese cee caeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenseens 346 Appendix E Notes on Debuseing 2 3 5 554 2 guitare Gio an se esenonhy ee 347 Eel Notes on ADU ecrini titans sii ete niece Bie ales Sal aie initia 347 E 1 1 Memory Test Function sic csccisccscsSsccsdeisssess jesse sven tscesstsecescensseusssabieasdesseeusegststaed 347 E 1 2 Soutce level Executtonic c 5 ccsccsc scccsichcsscssves eosi siete cs enei ioiek eea 347 E 1 3 Watchisacisuiing akuahs ne a E casein aan aR E RE a 347 E 1 4 Symbol Description for Expression esssesssseessereesssrerrsseseeresresrsserrreresrenresreeres 348 ETS Register Function visio csses r a aar ie csck dots EE ar I SEEE EEEE oR E ERE E S E Ea ages 348 E 1 6 Session File FUNCtion 0 0000
36. 11 Time measurement mode 1 I2 Time measurement mode 2 I3 Time measurement mode 3 AC Area access count mode SC Subroutine call count measurement mode d Subroutine start address e Subroutine end address Timeout value Timeout values can be displayed in time measurement modes 1 and 2 when the timeout condition is specified g Counter value Counter values can be displayed in time measurement modes 1 and 2 when count condition is specified h Start address range Time measurement mode 3 i End address range Time measurement mode 3 j Area access address range in the area access count mode k Call subroutine address range in the subroutine call count measurement mode 1 Total execution time 292 3 To display an program execution time and execution count numerically gt PA COUNT NO NAME MODE RATE RUN TIME E COUNT 1 SUBA Il D 10 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00005 a b d e f MAX D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS MIN D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS g h AVE D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS G 2 SUBB 2 D 20 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00010 AVE D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS 3 SUBC B D 30 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS D 00010 AVE D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS 5 SUBD AC D 10 0 D 0000H 00M 05S 001000US 250NS lt ACCESS gt D00005 7 SUBE SC D 20 0 D 0000H 00M 10S 010305US 500NS lt CALL SUB gt D 00010 TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 00M 08S 029397US 600NS q
37. 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 AC Access area count measurement mode SC Subroutine call count measurement mode RATE Proportion of total execution time numerical value RUN TIME Execution time E COUNT Number of calls of this subroutine TOTAL RUN TIME Total execution time H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds Graph Select Graph to produce a display of the proportion of total execution time of the user program as shown in figure 5 83 Performance Analysis Graph Used 1 2 3 5 Display type Execution time ratio in graph form NO NAME MODE RATE sort 11 D 7 4 change i Der array_a AC D 7 4 TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 00M 00S 001773US 440NS Figure 5 83 Performance Analysis Window Execution Time Ratios 223 Table 5 88 Display Format of Results When Graph is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 AC Access area count measurement mode SC Subroutine call count measurement mode RATE Proportions of execution time as numerical values and on a graph TOTAL RUN TIME Total execution time H Hours M Minutes S Seconds US Microseconds NS Nanoseconds Initializing Performance Measurement Information To initialize perf
38. Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count r Bus State C All Data DMA DTC Read Write Read write Read epg Figure 5 25 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Bus State Page Table 5 31 Bus State Page Options Bus State Group Box Option Description All Sets access of any type as the break condition Data Sets memory access cycles as the break condition DMA DTC Sets DMA DTC cycles as the break condition Read Write Group Box Option Description Read Write Sets either read or write cycles as the break condition Read Sets read cycles as the break condition Write Sets write cycles as the break condition 142 d Probe Page Use this page to specify external probe signal PRB1 to PRB4 conditions Figure 5 26 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Probe Page Table 5 32 Probe Page Options Option Description High Sets the high level of this external probe signal as a break condition Low Sets the low level of this external probe signal as a break condition Don t Care Selects no external probe signal state condition 143 e Interrupt Page Use this page to specify external interrupt IRQO to IRQ7 and NMI signal conditions Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count IR IRGI piR Z High High High C Low C Low Low Don t Care Don t Care Don t Care IRQ3
39. CN2 and CN3 all match The trace cables and evaluation chip board s interface connectors are color coded red for CN1 yellow for CN2 and blue for CN3 to prevent incorrect connection 337 CAUTION The screws for fixing the trace cables and evaluation chip interface connectors in place are also color coded as shown below to reduce the risk of their being inserted into the wrong places GND cable EAk Wyo CN2 Yellow CN1 Red CN3 Blue CN3 Blue CN2 Yellow Trace cable connectors Top view of the HS7046EBK81H board Connect the cables to the connectors correctly by holding the HS7046EBK81H board by hand so that the connector is flush with the board and then screw the cables firmly in place GND cable Trace cable CN 1 Trace cable CN 2 Trace cable CN 3 Station evaluation chip board interface CN2 Station evaluation chip board interface CN1 Station evaluation chip board interface CN3 HS7046EBK81H Poser supply cable Figure C 7 Connecting the Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board 338 A WARNING Before connecting the trace cables to the evaluation chip board s interface connectors make sure that the numbers match and that they are correctly aligned Connecting the cables and connectors with different numbers will result in a FIRE HAZARD C 4 Installing the MCU on the User System Install the MCU in the IC socket after checking the l
40. Condition U3 If the execution time exceeds the maximum measurement time the emulator will display When the maximum minimum or average times exceed the maximum measuring time the results will be undefined The following items are the limitations of this function e Settings of software software sequential hardware breaks and hardware sequential breaks are ignored e Trace acquisition conditions will be ignored e Trace halt mode cannot be entered 204 e Memory cannot be written to or read from during execution d Time interval measurement mode 4 This mode measure the execution time over which a specified condition is satisfied using the conditions of Break Condition B or Trace Condition B Measurement starts when a condition set in Break Condition B1 to B8 or Trace Condition B1 to B8 dialog boxes are satisfied and ends when the next condition is satisfied Each time a condition is satisfied the starting and stopping of measurement is repeated Example When conditions are satisfied in order from condition 1 set by Break Condition 1 or Trace Condition 1 condition 2 set by Break Condition 2 or Trace Condition 2 condition 1 and condition 2 measurement is done in the following way Condition 1 measurement starts Condition 2 measurement ends gt Condition 1 measurement starts Condition 2 measurement ends In this way total execution time between conditions 1 and 2 can be measured
41. Connector 3 3 5 Selecting the Clock This emulator supports three types of clock for the MCU a crystal oscillator attached on the evaluation chip board external clock input from the user system and the emulator internal clock The clock is specified with the Configuration dialog box or the CLOCK command This emulator can use a clock source running at up to 50 MHz quadruple the external clock frequency of 12 5 MHz as the MCU clock input 30 m XTAL Crystal oscillator 5 to 12 5 MHz CLOCK command USER External clock 4 to 12 5 MHz m 12 Emulator internal clock 12 5 MHz m 10 Emulator internal clock 10 0 MHz m 8 Emulator internal clock 8 0 MHz 6 Emulator internal clock 6 0 MHz 4 Emulator internal clock 4 0 MHz Crystal Oscillator A crystal oscillator is not supplied with the emulator Prepare and use one that has the same frequency as that of the user system When using a crystal oscillator as the MCU clock source the frequency range must be from 5 to 12 5 MHz CAUTION Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting the CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Use the following procedure to install the crystal oscillator 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off 2 Attach the crystal oscillator into the terminals on the evaluation chip board figure 3 7 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power
42. Ed Address Format Long word Figure 4 14 Open Memory Window Dialog Box 79 e Click the OK button The Long Memory window showing the specified area of memory is displayed Long Memory H FFFFFFD8 Data ooooo000 00005 3DC 00002 704 00005665 OOOOODAA 00004 21F OO003EAD O00004D1D OO002F5A O00020DA Figure 4 15 Long Memory Window 80 4 9 Watching Variables As the user steps through a program it is possible to watch the values of variables used in the program For example to check the contents of the long type array a declared at the beginning of the program use the following procedure e Click the left of array a displayed in the Source window to position the cursor e Click the Source window with the right mouse button and select Instant Watch from a pop up menu The Instant Watch dialog box is displayed Instant Watch Ed Add Watch Figure 4 16 Instant Watch Dialog Box e Click the Add Watch button to add a variable to the Watch Window window 81 Watch Window Oo O x Value Oxffffffd8 Clong 10 Figure 4 17 Watch Window Window Displaying the Array The user can also add a variable to the Watch Window window by specifying its name e Click the Watch Window window with the right mouse button and select Add Watch from the pop up menu The Add Watch dialog box is displayed Add Watch x l Yerable or evpression P C
43. Edit Reset Reset All Set Condition Eancel Apply Help Figure 5 22 Break Dialog Box Condition A Page Table 5 27 Condition A B C Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Break Condition A B or C Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 8 Settings for Break Condition x1 to x8 x A B or C Edit Modifies the Break Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Break Condition Xn dialog box X A B or C n channel number Set condition Modifies the Break Condition A or B settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box This option is not displayed on the Condition C page Reset Clears the Break Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Break Condition A B or C settings in the Condition list box Click condition 7 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Break Condition A7 dialog box 137 Hardware break conditions are specified in the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box which has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 28 Table 5 28 Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Dialog Box Break Condition A1 to A6 and A8 Break Condition B1 to B6 and B8 P
44. INFORMATION READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism Emulator Product Throughout this document the term emulator product shall be defined as the following products produced only by Hitachi Ltd excluding all subsidiary products e Emulator station e Device control board e Evaluation chip board e Cable The user system or a host computer is not included in this definition Purpose of the Emulator Product This emulator product is a software and hardware development tool for systems employing the Hitachi microcomputer HD64F7046 or HD64F7047 hereafter referred to as MCU By exchanging the device control board and evaluation chip board this emulator product can also be used for systems using other microcomputers This emulator product must only be used for the above purpose Limited Applications This emulator product is not authorized for use in MEDICAL atomic energy aeronautical or space technology applications without consent of the appropriate officer of a Hitachi sales company Such use includes but is not limited to use in life support systems Buyers of this emulator product must notify the relevant Hitachi sales offices before planning to use the product in such applications Improvement Policy Hitachi Ltd including its subsidiaries hereaf
45. Internal Break Conditions Break Condition Description Address Satisfied when the value on the address matches the specified value PC Satisfied when the value on the address bus for an instruction fetch matches the specified value The break can be specified to occur either before or after execution of the fetched instruction Data Satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Read write Satisfied when the read write matches the specified condition This condition is usually specified in combination with an address bus or data bus condition Access type bus state Satisfied when the bus cycle matches the specified condition When All is specified here all bus cycles including instruction fetch cycles satisfy the condition This condition is usually specified in combination with an address bus or data bus condition Satisfaction count This condition is specified in combination with some other condition The break occurs when the specified condition has been satisfied the specified number of times Reset point Specifies the reset point condition for a sequential break Note Either an address bus condition or a PC condition can be specified There are 4 channels U1 U4 Note that Break Condition U Reset is a dedicated condition used as the reset point for sequential break conditions Internal break conditions that can be specified by Break Condition U1 to U4 are shown in table 5 43
46. MAP_SET command is not available Emulation memory has been allocated within the available memory size instead CANNOT USE THIS MODE The GO command cannot be executed because settings for the execution mode are invalid Correctly specify the settings necessary for the specified execution mode SET POINT IS NOT IN RAM A write inhibited address is specified by the BREAKPOINT or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command Specify a correct address CANNOT RECOVER A XXXXXXXX The break instruction at the address xxxxxxxx where a breakpoint is specified with the BREAK or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command could not be recovered after GO command execution is terminated Accordingly a break instruction remains at the breakpoint address A hardware error might have occurred Correct the error and reload and re execute the program NOT FOUND The specified data or information was not found Correctly specify data INTERNAL I O AREA The internal I O area was accessed To display or modify the internal I O register use the I O Registers window ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION ADDRESS The memory contents of the address specified with the BREAK or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command is a break instruction H 003B A breakpoint cannot be specified at this address 313 Table 7 1 Error Messages cont Error Message OUT OF CS AREA ADDRESS Description and Solution An attempt has been made to allocate emulation memory to an area other than CSO to
47. Next gt Goes to the next page MD Pin Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings Note Custom is for use in the future as the product range is developed and expanded Do not select Custom except in special cases 109 MD Pin Page Use this page to set the MCU operating mode Make the settings correctly then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode MD Pin Clock Mode MD3 2 Clock Mode 0 7 Operating Mode MD1 0 M ode 3 single chip mode MD Pin Status Esoo0os User Syste lt Back Cancel Help Figure 5 7 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box MD Pin Page The MCU operating mode specified on the MD Pin page may not be the MCU operating mode which is actually applied You can check which MCU operating mode is currently being used in the System Status window for details on the various modes refer to appendix E 9 CPU Operating Modes 110 Table 5 10 MD Pin Page Option Description Clock Mode MD3 2 Sets the clock mode Clock Mode 0 Clock mode 0 initial value Clock Mode 1 Clock mode 1 Clock Mode 2 Clock mode 2 Clock Mode 3 Clock mode 3 Operating Mode Sets the operating mode MD1 0 MCU Mode 0 MCU expansion mode 0 MCU Mode 1 MCU expansion mode 1 MCU Mode 2 MCU expansion mode 2 Mode 3 single chip mode Single chip mode initial value MD Pin Status E8000S Indicates the Clock Mode MD3 2 and Operating Mode MD1 0 settings
48. PA9 PB5 PD19 HIGH that correspond to the IRQ3 signal IRQ4 Sets the pins PB6 PD20 HIGH that correspond to the IRQ4 signal IRQ5 Sets the pins PB7 PD21 HIGH that correspond to the IRQ5 signal IRQ6 Sets the pins PB8 PD22 HIGH that correspond to the IRQ6 signal IRQ7 Sets the pins PB9 PD23 HIGH that correspond to the IRQ7 signal BREQ Sets the pins PA13 PB7 HIGH that correspond to the BREQ signal BACK Sets the pins PA15 PB6 HIGH that correspond to the BACK signal WAIT Sets the pins PA17 PA17 PB8 PE17 HIGH that correspond to the WAIT signal lt Back Returns to the MD Pin page Next gt Goes to the next page Vcc Down Detection Level Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings Note The initial values for all of these settings are HIGH When signals are specified as HIGH the emulator recognizes them as HIGH regardless of the state of the signals Note that this has no effect on the pin state of the MCU 113 Vcc Down Detection Level Page Sets the detection level of Vcc Down Set the conditions then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode cc Down Detection Level Yoc Down Detection Level 2 BY lt Back Cancel Help Figure 5 9 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Vcc Down Detection Level Page Table 5 12 Vcc Down Detection Level Page Option Description Vcc Down Detection Sets the detection level of Vcc Down Select 2 6 V initial valu
49. Platform page in the System Status window and on the HDI window s status bar Table 5 17 is a list of the messages that indicate the various causes for termination Table 5 17 Display BREAK CONDITION A1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Causes for Termination Meaning Break Condition A has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION B1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Break Condition B has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION C1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Break Condition C has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION U1 2 3 4 Break Condition U has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENCE U Sequential Break Condition U has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENCE A Sequential Break Condition A has been satisfied BREAK CONDITION SEQUENCE B Sequential Break Condition B has been satisfied BREAK KEY A forced break has been issued via the Halt button in the Run command or the STOP button BREAKPOINT The break was triggered by a software breakpoint BREAK SEQUENCE The break was triggered by a software sequential breakpoint ILLEGAL INSTRUCTION A break instruction H 0000 has been executed MULTI BREAK Break triggered by the multibreak feature RESET BY E8000S An error has occurred in the user system The emulator has input a RES signal to the user system and forced the termination of execution STOP ADDRESS The program has terminated at the cursor position after execution of the Go to Cursor menu item
50. SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE Connection with the power on or incorrect connection will damage the emulator user system interface cable and user system and result in a FIRE HAZARD For details on the method of connecting the user system interface cable refer to the descriptions of the user system interface cables for individual SH7046 series products Screw User cable head Ver User system interface cable Evaluation chip board Power supply cable Figure 3 5 Connecting the User System Interface Cable 28 3 3 4 Connecting the External Probe CAUTION Check the external probe direction and connect the external probe to the emulator station correctly Incorrect connection will damage the probe or connector When an external probe is connected to the emulator probe connector on the E8000S station s rear panel it enables external signal tracing and multibreak detection Figure 3 6 shows the external probe connector 29 External probe connector Pin 1 External probe Pin AUL pi 0 in3 3 Pina e 2 Pin i Pin 6 in 8 Enlarged view YNO Probe Pin No Name Signal Name Remarks 1 1 Probe input 0 Synchronous break input pin 2 2 Probe input 1 3 3 Probe input 2 4 4 Probe input 3 5 5 RUN break status RUN state identification signal output pin 6 T Trigger output Trigger mode output pin 7 G GND GND connection pin 8 G Figure 3 6 External Probe
51. The menu items are shown in table 5 85 Table 5 85 Menu Items for Displaying the Results Menu Item Description Address Displays the list of executed addresses default Count Displays the number and period of execution Graph Displays the proportions of execution times to the whole period of execution on a graph Address Select Address to produce a list of addresses as shown in figure 5 81 Performance Analysis Address b Used 1 2 3 5 zl Display type Subroutine address list NO NAME MODE CONDITION sort 11 0000306C 00003124 D 0000H 00M 01S 000000US D 00256 change 12 00003124 0000318C array_a 0000306C 00003124 lt ACCESS gt FFFFFFD8 FFFFFFF8 rand 00003000 0000306C lt CALL SUB gt 000010D4 000010EA TOTAL RUN TIME D OOOOH 00M 00S 001773US 440NS tl Figure 5 81 Performance Analysis Window Measurement of Executed Addresses a Window name and display format b Channel numbers of Performance Analysis that were used c Display format d Results 221 Table 5 86 Display Format of Results When Address is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 13 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 AC Access area count measurement mode SC Subroutine call count measurement mode ADDRESS Subrout
52. Then crystal oscillator will be automatically set and setup This function will allow the execution of the user program at the operating frequency of the user system even when the user system is not connected to the emulator 31 Crystal oscillator terminals Power supply cable Evaluation chip board ee nee Figure 3 7 Installing the Crystal Oscillator External Clock Use the following procedure to select the external clock 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off 2 Connect the evaluation chip board to the user system and supply a clock through the EXTAL pin from the user system 3 Turn on the user system power and then the emulator power USER the external clock will then be automatically specified by a CLOCK command Emulator Internal Clock Specify 4 4 0 MHz 6 6 0 MHz 8 8 0 MHz 10 10 0 MHz or 12 12 5 MHz in the Configuration dialog box or with the CLOCK command Reference When the emulator system program is initiated the emulator automatically selects the MCU clock source according to the following priority 1 User system s clock when an external clock is supplied from the user system 2 Crystal oscillator when attached to the evaluation chip board 3 Emulator internal clock 32 3 3 6 Connecting the System Ground CAUTION Separate the frame ground from the signal ground at the user system When the frame ground is connected to the signal ground and the emulator is
53. Window Of OF x i OxtFTTTrds B Tekiona H 00000000 0 H OOO00daa OER EF EA H 000020da d Oxffffffe0 H 00002704 Oxffffffe4 H 00002f5a Oxffffffes H OO003ead Oxffffffec H O000421fF Oxfffffffo H OO0004did Oxfffffff4 H 000053dc Oxfffffff8 H 00005665 Oxfffffffc H 00005665 Oxffffffdo Figure 4 26 Watch Window Display Example 2 89 4 10 3 Executing Step Over Command The Step Over command executes a line that calls a function as a single step e Before executing the Step Over command execute two steps up to a line that calls the change function by using the Step In command twice W TUTORIAL c BE EI Line Address Label Source 00003036 Break sort ia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 max al9 00003046 min 0 o000304da max 0 00003056 o00030Sa o00030Se Figure 4 27 Source Window Before Step Over Execution 90 e Select Step Over from the Run menu or click the Step Over button T in the toolbar A line that calls the change function is executed as a single step and execution stops at the next line in the program The data of array a which is displayed in the Watch Window window is sorted in descending order 00003036 0000303e 00003042 00003046 0000304a 0000304e o00030Sa o00030Se Label Source Break Figure 4 28 Source Window Step Over OxFFFEFEAS Clon H 00005665 H 00005 3dc H oO004d1d
54. a Channel number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Time measurement mode 11 Time measurement mode 1 I2 Time measurement mode 2 13 Time measurement mode 3 AC Area access count mode SC Subroutine call count measurement mode d Displays the execution time ratio numerically e Execution time f Area access count mode Area access count subroutine call count measurement mode subroutine call count g Maximum subroutine execution time Time measurement mode 2 h Minimum subroutine execution time Time measurement mode 2 i Average subroutine execution time Time measurement mode 2 j Total execution time Examples 1 To set the following conditions to acquire on channel 2 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Subroutine name SORT1 Start address H 10002E 293 End address H 10015C PS CHANNEL 2 MODE TIME1 NAME SORT1 START H 10002E END H 10015C To set the following conditions to acquire on channel 5 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Subroutine name TEST1 Start address range H 100000 to H 10002E End address range H 100030 to H 10015C PS CHANNEL 5 MODE TIME3 NAME TEST1 START H 100000 TO H 10002E END H 100030 TO H 10015C To clear the performance condition set to channel 2 PC CHANNEL 2 4 To clear all performance conditions PC Notes The emulator measures the performance analysis of a subroutine by using the address bus value of the prefetch cycle Therefore i
55. box New conditions can also be created by using the Condition dialog box For example click to select a channel number from the Condition list box on the Condition A page of the Break dialog box Click the Set Condition button to open the Condition dialog box The Condition dialog box has the pages shown in table 5 36 Table 5 36 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Page Description History Displays the history of conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Conditions can be moved from the History page to the Entry List page Entry List Creates modifies duplicates and deletes new conditions for Break Condition A or B 147 a History Page Use this page to display the history of hardware break condition settings for Break Condition A or B Condition History Entry List Condition address H 4000 address H 3000 address H 2000 addres H Hi 000 Cancel Help Figure 5 30 Condition Dialog Box History Page Table 5 37 History Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions are displayed in a list as a history of the conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Entry Makes the condition selected in the Condition list available for use again as a channel of Break Condition A or B Clicking the Entry button moves any condition selected in the Condition list box to the Entry List page and deletes it from the Condition
56. change the display format Select Format from the pop up menu of the AUM window to change the display format Display Color A color is applied to indicate the contents that have been modified since the last update of the display Select Type from the Color group box in the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box When Change is selected as Type modified data will be displayed in color It is also possible to specify the foreground and background colors of the window If Gray is selected the modified data will be displayed in the color with the unchanged data displayed in gray When Mayfly is selected the color is changed every time the contents of the window are updated To set the display format and display color use the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box After setting the required items click the OK button 239 Notes 1 5 14 Auto update Memory Edit x History Address H o Size D 32 byte Format Byte Color Type NoUsed Foreground Background BusWidth 32Bit Details Cancel Help Figure 5 92 Auto update Memory Edit Dialog Box In the situations listed below the user program will not be executed in realtime When an auto update memory item is set or modified while the user program is being executed When Format is modified while the user program is being executed When Halt is selected from the pop up menu of the Trace window or a trace s
57. chip board Be aware of which cables are bundled and the colors of the connectors when connecting the cables 26 4 Connect the trace cables to the station to evaluation chip board interface connectors CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the evaluation chip board Confirm that each trace cable connected to a connector on the E8000S station is also connected to its corresponding station to evaluation chip board interface connector on the evaluation chip board Connect the trace cables using the same method as in step 3 Figure 3 4 shows how to connect the trace cables to the evaluation chip board interface connectors 5 Connect the power supply cables in the device control board to the evaluation chip board The power supply cable prevents an insertion error Figure 3 4 shows how to connect the power supply cables 6 Connect the GND cable of the trace cable to the FG pin on the evaluation chip board GND cable Trace cable CN 2 Trace cable CN 3 Station to evaluation chip board interface CN2 Station to evaluation chip board interface CN1 Station to evaluation chip board interface CN3 MONS YL TMOT VEE Power supply cable Figure 3 4 Connecting Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board 27 3 3 3 Connecting the User System Interface Cable AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system and check pin numbers on the connectors and IC socket before connecting or disconnecting the USER
58. clock refer to section 6 2 7 CLOCK and to section 3 3 5 Selecting the Clock When selecting a clock refer to the following When a clock is selected the emulator resets the MCU Note that this initializes the registers To select the external clock the external clock must be input Otherwise an error message will be displayed and the emulator internal clock will be selected When the emulator system program is started the emulator inputs a clock to the MCU in the following order e When external clock is input from the user system the user system clock is selected e When a crystal oscillator is attached on the evaluation chip board crystal oscillation clock will be selected e Emulator internal clock 12 5 MHz The frequency of the emulator internal clock selected is 12 5 MHz 5 14 2 Checking the I O Signals The emulator checks whether the connection with the user system is correct when the emulator is initiated Through this check abnormal operations such as short circuits of the user system interface signals can be detected The same operation as above can be done with the CHECK command For details on the CHECK command refer to section 6 2 6 CHECK command 5 14 3 Checking the Power Supply and Clock State of the User System The emulator monitors the power supply and the clock state of the user system When the MCU clock is selected by setting USER in the CLOCK command the next operation will be carried out when
59. command steps out of the called function and stops at the next line that called the function in the program e To step out of the sort function select Step Out from the Run menu or click the Step Out button in the toolbar 000023036 Break 00003042 max al9 00003046 min 0 0000304da max O oo0o00304e change a 00003056 min a 9 o00030Sa max a 0 oo00030Se while 1 0000306c _sort void sort long a long t int i j kK gap Figure 4 23 Source Window Step Out 87 The data of array a displayed in the Watch Window window is sorted in ascending order ong Oy l i Oxf FFFFFAE Jelen H 00000000 0 H OOO00daa H 000020da H 00002704 H 00002f5a H O0003ead H 0000421F H O0004d1d H 00005 3dc H 00005665 H FFT FT FFF OEE EEE Oxf fff ffFeo Oxf fff FFe4 Oxf fff fFes Oxf fF fff Fec Oxf fff FfFFO Oxf fff FFF4 Oxf FFT FFFE Oxf fff FF FC Oxf fFfFfFFdO Figure 4 24 Watch Window Display Example 1 To execute two steps use the Step In command twice P TUTORIAL c Line Address Label Source 00003036 0000303e 00003042 Break 0000304a 0000304e 00003056 0000305a o000205e max 0 change a min al9 max a 0 while 1 Figure 4 25 Source Window Step Out Step In The value of variable max displayed in the Watch Window window is changed to the maximum data value 88 Watch
60. computer PC interface board Power supply cable PC interface cable Figure 3 14 Connecting the E8000S Station to the PC Interface Board Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 95 or Windows 98 Description of setting up a PC interface board HS6000EII01H is given below taking settings under Windows 95 as an example 44 e Start Windows 95 e Click the My Computer icon with the right mouse button and select Properties from the pop up menu The System Properties dialog box will be displayed e Double click the Computer icon in the Device Manager panel to open the Computer Properties dialog box e Click the Memory in the View Resources panel to display the memory resources Select one of the address ranges that is not listed in the Computer Properties dialog box For example if you select the range H D8000 to H DBFFF the corresponding switch number will be 6 Define the memory area so that Windows 95 does not use the area as follows e Click Memory in the Reserve Resources panel and click Add The Edit Resource Setting dialog box will be displayed e Enter the memory area addresses in Start value and End value and click OK e Shut down the host computer do not restart it and turn off the power switch e Power on the host computer e Check that the area selected in the Computer Properties dialog box are displayed as System Reserved in the list The ne
61. conditions The conditions in Condition B are not set as sequential break or trace conditions Initial value Break The conditions in Condition A are set as sequential break conditions The conditions in Condition B are set as sequential break or conditions Trace The conditions in Condition A are set as sequential trace conditions The conditions in Condition B are not set as sequential trace conditions TRGB Option Selects a condition for the output of a pulse from the trigger output pin of the emulator when the condition set in the Condition B dialog box is satisfied Condition 1 When a condition among channels 1 to 8 is satisfied a break occurs and no trigger is output Initial value Condition 2 When a condition among channels 1 to 8 is satisfied a trigger is output Condition 3 When a condition of a specified channel is satisfied a trigger is output The channel number can be selected from the combo box TRGU Option Selects a condition for the output of a pulse from the trigger output pin of the emulator when the condition set in the Break Condition U1 2 3 4 dialog box is satisfied Condition 1 A break occurs and no trigger is output Initial value Condition 2 A trigger is output Condition 3 No break occurs and a trigger is output Select one of the above three conditions Note For details on selecting a sequential break or trace condition refer to sections 5 5 Break Functi
62. e g D 7046 Pdf_Read English Ar40eng exe then click OK button 4 Install according to the instructions displayed in the screen 3 3 Emulator Connection The following description is given on emulator connection 3 3 1 Connecting the Device Control Board At shipment the device control board is packed separately from the E8000S station Connect the device control board to the E8000S station according to the following procedure Also use the following procedure to connect them after removing the device control board from the E8000S station to change the device control board AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the E8000S station s front panel is not lit 2 Remove the AC power cable of the E8000S station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet 3 Remove the rear panel from the E8000S station For the slot to which the device control board is to be connected DCONT is marked 22 4 Connect the device control board to the E8000S station When connecting the board prevent the upper or lower side of the board from lifting off the connector Alternately tighten the screws
63. emulation mode the emulator cannot halt tracing when the user selects the Halt button in the Trace window When the user selects sb1 sb2 or sb3 the user must set Break Condition U When the user selects measurementl measurement2 measurement3 or timcb the user must set Break Condition U When the user selects sb1 sb2 sb3 pabreak patrace measurement measurement2 or measurement3 for the emulation mode the emulator will disable the software break conditions 284 6 2 13 ID ID Command syntax and parameters id Description This command displays the emulator system program version Examples To display the emulator system program version ID The display format is as follows gt ID SH7046 E8000S Emulator system file Vm n Copyright C Hitachi Ltd xxxx Licensed Material of Hitachi Ltd 285 6 2 14 MAP SET MS Command syntax and parameters ms lt start gt lt end gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt start gt Numeric Sets the start address lt end gt Numeric Sets the end address lt mode gt Keyword Sets the memory map mode user Uses user memory does not use the emulation memory user read only Uses user memory with write protection user guarded Uses user memory with access prohibited emulator Uses the emulation memory area read only Protects the emulation memory area from being written guarded Prohibits writes to the emulation memory area De
64. emulator will start analyzing from the first pass point again The user can specify up to seven breakpoints and a reset point When emulation passes a reset point the emulator starts analyzing from the first pass point The user cannot set software sequential breakpoints to the following addresses An address whose memory content is H 0000 The address where BREAKPOINT command was set Areas other than CS except for the internal RAM ROM area Instructions that satisfy Break Condition U4 Slot instructions of the delay branch instruction Cancellation This command clears software sequential breakpoints that have been set It also clears reset points Display This command displays software sequential breakpoints that have been set The following shows the display format gt BSD Enable H 1000 H 2000 H 3000reset H 4000 a b c 1 H 00001000 D 0 d 2 H 00002000 D 0 3 H 00003000 D 0 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 Empty 7 Empty R H 00004000 D 0 a Enable Disable b Software sequential breakpoint address c Reset point address d Pass count of each pass point or reset point at the end of execution cannot be displayed during execution 268 Enable or Disable This command enables or disables software sequential breakpoints that have been set Examples 1 To set a software sequential breakpoint at which user program execution stops when the user program has passed the
65. enter the sleep command Adjust the sleep time length which differs according to the operating environment Example To display Not currently available during MEMORY_FILL command execution sleep d 3000 memory_fill 0 ffff 0 e Overwrite file A file having the same name as the output file is overwritten without asking the user 348 e File specification by commands The current directory may be altered by file specifications in commands Absolute paths are recommended to be used to specify the files in a command file so that the current directory alteration is not affected Example FILE_LOAD C HEW HDIS E8000S WTUTORIAL SORT ABS E 1 8 I O Registers Window e Watchdog timer For each Watchdog Timer register there are two registers to be separately used for write and read operations Abbreviation Read Write Register TCNT W Write Watchdog timer counter TCNT R Read Watchdog timer counter TCSR W Write Watchdog timer control status register TCSR R Read Watchdog timer control status register RSTCSR W Write Reset control status register RSTCSR R Read Reset control status register E 1 9 Bit Field The internal I O register definition files SH7046 10 SH7047 10 and CUSTOM IO provided with this product do not define bit fields The bit unit cannot be changed in the I O Registers window When a bit field definition is added to the I O register file the bit unit can be changed For details re
66. for each command are the strings that are input as keyword parameters Only the listed strings can be used If a string that is not listed is input an error will occur 3 String parameters String parameters are used to input mask data and file names When using strings to mask data specify H hexadecimal or B binary at the head of the data as the radix and specify for the digits to be masked No Input Value Mask Unit Example Masked Bits 1 Binary 1 bit B 01110 Masks bits 0 to 2 2 Hexadecimal 4 bits H 000F50 Masks bits 0 to 7 6 1 4 Examples The examples show how to input the command When output results the output is also described 6 2 List of Commands The following is a list of HDI emulation commands Sections in this manual are indicated in the second column If there is no section number the description is in the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual provided on the CD R 246 Table 6 1 List of Commands 247 Command Section Abbreviation Description Comment ASSEMBLE AS Assembles user program ASSERT Checks condition BREAKCONDITION_CLEAR 6 2 1 BCC Clears hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_DISPLAY 6 2 1 BCD Displays hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_ENABLE 6 2 1 BCE Enables or disables hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_SET 6 2 1 BCS Sets hardware break conditions BREAKCONDITION_U_CL
67. gt 301 Parameter Description lt delayopt gt Specifies the number of bus cycles to be executed after the trace acquisition condition is satisfied Valid when lt tracetype gt is stop lt type gt is a or b and lt channel_numbers is 7 To specify the number of bus cycles to be executed delay lt value gt Any value from H 1 to H 7FFF can be specified as lt value gt Description e Setting Specifies a trace acquisition condition Trace Condition A B C Free trace Acquires trace information in all bus cycles when no conditions are set Range trace Acquires trace information in the bus cycles within which the specified conditions are matched For a description of the conditions that can be specified see the description of lt option gt for the tas command Trace stop When the set condition is satisfied the emulator stops acquiring trace information and the system enters the trace halt state For conditions that can be set see the description of lt option gt for the tas command Although the user program is still in emulation trace information cannot be acquired in the trace halt state When the trace stop condition is satisfied the following message is displayed on the status bar and a message box is displayed TRACE STOP Subroutine trace Traces access to instruction and operands within the range subroutine set as the start and end addresses Subroutine range trace Acquires t
68. in a specified order This function uses Break Condition A or B a sequence of up to seven break conditions along with one reset point can be specified as Break Condition A or B The user must consider the order of satisfaction in specifying break conditions for Break Conditions A and B a break will only occur when the break conditions have all been satisfied in the order specified by the user When the reset point is passed the record of hardware sequential break conditions that have been satisfied to that point is cleared and the emulator restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential break conditions from the first break condition Setting a Hardware Sequential Break Select Break for Condition A under Sequence on the Execution Mode2 page of the Configuration dialog box 150 Figure 5 32 Configuration Dialog Box Hardware Sequential Break This setting selects Break Condition A for use as a hardware sequential break At this time any existing condition settings for Break Condition A are cleared if there are conditions for Trace Condition A those conditions are cleared Select the Condition A page of the Breakpoints window The same setting procedure applies to the Condition B page Figure 5 33 shows an example of the display when three break condition points and one reset point have been specified as Break Condition A 151 ConditionB ConditionC ConditionU Point Sequence Condition A Seq
69. in the end address range is input as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start address and end address in the end address range are automatically displayed When Access area count measurement mode is selected Set the start and end addresses and the address range accessed by the subroutine General Address Subroutine Address ae Start Ho E End H 6 gt Access Area Address Range Start H124 ae End jH 8B Figure 5 76 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page Table 5 81 Options on the Address Page When Access area count measurement mode is Selected Subroutine Address Option Description Start Sets the start address of a subroutine as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address of a subroutine as a numerical or symbolic value bal Displays the Input Function Range dialog box in which the start address of a subroutine is input as a numerical or symbolic value When a setting is made in this dialog box the start and end addresses of the subroutine are automatically displayed 216 Access Area Address Range Option Description Start Sets the start address of the address range for access as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address of an address range for access as a numerical or symbolic value Displays the Input Function Range dialog box in which the
70. interface cable o o s g 2 IC socket User system Figure 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components 10 2 1 1 E8000S Station Components The names of the components on the front rear panel of the E8000S station are listed below Front Panel Figure 2 2 E8000S Station Front Panel 1 POWER lamp Is lit up while the E8000S station is supplied with power 2 RUN lamp Is lit up while the user program is running 11 Rear Panel TRC CONT Figure 2 3 E8000S Station Rear Panel A B C D a b d e g h Optional board slot Control board slot Trace board slot Device control board slot Power switch Fuse box AC power connector PC interface cable connector Host interface switches Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN1 Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN2 Trace cable mis insertion inhibiting seal CN2 Trace cable mis insertion inhibiting seal CN1 For installing the optional board expansion slot For installing the control board For installing the trace board For installing the device control board depends on the target device Turning this switch to I input supplies power to the emulator E8000S station and evaluation chip board Contains an AC 100 V to 240 V power supply fuse 250 V 3A For an AC 100 V to 240 V power supply For the PC interface cable that conn
71. list on the History page Note New Edit Delete and Duplicate are not available The hardware break conditions that have been specified in the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 dialog boxes are displayed in the Condition list on the History page Select a condition from the Condition list then click the Entry button to register that condition on the Entry List page The condition is deleted from the Condition list 148 b Entry List Page Use this page to create modify duplicate delete and display conditions for Break Condition A or B Condition History Entry List Condition Edit Delete Ente gt Duplicate Cancel Help Figure 5 31 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page Table 5 38 Entry List Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions that have previously been set can be redisplayed in a list New Displays the Condition A B dialog box so new conditions can be set Edit Modifies a condition Select a condition to be modified from the Condition list then click the Edit button to display the Condition A B dialog box and modify the condition Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Condition list Duplicate Duplicates the condition selected in the Condition list Note Entry is not available The Condition list displays a list of hardware break conditions that have been set Click to select a condition
72. module Select the corresponding source file and click the Open button E 2 Emulation Memory 1 The emulator manages areas in the memory blocks shown in figures E 1 and E 2 Emulation memory and user memory cannot coexist in a single block 2 When emulation memory is used in 50 MHz operation one or more cycles are required as wait state cycles for access to those areas to which emulation memory is allocated When emulation memory is used refer to the table below and set the number of waits for the bus state controller External Operating Frequency Number of Required Waits 50 MHz One or more 40 MHz or lower 0 350 Memory map for internal ROM invalid mode H 00000000 00000000 2M 128K H 001 FFFFF 0001 FFFF H 00200000 00200000 2M 1M H 003FFFFF 002F H 00400000 000A0000 128K H 007FFFFF 000BFFFF H 00800000 000C0000 128K 000DFFFF 000E0000 128K 000FF 00100000 128K 0011 00A00000 1M HOOBFFFFF GORFF H 00C00000 00B00000 1M 00BFFFFF 4M 00C00000 2M 00FFFFFF OODEEFEE 01000000 00E00000 Reserved 2M FFFEFFFF 00FFFFFF FFFF0000 001A0000 16K Internal RAM for expansion 128K FF3FFF 001BFFFF 001C0000 Reserved 128K 001DFFFF 001E0000 Internal O slave 1 O 128K 001FFFFF Internal RAM SB Short block LB Large block Figure E 1 Memory Map in the Invalid Internal ROM Mode 351 Memory map
73. o x o x o x measurement mode Subroutine call count o x o x o x o x measurement mode Note o Can be set x Cannot be set Note Two channels are necessary to specify the start and end address ranges for subroutine time measurement mode 3 Therefore settings for subroutine time measurement mode 3 can only be made on odd numbered channels In the access area count measurement mode two channels are required to specify the start and end addresses of the area accessed by the subroutine specified by its start and end addresses Therefore settings for access area count measurement mode can only be made on odd numbered channels In the subroutine 210 call count measurement mode two channels are required to specify the start and end addresses of the subroutine accessed by the first subroutine itself specified by its start and end addresses Therefore settings for subroutine call count measurement mode can only be made on odd numbered channels Performance Measurement Time To set the time over which the emulator to measure the performance use the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution of the Execution Mode1 page in the Configuration dialog box The user can select approximately 14 minutes with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 26 seconds with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us or 0 33 seconds with a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns as the maximum time interval over which t
74. operating state when the time specified by the command has elapsed Figure 5 11 shows the timing with which the TRIG signal is output to the trigger output probe in cycle reset mode Time specified by the command Yn lt I I TRIG FES t Figure 5 11 Timing for Trigger Signal Output 118 Restrictions on emulation modes are listed in table 5 16 Table 5 16 Restrictions on Emulation Modes Emulation Mode Restrictions Cycle reset mode and e Settings for software software sequential hardware hardware elapsed time of sequential internal and internal sequential breaks are all ignored condition satisfaction be A od Trace acquisition conditions are ignored e Cannot enter trace halt mode Internal sequential Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored break mode Timeout break mode Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored Timeout trace stop Settings for software and software sequential breaks are ignored mode Break disabled mode Settings for software software sequential hardware hardware sequential internal internal sequential breaks are all ignored See table 5 26 for details on break conditions and see table 5 60 for details on trace acquisition conditions 119 5 3 2 Trace Halt Mode Function While in trace halt mode tracing is halted and this means that trace information cannot be acquired by the trace buffer During periods in trace
75. or use Hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability However contact Hitachi s sales office before using the product in an application that demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury such as aerospace aeronautics nuclear power combustion control transportation traffic safety equipment or medical equipment for life support Design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by Hitachi particularly for maximum rating operating supply voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation conditions and other characteristics Hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges Even within the guaranteed ranges consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and employ systemic measures such as fail safes so that the equipment incorporating Hitachi product does not cause bodily injury fire or other consequential damage due to operation of the Hitachi product This product is not designed to be radiation resistant No one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate in any form the whole or part of this document without written approval from Hitachi Contact Hitachi s sales office for any questions regarding this document or Hitachi semiconductor products IMPORTANT
76. pass points in the order of H C010000 and H C020000 and the analysis for the pass sequence is reset when the user program has passed H C030000 BSS H C010000 H C020000 RESET H C030000 To set a software sequential breakpoint at which user program execution stops when the user program has passed the pass points in the order of H C01000 H C02000 and H C03000 BSS H C01000 H C02000 H C03000 To enable software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSE ENABLE To disable software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSE DISABLE To clear software sequential breakpoints that have been set BSC 269 6 2 6 CHECK CHECK Command syntax and parameters check Description This command tests the MCU pin state When the emulator generates an error the following is displayed lt Pin name gt HIGH or LOW The following shows the pins to test the pin state Pin Name Error State IRQO Displays high or low IRQO pin state IRQ1 Displays high or low IRQ1 pin state IRQ2 Displays high or low IRQ2 pin state IRQ3 Displays high or low IRQ3 pin state IRQ4 Displays high or low IRQ4 pin state IRQ5 Displays high or low IRQ5 pin state IRQ6 Displays high or low IRQ6 pin state IRQ7 Displays high or low IRQ7 pin state WAIT Displays high or low WAIT pin state BREQ Displays high or low BREQ pin state RES Displays high or low RES pin state MRES Displays high or low MRES pin st
77. period has exceeded the time specified as Bus timeout in the Configuration dialog box in the Execution Mode1 page VCC DOWN The voltage on Vcc is below the Vcc Down level specified in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box The MCU is not operating correctly this message is only displayed when the user clock has been selected WAIT A xxxxxxxx The WAIT signal is low The value on the address bus is displayed This is not displayed during refresh cycles BREQ The BREQ signal is low 122 5 4 5 4 1 Step Functions Step Execution Several types of step execution are available and are shown in table 5 19 Table 5 19 Step Execution Type Description Procedure Executing each instruction of a function as a single step Executes each line or instruction as one step When a function is called the call is executed and execution stops at the first line or instruction of the called function Click the Step button Select Step In from the Run menu Executing all instructions of a function as a single step Executes each line or instruction as one step until a function is called When a function is called all instructions of the called function are executed as a single step and execution stops at the line or instruction immediately after the calling line or instruction Click the Step Over button Select Step Over from the Run menu Executing a specifie
78. start address of the address range is input as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start and end addresses of the address range are automatically displayed When Subroutine call count measurement mode is selected Set the start and end addresses and the called subroutine s address range General Address T Subroutine Address Parent Start Ho E F Call Subroutine Address Child Stat H 68 End H129 Figure 5 77 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page 217 Table 5 82 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine call count measurement mode is Selected Subroutine Address Parent Option Description Start Sets the start address of a subroutine as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address of a subroutine as a numerical or symbolic value fel Displays the Input Function Range dialog box in which the start address of a subroutine is input as a numerical or symbolic value When a setting is made in this dialog box the start and end addresses of the subroutine are automatically displayed Call Subroutine Address Child Option Description Start Sets the start address of the called subroutine s address range as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets the end address of the called subroutine s address range as a numerical or symbolic value Lal Displays the Input Funct
79. stops when the trace stop conditions have all been satisfied in the order specified by the user When the reset point is passed the record of sequential trace stop conditions that have been satisfied to that point is cleared and the emulator restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential trace stop conditions from the first condition b Setting a Sequential Trace Stop Select Trace for Condition A under Sequence on the Execution Mode2 page of the Configuration dialog box The same setting procedure can be used on the Condition B page 178 General Execution Model Execution Mode2 Sequence Condition amp Trace X Condition B Not used X M TRGB Option When Break Condition B or Trace Condition B are satistied Specifies whether a pulse is output from trigger output pin of the E8000 without a break Break occurs but does not output a trigger C Outputs a trigger when any hardware break condition Qutputs a trigger when the specified hardware break condition Condition B1 m TRGU Option When hardware break condition set by the User Break Control are satisfied Specifies whether a pulse is output from trigger output pin of the E8000 without a break Break occurs but does not output a trigger Break occurs and outputs a trigger Outputs a trigger without a break Figure 5 50 Configuration Dialog Box Sequential Trace Stop This setting sele
80. subroutine gt Range trace in the subroutine only valid when lt channel_number gt is 1 3 5 or 7 lt subroutine gt Numeric Specifies the start and end addresses of the subroutine To specify a pass count lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric 298 Description of the tas command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies an address condition To specify an address as a trace condition address lt address gt not To specify an address range as a trace condition address lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt not To mask address data address mask lt maskdata gt not lt address gt Address numeric lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Mask data Add not to specify an address or range outside which the user program should be traced However do not add not when lt type gt is c 299 Parameter lt dataopt gt Description Specifies a data condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To specify an 8 bit data trace condition data lt data gt byte lt position gt not To specify a 16 bit data trace condition data lt data gt word lt position gt not To specify a 32 bit data trace condition data lt data gt long not lt data gt Specify data value numeric lt position gt Specify val
81. the ESI will terminate Turn off the emulator s power switch Next Custom Install will be described When the Select Install dialog box has been displayed select the Custom Install radio button The E8000 Load Files dialog box will be displayed Add or modify files 51 E8000 Load Files xi Only Checked kind of files are installed SYSTEM FILE IV e SHEWSHdISSESO00S xxx SYSTEMS CONFIGURATION FILE cee m FIRMWARE FILE Vv e SHEW HdISSE 80005700A SYSTEMS OK DIAGNOSTIC FILE Ce Se Cancel Hep Quit Figure 3 19 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH7046 Each check box corresponds to the combo box to its right Select the check box that corresponds to the files you wish to install Place the cursor on the combo box and click the Browse button When the Browse button is clicked the File Selection dialog box will be displayed Select the files to install If you decide not to install a file do not select the check box When the check box is not selected which means it is invalid the file will be grayed out and will not be installed Click the OK button The system program will be installed in the flash memory of the E8000S station The file name will be displayed in the status bar as each file is installed From here the description of Custom Install is the same as that of Auto Install Click Cancel to return to the Select Install dialog box For detail
82. the emulator executes user program Examples 1 To display current debugging conditions set during user program execution EM The following shows the display format gt EM Execution Mode Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Interval Timer counter 20ns Bus timeout 100us Multi break PRB1 Disabled Internal ROM Option Disabled RES signal Enabled BREQ signal Enabled WAIT signal Enabled Output trigger TRGB Disabled Output trigger TRGU Disabled 2 To enable the input of the bus mastership request signal for the debugging conditions set during user program execution EM BREQ ENABLE 3 To output a trigger pulse when the hardware break conditions are satisfied for any of the channels set by Break Condition B or Trace Condition B and to set the execution time measurement unit to 20 ns for the debugging conditions set during user program execution EM TIME 20NS TRGB ALL 281 6 2 12 GO_OPTION GP Command syntax and parameters e Setting gp eml_mode lt eml_mode gt e Display gp Parameter Type Description lt eml_mode gt Keyword Sets the emulation mode Refer to the next table for settings 282 Pin Mode Description normal Executes the user program normally 6 5us Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 6 5 us 9 8us Executes the user prog
83. the emulator internal register where an error occurs BOTRAR ECT BOCNR BOMDCNR BOMASCR BOCECR B1CNR B1MDCNR B1MASCR B1CECR MAPRO MAPR1 MAPR2 MAPR3 SHARED RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error occurred in the shared RAM BxTBM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error occurred in the trace buffer memory FIRM RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxx W DATA xxxxxxxx R DATA XXXXXXXX An error occurred in the firmware RAM area 2 Errors that may occur when the device control board is being tested A program operating in the device control board is being loaded and the device control board is being tested If an error occurs the following message is displayed 58 Error Message INVALID FIRMWARE SYSTEM Description Another firmware has been installed Reinstall the correct emulator system program This message is displayed when the H UDI s input clock frequency is higher than the input clock frequency for the peripheral internal module PQ EMULATOR FIRMWARE NOT READY The program operating on the device control board is not operating correctly Please check that the evaluation chip board is connected correctly FIRMWARE SYSTEM FILE NOT FOUND A program operating in the device control board does not exits An incorrect system program has been registered in the flash memory Reinstall the system program and restart the emulator SDI B
84. this is the execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 In time interval measurement mode 2 3 the execution count from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 E COUNT is displayed here b In time interval measurement mode 2 3 this is the maximum execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 c In time interval measurement mode 2 3 this is the minimum execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 d In time interval measurement mode 2 3 this is the average execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U1 e In time interval measurement mode 3 this is the execution time and execution count E COUNT from the satisfaction of Break Condition U4 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U3 f In time interval measurement mode 3 this is the maximum execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U4 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U3 g In time interval measurement mode 3 this is the minimum execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U4 to the satisfaction of Break Condition U3 h In time interval measurement mode 3 this is the average execution time from the satisfaction of Break Condition U4 to the satisfaction of Break
85. trace information from among the values listed below 20ns Time stamping is in minimum time units of 20 ns default 1 6us Time stamping is in minimum time units of 1 6 us 52us Time stamping is in minimum time units of 52 us CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with the cycles of the system clock signal 1 2 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 2 cycles of the system clock 0 signal 1 4 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 4 cycles of the system clock 0 signal 1 8 CPU clock Time stamping is in terms of the number of bus clock cycles i e is synchronized with 1 8 cycles of the system clock 0 signal Click the Apply button to set the minimum time then click the Close button 5 6 2 External Bus Trace Timing The acquisition of trace information is synchronized with the rising edge of T2 cycles of the CK signal In each bus cycle the number of cycles between the end of the previous bus cycle and the end of the current bus cycle is measured An example of a bus trace timing for access to an area of normal SRAM is shown in figure 5 58 Note When the external probe signal information is traced changes in the signal may not be traced if its level changes with certain timings This is because the signal is not synchronized with th
86. used 7 H DC000 to H DFFFF F Not used Note When C to F of the switch are set memory areas cannot be allocated Set one of 0 to B 42 Installing the PC Interface Board AWARNING Always switch OFF the personal computer host computer and peripheral devices connected to the personal computer before installing the PC interface board Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the personal computer interface board and peripheral devices or will result in PERSONAL INJURY Remove the cover of the host computer and install the PC interface board in the ISA bus specification extension slot Tighten the screw after confirming that the PC interface cable can be connected to the board PC interface cable Host computer case PC interface board ISA bus specification extension slot Figure 3 13 Installing the PC Interface Board 43 Connecting the E8000S Station to the PC Interface Board AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Before using the emulator connect the E8000S station to the PC interface board with the PC interface cable supplied as shown in figure 3 14 E8000S station rear panel DCONT__ TRC_ CONT Host
87. user program until the user program reaches the end address range An example of the use of subroutine time measurement mode 3 is described below Here the start address range is assumed to be from H 1000 to H 13FF and the end address range to be from H 1C00 to H 1FFF While the user program is running the emulator will start to measure the execution time of the user program from the start address range H 1000 to H 13FF until the user program reaches the end address range H 1C00 to H l FFF When the emulator starts to measure the execution time of the user program it will not stop until the user program reaches the end address range H 1C00 to H 1FFF or a break occurs during emulation Therefore the emulator will continue to measure the execution time when the user program jumps to address H 3000 209 Address pete Address H 1000 Address H 13FF Address H 1C00 Measurement range Address H 1 FFF Address H OFFF Figure 5 71 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 A list of subroutine measurement modes that can be set in the Performance 1 to 8 dialog box is shown in table 5 75 Table 5 75 Modes that are Available in the Performance1 to 8 Dialog Boxes Channel Number for Performance Analysis Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Subroutine time o o o o o o o o measurement mode 1 Subroutine time o o o o o o o o measurement mode 2 Subroutine time o x o x o x o x measurement mode 3 Access area count o x
88. write protected or access forbidden attribute Break due to trace buffer overflow This break occurs when the trace buffer in the emulator overflows during trace acquisition Timeout break A timeout break occurs when the execution time exceeds the timeout condition specified for Performance Analysis 1 125 Notes 1 In the Enable column of the Breakpoints window O is displayed when the corresponding Break Condition A B C or U is enabled Nothing is displayed when the Break Condition is disabled When a breakpoint is specified at an address that has also been specified as the address bus condition for Break Condition A B C or U is displayed instead of O 2 During execution of the user program Go to Source item of the pop up menu in the Breakpoints window cannot be used to move from the display of a breakpoint to the corresponding line of source code or address in the Source or Disassemble window 5 5 1 Software Break Overview Any content at the specified address is replaced by a break instruction a dedicated instruction for use with the emulator Execution of the user program stops when the break instruction is executed The instruction that had been at the address is not executed so the result is a break before execution A number of passes can be specified as a break condition and a break will then occur when the breakpoint has been passed the specified number of times It is possible to spe
89. 0 eeeseecseeceeecenscoevonseensesncssenssesssesserseesneesneesneveensens 348 E 1 7 Command Line Window siseses rissie eiren ierik ae ioi ESS 348 E41 8 VO Registers Wind Wineen ai eee E EEE EEE EEE RENEE i 349 J E R S E a EEE E RE A 349 E 1 10 Line Assembly sisin onea an eave An Reka ead E 349 E 1 11 Profiler FUNCION sioen rira ie es EE E E EE 349 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 E 6 E 7 E 8 E 9 E 1 12 Usage with Another Version of HDI cc ccecccesecsseescneeescssecesesessseseseeeeenee 350 E 1 13 Operation During Accessing Files eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeceesceseeesecaeceaecaecneeeneeees 350 E 1 14 Moving Source File Position after Creating Load Module 0 teens 350 Emulation Memory sste eoori oerset or o e EE ESEE ETE ae EEEE E EEEa Sres 350 User System Interface oiii aneen e E R E E E EEEE TEA EEEE EET E 353 Hardware Break F ncthon ss isccsccsescssncptecsctevagesscdhseeseesssesctesdevasssetacesvecsavasssetavestendivesstesea 354 E 4 1 Setting Address Bus and Data Bus Conditions 0 cee ceeseesesseeeeseseeeneenes 354 Hardware Sequential Break Trace Function 0 eee eceecceesceeeceseceseceaecsecseecaeeeneeeaeeeneees 355 Differences between the Emulator and the MCU uw ee eceeeeeeecesecesecesecesecnaeeseeeaeeees 355 Step HUNCH ON 05 5 sc55sMeseescevesesdiveast deus covtevey vege osangocbeceuneevansnsdbengevteasessaioens T 356 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory eee eeeceeeecesecesecnsecnseceeeneeenes 357 E 8
90. 00 a3tf Configuration Configure Figure 3 22 Driver Details Dialog Box When ISA Bus Is Selected During the HDI initiation the following messages are shown on the status bar of the HDI window i DiveiLinkiupicCheck Stats cin nm O NM A Hardware Register Read Write amp System ID Check Start NUM a Figure 3 23 Status Bar during the HDI Initiation A message box will be displayed to ask whether to initiate the diagnostic program figure 3 30 when Diagnostic Test Program has been selected in the component selection dialog box when the HDI was installed Click the Yes button to initiate the diagnostic program For details refer to section 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program Link up appears on the status bar when the HDI and the emulator have successfully started up E NS ASAA AA NUM ERE 7 Figure 3 24 Status Bar at the HDI Initiation Completion 54 When HDI is started for the first time after installation the following message box will be displayed The same message box is not displayed again HDI 9 Are you sure you want to modify your CPU Operating Mode settings This will cause your emulator to be reinitialised Figure 3 25 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 1 Click Yes to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box In this dialog box the operating mode of the emulator can be
91. 000 ulepcc2k sys System file PCMCIA For Windows 2000 Drivers Pcmcia 2000 ulepcc2k inf Setup information PCMCIA For Windows 2000 Manuals Japanese HS6400DIIW5SJ pdf 2 Hitachi Debugging Interface user s manual PDF documents in Japanese Manuals Japanese HS7046EBK81 Hu pdf x2 SH7046 E8000S emulator user s manual PDF documents in Japanese Manuals Japanese HS7046TM81 HJA pdf Descriptive notes on the diagnostic program for the SH7046 E8000S emulator PDF documents in Japanese Manuals English HS6400DIIW5SE pdf x4 Hitachi Debugging Interface user s manual PDF documents in English Manuals English HS7046EBK81HE pdf x4 SH7046 E8000S emulator user s manual PDF documents in English Manuals English HS7046TM81HE pdf x4 Descriptive notes on the diagnostic program for the SH7046 E8000S emulator PDF documents in English Pdf_read Japanese Ar40jpn exe Acrobat Reader 4 0 installer Japanese version Pdf_read English Notes 1 Ar40eng exe Acrobat Reader 4 0 installer Installed on your host computer by the installer English version 2 This is the Japanese version of the manual It cannot be installed by the English language version of the installer 3 indicates a manual revision 4 This is the English version of the manual It cannot be installed by the
92. 000 have been executed in sequence Figure 5 16 Example of a Software Sequential Break A reset point can be specified along with the pass points When execution passes the reset point or if the pass points are not passed in the specified order the execution record for the pass point up to that point is cleared The emulator then restarts checking for satisfaction of the sequential break conditions from the first pass point Up to seven pass points and one reset point can be specified 130 Break condition A break occurs when the instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have User program prog been executed in sequence Program flow 1000 __ No break occurs Break condition 1 Wait for break condition 2 Clears the break record 500 No break occurs 5 gt i f ns and searches for Reset point Wait for break condition 1 the condition from break condition 1 2000 No break occurs Break condition 2 Wait for break condition 1 1000 __ No break occurs Break condition 1 Wait for break condition 2 2000 Break condition 2 gt A break occurs Figure 5 17 Example of a Software Sequential Break Reset Point Specification Setting Software Sequential Break Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Sequence page 131 ConditionB ConditionC Conditio
93. 1 Suspension of Program Execution Reference Periods 0 ec eeeeseeeseeseeeseeeees 357 Bi8 2 Short Breaks aieeaa oae eio bathe taatienicnied Gti Ma ee eet ia tee a ioe eit eines 357 E 8 3 Parallel Access t 2ssecisics2useetsie sous seeavistige soees scene esae aeoe STE EEEE op Eea ESERE E Eesi 357 CPU Operating Mode essiri erara e aes EEE else aioe EErEE he EE 358 viii Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Emulator tot the SH7040 5 sscecscyccsence cveverse suyevocbactencs Sovsbeecoupsageucusact snes Mbsntavene ate theses eos 2 Emulator Hardware Component eeeeecceesceseeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeseeseceseeeeeeseenseseseseesseees 10 E8000S Station Front Panels smece ie opsthaneuecasievssaets A Reese aie ane 11 E8000S Station Rear Panel eee ceeceeseeeeceeseeseceecesecsaecsaecsaecsaecneseaeseneseeeeeees 12 Device Control B ard ser esseer eepe dang eee e Ee NE EEE ENEs seeds yy 14 Evaluation Chip Board HS7046EBK81H seseessssesssreesssreeresrsrreresresrssrerrsserrreresrenees 15 Configurati
94. 1 and subroutine time measurement modes 1 and 2 Specification count lt count gt H 1 to H FFFF can be specified for count lt accessopt gt Specifies the address range accessed from the subroutine in the area access count mode The user can use parameter lt accessopt gt in mode access Specification access lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt subroutineopt gt Specifies the address range of a child subroutine accessed from the parent subroutine in the subroutine call count measurement mode The user can use parameter lt subroutineopt gt in mode subroutine Specification subroutine lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric 290 Description Setting This command sets the condition to measure the subroutine performance Up to eight subroutines can be specified in measurement modes 1 and 2 and up to four subroutines can be specified in measurement mode 3 area access count mode and subroutine call count measurement mode Cancellation This command clears the condition to measure the subroutine performance When the user specifies a channel number the emulator clears the specified channel number When the user does not specify any channel number all of the performance conditions are cleared Display This command displays the result of measu
95. 174 Table 5 56 Condition A B C Page Options Option Description Condition Displays the current settings for Trace Condition A B or C Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 8 Settings for Trace Condition X1 to X8 X A B or C Edit Modifies the Trace Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Trace Condition Xn dialog box X A B or C n channel number Set Condition Modifies the Trace Condition A or B settings selected in the Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box This option is not displayed on the Condition C page Reset Clears the Trace Condition A B or C settings selected in the Condition list box Reset All Clears all Trace Condition A B or C settings in the Condition list box Click condition 1 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A7 dialog box General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay Mode J C Range Trace Stop C Subroutine Range in subroutine Figure 5 49 Trace Condition A7 Dialog Box General Page Select Trace Stop on the General page The Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 57 175 Table 5 57 Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages D
96. 2 for Start and D 255 for End Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace Filter dialog box closes and the search results are displayed in the Trace window The trace search conditions that can be specified and the corresponding pages in the Trace Filter dialog box are shown in table 5 69 194 Table 5 69 Trace Search Conditions and Pages in the Trace Filter Dialog Box Page Condition Description General Sets trace search range Address Address bus Searches for records in which the value on the address bus program counter or memory access area matches the specified condition Data Data bus Searches for records in which the value on the data bus matches the specified condition Bus State Bus state Searches for records in which access type read write access and BREQ signal match the specified condition Probe External probe Searches for records in which the external probe signal levels match the specified condition Interrupt External interrupt Searches for records in which the NMI RES MRES signal or IRQO to IRQ7 signal levels match the specified condition Time Time stamp Searches for records in which the time stamp matches the specified condition time or range The setting of conditions for Data except for Outside Range items and Probe is the same as setting the corresponding Break Con
97. 3 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Address Page cesesseecesreeeseeceereeeeeeeee 139 Figure 5 24 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Data Page eee eeeeeseeceeeeeeneecenreeeneeeeee 140 Figure 5 25 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Bus State Page eee ceeeceesseceeneeceeeeeeeeeees 142 Figure 5 26 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Probe Page ee ceeeeesseceeeeceeeceeneeenseeeeee 143 Figure 5 27 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Interrupt Page ee eeeceeeeeesteceeeeeeneeeeeee 144 Figure 5 28 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Count Page cee eeeeesceceeeeeeneeceneeeeneeeeee 145 Figure 5 29 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Delay Page 00 0 eee eeeeeseeceeeeeeneecenreeeneeeeee 146 Figure 5 30 Condition Dialog Box History Page cee eesceeeseeeneeceeeeeeeeceereeeeeceereeeneeeeee 148 Figure 5 31 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page oe ee eeeeeeseeceseeeeneeceeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeee 149 Figure 5 32 Configuration Dialog Box Hardware Sequential Break 0 000 eee ee ee eeeeeeeee 151 Figure 5 33 Break Dialog Box after Setting a Hardware Sequential Break 152 Figure 5 34 Condition Dialog Box History Page 0 cee eesceeseeeeseceeeeeeeeceteeeeneeceereeeneeeeee 153 Figure 5 35 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page oe eee eeeeeesseceeeceeneeceeeeeeeeceneeeeneeeeee 155 Figure 5 36 Example Display of the Status of a Hardware Sequential Break Condition 156 Figure 5 37 B
98. 6 j j ooo030la ali j 00003036 sortia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 max al93 Figure 4 10 Source Window Setting a Software Breakpoint The emulator has many break functions For details refer to section 5 5 Break Functions 75 4 6 Executing the Program e To execute the program select Reset Go from the Run menu or click the Reset Go button on the toolbar The program will be executed up to the breakpoint that has been set and will then stop The line where the program has halted will be highlighted in the Source window PI TUTORIAL c Bc Line Address Label Source 00003000 _lain void main void long a l0 min max long j int i q 00003002 fori i 0 i lt 10 itt jf o000300a j randi 000032012 ifij lt 0 00002016 j j o000301la ali 0000303e 00003042 Figure 4 11 Source Window Break State 76 The user can see the cause of the last break through the Platform sheet in the System Status window e Select Status from the View menu The System Status window is displayed e Select Platform sheet from the System Status window System Status iof x Item Status Fonnected To SH7046 E8000S Emulator CPU SH 047 peels Mode Auto select Disabled Clock Mode MD3 2 Clock Mode 0 Operating Mode MD1 0 MCU Mode 0 MD Value CE8000S 00 MD Value User System 00 Pin Counts Device 100 IRQO HIGH TROL HIGH IRQ HIGH IRQ3 HIG
99. 74 HD151015 EPM7512AE LVTH16244 2 35kQ _HSTBY AHC14 AHC14 _RES EPM7512AE LVTH16244 LVTH16374 LVTH16374 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 3 323 MCU in the emulator User system 1009 PLLVcc PLLVcc 3002 470pF 0 1uF Neate PLLCAP PLLVss NC XTAL LVTH16244 1500 LVTH16244 EPM7256AELVTH16244 1509 LVTH16244 EXTAL EPM7512AE MAX709M MAX709R 3Vcc AQV251A PVcc HSM123 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 4 324 MCU in the emulator PVcc User system 47kQ PA 19 17 PA 19 17 PA 9 7 PA5 PA2 PA 9 7 PA5 PA2 EPM7512AE PA 23 20 PA16 PA 23 20 PA16 PA11 PA6 PA4 PAS PA11 PA6 PA4 PAS PA1 PAO PVcc PA1 PAO 47kQ PB 9 2 EPM7512AE PB 1 0 PC 15 0 PVcc 47kQ PD 23 16 EPM7512AE PD 31 24 PD 15 8 PD 31 24 PD 15 8 Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 5 325 User system MCU in the emulator PE17 EPM7512AE PE 21 18 PE 16 14 PE 21 18 PE 16 14 PE 12 0 PE 12 0 PF 15 0 PG 3 0 PF 15 0 PG 3 0 SN74S1053NS Figure A 2 User System Interface Circuits 6 326 Appendix B Emulator External Dimensions and Mass Figures B 1 and B 2 show the external dimensions and mass of the E8000S station and evaluation chip board respectively Station trace cable Unit mm Mass of the emulator station 5 05 kg Figure B 1 External Dimensi
100. ADDRESS H 300000 To display the display format when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCD A The display format is as follows gt BCD A Break Condition A Sequential Enable 1 address H 100000 2 address H 200000 R address H 300000 To disable the display format when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCE A DISABLE To clear the display format when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A BCC A Notes When a Break Condition is satisfied emulation may stop after two or more instructions have been executed It is not possible to use numbers to specify the points of a hardware sequential break It sets the condition in the order opposite to the sequence of conditions To set the sequential conditions again clear all of the conditions 258 6 2 2 Internal Break Commands BCUS BCUC BCUD BCUE e Setting e Cancellation e Display e Enable or Disable Command syntax and parameters BREAKCONDITION_U_SET BCUS BREAKCONDITION_U_CLEAR BCUC BREAKCONDITION_U_DISPLAY BCUD BREAKCONDITION_U_ENABLE BCUE e Setting bcus channel lt channel_number gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt accessopt gt lt countopt gt To specify a reset point bcus reset lt reset gt e Cancellation beuc channel lt channel_number gt To specify a reset point bcuc reset e Display beud channel lt cha
101. CPU Operating Mode Sets and displays the MCU operating mode Each page of the Configuration dialog box is described below 99 General Page Use this page to select the MCU driving clock and specify the emulation mode enabling disabling of memory access during emulation whether or not interrupts are accepted during emulation with step execution and produce a dialog box for the setting of driver software Execution Modet Execution Mode2 CPU Operating Mode Emulator Clock 12 5MH2 v Figure 5 2 Configuration Dialog Box General Page 100 Table 5 4 General Page Option Clock Item Description Selects the clock for supply to the MCU Emulator clock x MHz Emulator internal clock x 4 6 8 10 or 12 5 User clock Clock signal from the user system X TAL Crystal oscillator on the evaluation chip board Emulation mode Selects the operating mode for emulation Normal Normal emulation initial value Cycle Reset x Issues a forced RES signal to the MCU then continues emulation after a specified interval cycle reset mode x 6 5us 9 8us 50us 100us 500us ims 5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms or 1s Break Condition U Sequential x Uses an internal break Break Condition U1 to U4 or reset condition to execute a sequential break x 2 gt 1 3 gt 2 gt 1 or 4 gt 3 gt 2 gt 1 Timeout break of Performance Analysis Em
102. CS6 The emulation memory has been allocated within the available area MAPPING BOUND MUST BE IN 128KB UNITS Memory has been allocated in 128 kbyte unit with the MAP command For details refer to the MAP_SET command MAPPING BOUND MUST BE IN 1MB UNITS Memory has been allocated in 1 Mbyte unit with the MAP command For details refer to the MAP_SET command BREAK POINT IS DELETED A XXXXXXXX A software breakpoint specified at the displayed address has been canceled because the contents of the software breakpoint are modified with the user program CANNOT SET A xxxxxxxx A breakpoint cannot be specified at the displayed address by the BREAKPOINT or BREAKSEQUENCE_SET command before GO command execution A hardware error might have occurred or the contents of the memory address might be a break instruction Correct the error and reload and re execute the program EMULATOR BUSY The emulator has been processing a command of trace halt mode simultaneously with continuous processing of a software breakpoint so another command cannot be executed Re enter the command TRACE CONDITION RESET Satisfied trace conditions are all reset when trace halt mode is entered When trace halt mode is terminated the trace conditions are rechecked from the beginning VERIFY ERROR ADDRESS H xxxxxxxx WRITE H xx READ H xx A verify error occurred xx numeric RUN TIME OVERFLOW Indicated with the resu
103. EAR 6 2 2 BCUC Clears internal breakpoints that have been set BREAKCONDITION_U 6 2 2 BCUD Displays internal breakpoints that _DISPLAY have been set BREAKCONDITION_U 6 2 2 BCUE Enables or disables internal _ENABLE breakpoints that have been set BREAKCONDITION_U _SET 6 2 2 BCUS Sets an internal breakpoint BREAKPOINT 6 2 4 BP Sets software breakpoints BREAKPOINT_CLEAR 6 2 4 BC Clears software breakpoints that have been set BREAKPOINT_DISPLAY 6 2 4 BD Displays software breakpoints that have been set BREAKPOINT_ENABLE 6 2 4 BE Enables or disables software breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_CLEAR 6 2 5 BSC Clears software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_DISPLAY 6 2 5 BSD Displays software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_ENABLE 6 2 5 BSE Enables or disables software sequential breakpoints that have been set BREAKSEQUENCE_SET 6 2 5 BSS Sets software sequential breakpoints CHECK 6 2 6 Checks the state of each pin for the MCU CLOCK 6 2 7 CK Sets and displays the CLOCK signal for the MCU CONDITION_SEQUENCE 6 2 3 CSQ Sets hardware sequential break Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description COVERAGE_DISPLAY 6 2 8 CVD Displays coverage information COVERAGE_CLEAR 6 2 8 CVC Initializes coverage information COVERAGE_SET 6 2 8 CVS Sets coverage information and modifies display format DEVIC
104. E_TYPE 6 2 9 DE Displays the type of a currently selected MCU DISASSEMBLE DA Disassembles user program and displays the result END 6 2 10 END Returns to user program execution when the emulator enters the trace halt state with trace conditions satisfied ERASE ER Clears the contents of the Command Line window EVALUATE EV Calculates expression EXECUTION_MODE 6 2 11 EM Sets and displays debugging conditions for user program execution FILE_LOAD FL Loads object program file FILE_SAVE FS Saves the contents of memory as a file FILE_VERIFY FV Compares the contents of a file with memory GO GO Executes user program GO_OPTION 6 2 12 GP Sets and displays the emulation mode for user program execution GO_RESET GR Executes user program from reset vector GO_TILL GT Executes user program up to temporary breakpoint HALT HA Halts user program HELP HE Displays help for command line and commands ID 6 2 13 ID Displays emulator type and version number INITIALISE IN Initializes a platform 248 Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description LOG LO Manipulates logging file MAP_DISPLAY MA Displays memory map information MAP_SET 6 2 14 MS Sets emulator memory map MEMORY_DISPLAY MD Displays memory contents MEMORY _EDIT ME Modifies memory contents MEMORY FI
105. Electronics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics To all our customers Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document such as Hitachi Electric and Hitachi XX to Renesas Technology Corp The semiconductor operations of Mitsubishi Electric and Hitachi were transferred to Renesas Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003 These operations include microcomputer logic analog and discrete devices and memory chips other than DRAMs flash memory SRAMs etc Accordingly although Hitachi Hitachi Ltd Hitachi Semiconductors and other Hitachi brand names are mentioned in the document these names have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp Thank you for your understanding Except for our corporate trademark logo and corporate statement no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself Renesas Technology Home Page http www renesas com Renesas Technology Corp Customer Support Dept April 1 2003 2tENESAS Renesas Technology Corp Cautions Keep safety first in your circuit designs 1 Renesas Technology Corpo
106. H IRQ4 HIGH TRQ5 HIGH IRQ6 HIGH IRQ HIGH BREQ HIGH BACK HIGH WAIT HIGH vcc Down Detection Level 2 6V H UDICITAG Clock 2 5MHZ2 Clock source Emulator Clock 12 5MHz Run status Break Cause of last break BREAKPOINT Interval Time Count 2 gt 1 MAX 2 gt 1 4 NK Session Platform Memory 4 Events 0 Figure 4 12 System Status Window The Cause of last break line shows that the cause of the break is the breakpoint For details on program execution refer to section 5 3 Realtime Emulation 77 4 7 Reviewing Breakpoints The user can see all the breakpoints set in the program in the Breakpoints window e Select Breakpoints from the View menu The Breakpoints window is displayed The contents of the breakpoint set will be displayed A will be displayed in the Enable column Breakpaints OF 59 x 00003036 Break Point a Figure 4 13 Breakpoints Window The Breakpoints window also allows the user to change breakpoints set new breakpoints and delete breakpoints e Close the Breakpoints window 78 4 8 Viewing Memory The user can view the contents of a memory block in the Memory window For example to view the memory contents corresponding to the external variable array a Select Memory from the View menu The Open Memory Window dialog box is displayed e Input a in the Address edit box and set the Format combo box as Long Word Open Memory Window
107. H 0000421F H O0003ead H 00002f5a H 00002704 H 000020da H 00000daa H 00000000 H 00000000 max change a max a 0 while 1 Ox err Ede Oxf fftf Feo Oxf ff tf fe4 Oxf fff ffes Oxf Ff fff fec CRTC TTT Oxf fF FFF FF4 Oxf FFFFFFE Oxf FFF FFF FC Oxf fF FFF dO Ong ely l i long Figure 4 29 Watch Window Display Example 3 91 4 11 Displaying Local Variables The user can see local variables in a function using the Locals window For example the local variables in the main function which declares five local variables a min max j and i will be examined Select Locals from the View menu The Locals window is displayed When no local variables exist the Locals window is empty Locals OF Oy x Oxf fff fds a oes T Oxffffffd4 on t Oxf fFFFFdO ong O Oxffffffec long Oxffffffc8 bakes Figure 4 30 Locals Window Double click the symbol to the left of array a in the Locals window to expand the variable and watch all the elements in the array Locals iO ojx OxFFFFFF et long 10 22117 Oxffffffds 9 Di 21468 oxfTETE EG D 19741 Oxffffffe0 D 16927 Oxffffffe4 Oxffffffe8 Oxffffffec D 9988 OxfffffffO D 8410 Oxfffffffa Figure 4 31 Locals Window Displaying Array a Elements 92 4 12 Saving and Loading the Session The information set to the HDI windows and dialog boxes can be sav
108. IC Socket 332 Connection Using the HS7047ECH8 1H ou ee eeeeeceesceseceecesecssecaecseeeneseneeees 334 Restrictions on Component Installation 0 0 eee cece eesecseecreeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseensees 334 Recommended Mount Pad Dimensions of the User System IC Socket 335 Connecting the Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board eee eeeeeeeeee 338 Installing the MCU FP 80Q erana n aa A E E S e 340 Installing the MCU FP 100M seeeeesesseeeesseeeeresssrsrsrerersrssesrsreersrssesesrereerereesesrene 341 Memory Map in the Invalid Internal ROM Mode sseesssesseeeesseeeeesrsreerrsreeresrrerssen 351 Memory Map in the Valid Internal ROM Mode uu eee eceeeeesceseceseceseenseeaeenes 352 Procedure Of Determination i scvcvscschins onient EEE A G E E 359 xiii Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 1 5 Table 1 6 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Environmental Conditions srv eee eecceeeceeeceseceecesecaeceaecseecseeeseseeeseeeeeeeeereneensees 5 Operating Environment sereni ee eee hh Rieck eevee heed cca 6 Emulator Components HS8000EST 114 eee eseceeeeeeseceeeeeeeeceereeeeeceeeeeeneeeees 7 Devi
109. Japanese language version of the installer 5 Use the Acrobat Reader to see PDF documents 2 3 System Configuration The emulator must be connected to a host computer via the selected PC interface board 18 2 3 1 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board The emulator can be connected to a host computer via a PC interface board options ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the interface board in the host computer and connect the interface cable supplied with the PC interface board to the emulator A LAN adapter can be used to connect the emulator to a host computer as a network For information on using the PC interface for ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus specification board or LAN adapter refer to their description notes Figure 2 7 shows the configuration of a system in which the PC interface board is used Figure 2 8 shows the configuration of a system in which the LAN adapter is used Install the PC interface board to the expansion slot for the PC interface board in the host computer ai PC interface board E8000S emulator PC interface cable L Personal computer Figure 2 7 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board 19 Network E8000S emulator L A E Personal computer PC interface cable Figure 2 8 System Configuration Using a LAN Adapter 20 Section 3 Preparation before Use 3 1 Description on Emul
110. LL MF Fills the memory with the specified data MEMORY_MOVE MV Moves memory block MEMORY_TEST MT Tests memory block QUIT QU Terminates HDI PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS 6 2 15 PA Displays measurements of performance by emulator PERFORMANCE_CLEAR 6 2 15 PC Clears performance conditions that have been set for the emulator PERFORMANCE_SET 6 2 15 PS Sets performance conditions RADIX RA Sets input radix REFRESH 6 2 16 RF Updates the memory information in HDI to reflect the latest state REGISTER_DISPLAY RD Displays MCU register values REGISTER_SET RS Sets MCU register values RESET RE Resets MCU SLEEP Delays command execution STATUS 6 2 17 STS Displays emulator state information STEP ST Executes in steps specified as instruction units or source line units STEP_OUT SP Executes until the function represented by the address at the program counter has finished STEP_OVER SO Steps over function STEP_RATE SR Sets and displays step execution rate SUBMIT SU Executes emulation command 249 file Table 6 1 List of Commands cont Command Section Abbreviation Description SYMBOL_ADD SA Sets symbol SYMBOL_CLEAR SC Deletes symbol SYMBOL_LOAD SL Loads symbol information file SYMBOL_SAVE SS Saves symbol information file SYMBOL_VIEW SV Displays symbol TRACE_DISPLAY 6 2 19 TD Displays the acquired trace information
111. Memory window that display memory types for parallel access contents memory in the user system in Commands to display or modify the internal I O area and in memory contents internal RAM Parallel access Windows other than the Auto update Internal ROM Memory window that display memory Emulation memory contents Commands to display or modify memory contents Auto update Memory Auto update Memory window Specified address range No target command Note For details on stopped periods and other notes refer to appendix E 8 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory The memory refresh function of the HDI Memory Refresh menu updates the contents of windows other than Auto update Memory that display the contents of memory Therefore if the memory refresh function is used during execution of the user program short breaks will occur if the I O Registers window or the Memory window that displays the contents of internal RAM is opened When parallel access is used to display memory while the user program is running times in debugging will be shortened by the required suspensions of the user program Take care on this point 5 13 2 Overview of Auto Update Memory Function In an auto update of memory the display of the contents of the specified area of memory is refreshed at intervals of 500 ms while the user program is being executed The function has the following features Automatically updates with an inte
112. N 4 gt 3 AVE 4 gt 3 Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Interval Timer counter 20ns Bus timeout 100us Multi break PRB1 Disabled Internal ROM Option Disabled RES signal Enabled BREQ signal Enabled WAIT signal Enabled Output trigger TRGB Disabled Output trigger TRGU Disabled Emulation mode Timeout trace of Performance analysis Prohibit R w on the fly Disabled Interrupts during step Disabled tos A Session A Platform 4 Memory Events A Figure 5 84 System Status Window System Status window has the four sheets as shown in table 5 89 226 Table 5 89 System Status Window Configuration Sheet Name Description Session Contains such information on the current session as the whether a debugging platform is connected and the names of loaded files Platform Includes the status information on the Emulator such as the name of the connected emulator Memory Includes the information related to the current state of memory such as memory mapping and the memory areas to be used by loaded object files Events Contains information on the usage of resources on breakpoints The Session sheet has the following contents Table 5 90 Session Sheet Configuration Item Description Target System Indicates whether the Emulator is connected Session Name A session file name Program Name The name of a load module that is loaded
113. O Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified Trace Condition A1 is taken as an example of setting a range trace condition Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page Click condition 1 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A1 dialog box General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Pes E E E EEEE Range Trace Stop C Subroutine Range in subroutine Figure 5 53 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page Select Range range trace mode on the General page 182 The Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 61 However Trace Condition C1 to C8 dialog box has only the General Address and Bus State pages Table 5 61 Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Dialog Box Page Description Trace Condition A1 to A8 General Selects the range trace mode Trace Condition B1 to B8 Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions NMI and IRQO to IRQ7
114. O3FEO 9000 5665 0000 ODAA 0000 421F 0000 3EAD Figure 5 90 AUM Window The AUM window displays the selected ranges of memory and this display is refreshed while the user program is being executed Up to 8 windows 8 points can be displayed in the AUM window 5 13 3 Setting Auto update Memory Points to Be Set And Byte Size to Acquire Up to 8 points can be set Up to 32 bytes can be acquired from each point Acquisition Mode Auto update memory has two acquisition modes e Realtime parallel monitoring mode In this mode the contents of memory are directly acquired and displayed Therefore it does not affect the emulation Select the memory access bus width through the AUM Target Details dialog box Memory access bus widths can be selected from 8 16 or 32 default bits After setting click the OK button 238 AUH Target Details x Bus Width 32 Bit Cancel Figure 5 91 AUM Target Details Dialog Box 5 13 4 Displaying the Memory Display format The auto update memory function allows the display of memory contents in ASCII bit byte word longword or single precision floating point units with or without signs in decimal or hexadecimal Click the right hand mouse button with the cursor in the AUM window The pop up menu will be displayed Select Edit from the menu to display the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box and select Format from the Auto update Memory Edit dialog box to
115. OOT FAILED An incorrect evaluation chip board is connected Connect the correct evaluation chip board This message is displayed when the H UDI s input clock frequency is higher than the input clock frequency for the peripheral internal module Note While these error messages are displayed the message box shown in figure 3 26 is displayed Click the Yes button to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box and modify the settings of the operating mode and H UDI input clock This may result in correct start up Emulator System Down If an exceptional operation occurs during emulator monitor or emulator system program execution HDI command wait state the system shuts down the HDI links down xk E8000 SYSTEM DOWN If an error occurs inform a Hitachi sales agency of the error 59 3 7 3 Troubleshooting Procedure When an error occurs in the system use the troubleshooting Problem Analysis Diagram PAD see figure 3 29 to determine the cause of the error Start from START in figure 3 29 and determine the state of the system Follow the instructions that request operator assistance or intervention Note that system defect means that the emulator is malfunctioning Execute the diagnostic program in the way described in the Diagnostic Program Manual and inform a Hitachi sales agency of the test results in detail because system defects may arise for a number of reasons If the cause of the error is an emulato
116. Table 5 34 Table 5 35 Table 5 36 Table 5 37 Table 5 38 Table 5 39 Table 5 40 Table 5 41 Table 5 42 Table 5 43 Table 5 44 Table 5 45 Table 5 46 Table 5 47 Table 5 48 Table 5 49 Table 5 50 Table 5 51 Table 5 52 Table 5 53 Table 5 54 Table 5 55 Table 5 56 Table 5 57 Table 5 58 Table 5 59 Table 5 60 Table 5 61 Table 5 62 Break Sequence Page Options 20 0 0 eee eee eeceeeceseceecesecaecseecaeecaeeeaeseaeeeeeeeens 133 Hardware Break Conditions sisccssesscssscesoeteseesscosesascgessensscossossevscsesceeessseesseapensscnesee 135 Specifiable Hardware Break Conditions 00 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeceeseesecesecnseeaecsaeeneeens 136 Condition A B C Page Options isisisi sips seeen t renie rss 137 Break Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 138 Address Page Options c sccssecusstvssss cous aston sobbsestetssekasts save seers Era EEEn ESENS Ee TOERE SEEST 139 Data Page Options ea es e aaee a iE e EE aida denne 141 Bus State Page OPONSssi sisene ia roe E E EE TEE E E 142 Probe Pase OPONSE es eevee ER ET EREET E TRENE 143 Interrupt Page Options sisese iee iesrerierts oeoo ere sinsi g rekoa oser ETE aeaeo s EKSER EEEE iss 144 Count Page Options neee o et aeo eena eed he inne Ate eather ees 145 Delay Page OPNS sse oneer eea S EEEE E n T ES 146 Pages of the Condition Dialog BOX essesseseesseseseseesssreerssesrreresrenreseerrsserrrnresrenees 147 History Page Options sccsssssectsck se
117. The requested function is not supported 316 Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages cont Error Message Description and Solution Can t add this item because there is The number of Auto update Memory settings reached the not enough Auto update memory maximum eight points and the new item cannot be added resource Change or cancel items that have already been set The AUM setting range is inthe 32 The address for an Auto update Memory item was set so byte boundary that the range runs the 32 byte boundary An address range cannot run across a 32 byte boundary trace mode data no change The contents of the Trace Mode page have not been changed Set a condition and click the Apply button Invalid parameter An illegal command parameter was input Types of the user cable and the The type of connected user interface cable and the number device the number of pins of the of MCU pins set in the Cpu Operating Mode dialog box do package selected in Cpu Operating not match Check the setting in the Cpu Operating Mode Mode are not matched dialog box The type of the user cable is illegally The combination of the type of connected user interface used with the MD pin Start the cable and the settings on the MD pins of the user system is E8000S emulator in clock mode 0 or illegal Start the emulator in clock mode 0 or single chip single chip mode mode Check that the MD pin values of the user system are set correctly A sess
118. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http Awww renesas com inquiry 2CENESAS 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is gra
119. U Operating Mode Dialog Box Vcc Down Detection Level Page 114 Figure 5 10 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box H UDI JTAG Clock Page eee 115 Figure 5 11 Timing for Trigger Signal Output eee cee ceee esse cseeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeenseeseesseenaes 118 Figure 5 12 Breakpoints Window 3i s60 c30 5 sssscessetgceaegesesnsoes tice ssgedseesoescspessescenesdebeveeessebavasbeness 124 Figure 5 13 Example of a Software Break Instruction 0 0 0 eee ces cee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenseensees 126 Figure 5 14 Point Page Break Dialog BOX eee eee eescecssecesececeseceeneecaceesaeecaeeeeaeecsaeeesaees 127 Figure 5 15 Break Point Dialog Box Address Page ces ceeeeesseceeeeecseceeneeceaeeeeneeenaeeesees 128 Figure 5 16 Example of a Software Sequential Break 0 0 0 eee cee cseeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeseeeseenaes 130 Figure 5 17 Example of a Software Sequential Break Reset Point Specification 00 00 0000 131 Figure 5 18 Break Dialog Box Sequence Page 0 ceeeeeeseceeneecsseceeeeeceseceeneecsaeceeneeenaeeeeees 132 Figure 5 19 Break Sequence Dialog BOX 00 ee eceeceeeceseceseceseceaecaeecaaeeaeeeaeeeeeeereneensees 133 Figure 5 20 Example of a Hardware Break with a Satisfaction Count Condition Specified 135 Figure 5 21 Example of a Hardware Break with Delay Condition Specified ee 136 Figure 5 22 Break Dialog Box Condition A Page ces ceseeesseceeeecsseceeeeecsaeceeneeenaeeeeee 137 Figure 5 2
120. U operating mode Clock mode 0 and single chip mode Determination 3 Uses the number of pins and MCU operating mode set in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box 2 TO register file The I O register file is switched by selection of an MCU in Device on the MD Pin Device page The I O register file that is used with the SH7046 and SH7047 is Custom io when Custom is selected as Device 360
121. XTAL 85 HSTBY 16 DBGMD 11 ASEBRKAK 2 The H UDI function is occupied solely by the emulator and does not operate as the user function 3 The delay time is generated on the timing of the RES signal when it is input to the MCU from the user system as shown in table E 2 because this connection for this signal is via logic circuit on the evaluation chip board Table E 2 Delay Time for Signal Connected via the Evaluation Chip Board Signal Name Delay Time ns RES 15 0 353 E 4 Hardware Break Function E 4 1 Setting Address Bus and Data Bus Conditions The address bus and data bus conditions are satisfied on bus cycles where the values on the address bus or data bus match Consider the following points when setting these conditions 1 32 bit bus area Longword access Longword data is read and written in single bus cycles A data condition is only valid for longword access when specified as longword An address condition is only valid for a longword access cycle when specified as a multiple of four Word access Word data is read and written in single bus cycles A data condition is only valid for word access when specified as word Any multiple of two is a valid address condition Byte access Byte data is read and written in single bus cycles A data condition is only valid for byte access when specified as byte Any address condition whether an even or odd number is valid 16 bit bus area Longword acce
122. age Description Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets access type and read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions NMI and IRQO to IRQ7 Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Break Condition Address Sets address bus conditions A7 D Break Condition Data Sets data bus conditions B7 Bus State Sets access type and read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions NMI and IRQO to IRQ7 Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Delay Sets delay conditions Break Condition Address Sets address bus conditions C1 to C8 Bus State Sets access type conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Break Condition A1 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified hardware break conditions will now be displayed as condition 7 in the Condition list box Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Hardware break conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The following sections describe the pages of the Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box 138 a Address Page Use this page to specify an address
123. age has been detected from the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Failed to find matching trace record The searching for the trace information has failed because no information is currently displayed in the Trace window This error message is also output when there is no trace information Hardware register read write check error When the HDI was started up an error was detected during checking of the hardware registers of the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Invalid version number in target configuration The HDI version when the session file was created and the current HDI version differ Do not use a session file for an earlier version System ID error An emulator different from that selected in the Select Platform dialog box is currently connected Check whether the correct emulator is in use Target internal error A command cannot be issued to the emulator Wait for the completion of processing User system not ready The message USER SYSTEM NOT READY was received from the emulator Function information not found The function information that was entered in the Input Function Range dialog box matches no function Input a correct function name function not available Currently not available Command currently not available The requested function is not available now Not support
124. an example of setting a subroutine range trace condition 185 Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page Click condition 1 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A1 dialog box General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Mode Range Trace Stop C Subroutine f Range in subroutine moueat p a n eea ei Start H 0 zee End Ho Figure 5 55 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page Select Range in subroutine subroutine range trace mode on the General page The Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog box has the tabbed pages listed in table 5 64 Table 5 64 Trace Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages Dialog Box Page Description Trace Condition A1 3 5 7 General Selects the trace acquisition mode Trace Condition B1 3 5 7 Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace condition A1 dialog box closes and the di
125. ancel max Figure 4 18 Add Watch Dialog Box e Input variable max and click the OK button The Watch Window window will now also show the long type variable max 82 Watch Window Of O1 xi Name a m OxfFFFFFd8 strongl T0 max H ffffffff Oxffffffdo y long Figure 4 19 Watch Window Window Displaying the Variable e Double click the symbol to the left of array a in the Watch Window window to expand the variable and watch all the elements in the array Watch Window mi OTETTA aa 10 H 00000000 Oxffffffds H 000053dc Oxffffffdc H 00002704 Oxffffffeo H 00005665 Oxffffffe4 H OOO0O00daa Oxffffffes H 0000421fF Oxffffffec H OO0O0O3ead OxfffffffoO H OO0004did Oxfffffftf4 1 Oxfffffff8 Oxfffffffc OxffffffFdo H 00002f5a H 000020da H FFFFFFFF Figure 4 20 Watch Window Window Displaying Array Elements 83 4 10 Stepping Through a Program The HDI provides various step commands that allow efficient program debugging For details on step function refer to section 5 4 Step Function Table 4 3 Step Command Command Description Step In Steps through the statements in a function by each line or steps through assembly statements by each instruction For a line that calls a function execution stops at the first line of the called function Step Over Steps through the statements in a function by each line or steps through assembly state
126. ard into the host computer e Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically e Select Search for the best driver for your device for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location e Specify lt Drive gt 7046 DRIVERS PCI 95 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive e Check that E6000 PC Card has been detected and complete driver installation When Using the PC Interface Board e Refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications and set the operating system environment and install the ISA bus interface board e Install the provided software Select ISA Driver as the component Note An ISA driver to run under Windows Me is not available When Using the LAN Adapter e Install the provided software Select E8000 LAN Driver as the component e Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on e Select SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs to start the LAN Adapter Configuration e Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration e Turn the LAN adapter off and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn the LAN adapter on Then LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host c
127. as High or Low User System Indicates the state of the FWP and MD3 to 0 pins in the user system lt Back Returns to the Device Pin Counts page Next gt Goes to the next page Pin Select Registers Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings Note The emulator does not support the programming mode of the flash memory The state of the FWP pin is always high 111 Pin Select Registers Page Sets the pins selected by the pin function controller PFC The emulator sets these pins correctly corresponding to the signals for use in the following functions e External interrupt signal conditions for hardware breaks and tracing e Detecting the WAIT signal for display in the emulation state display Set the conditions then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode Pin Select Registers Ingo HGH BREG HIGH gt Roi HGH f BACK HGH Ing2 Hek WAT Heh Ros Hek Inga fhan Ros HIGH l IRQS JHIGH Me IROZ HIGH 7 lt Back Cancel Help Figure 5 8 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Pin Select Registers Page 112 Table 5 11 Pin Select Registers Page Option Description IRQO Sets the pins PA2 PB2 PD16 HIGH that correspond to the IRQO signal IRQ1 Sets the pins PA5 PB3 PD17 HIGH that correspond to the IRQ1 signal IRQ2 Sets the pins PA8 PB4 PD18 HIGH that correspond to the IRQ2 signal IRQ3 Sets the pins
128. ases There must be no corrosive gases present Details of the operating environment are listed in table 1 2 Table 1 2 Operating Environment Item Operating Environment Host computer IBM PCs and compatible machines that contain Pentium processors 300 MHz or faster is recommended Operating system Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 or Windows 2000 Minimum memory capacity for 32 Mbytes more than twice the size of the load module is operation recommended Display Resolution better than 800 x 600 SVGA is recommended Empty space in a hard disk Disk capacity required for installation 40 Mbytes or more Take the swap area into account when ensuring that there is enough space on your system more than four times the size of the memory is recommended Supported interfaces ISA bus slot not supported by Windows Me and Windows 2000 PCI bus slot PC card PCMCIA and LAN adapter conforming to IEEE802 3 with 10OBASE T or 100BASE TX Pointing device such as a mouse A pointing device such as a mouse which can be connected to the host computer and is supported by Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 and Windows 2000 CD ROM drive Required for installation 1 3 Components The emulator consists of the E8000S station device control board and evaluation chip board Check all components after unpacking If any component is missing contact the sales agency from
129. asuring with E8000S Station Function eessessesserseresesreerrsreesserereresrrnreseesres 206 Displaying Various Information seseseeeseseseseessseeessserrreresteerrstenrssrerrsrestentesreeteseeerssenees 225 Trigger Output assie e A E ees Rie ois ol E A E eee 230 Memory Area Sireni cestcciceyscts E EE A Geant R 231 5 11 1 The Allocation of Emulation Memory sesssseessereesesreeresesreeesreersseerreresrenresrenees 231 Stack Trace Bun Ct ness cose coscececsledeecsepsapevers casavscussvetecuesevenayedpucgaueet des SENEN EE E aeien 234 Displaying and Updating the Contents of Memory 000 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeecesecesecesecaessaeeaes 236 5 13 1 Displaying and Updating the Contents of Memory during Execution 236 5 13 2 Overview of Auto Update Memory Function 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeceeseeesenseenseenaes 237 5 13 3 Setting Auto update Memory 00 eee ee eecesecee cece ceecseeeeeeseseeeeseeeseeeseseseeaeenaes 238 5 13 4 Displaying the Memory ssir eee p ea E EEr E EE A SR EEn 239 Controlling and Checking the State of MCU sssssessseessseeeserrsrrssesrreresresrssrerreserrrerrsreeresee 240 5 14 1 Selecting Clock for the MCU eee eee noaee eona N S 241 314 2 Checking the VO Signals reari renere ree eaaa a eSEE e e IESER 241 5 14 3 Checking the Power Supply and Clock State of the User System 241 TPPUt FORMAL erena eE A A A AE AE dev sdens dhavndien ss RR 242 3 15 1 Entering Masks orenean a N E E A ed A E T NRE 242
130. ate NMI Displays high or low NMI pin state HSTBY Displays high or low HSTBY pin state PVCC 5V Displays NG when PVcc is less than 4 0 V and OK when 4 0 V or more PVCC 3 3V Displays NG when PVcc is less than 2 6 V and OK when 2 6 V or more 270 Example To test the MCU pin state CHECK The display format is as follows gt CHECK IRQO HIGH IRQ1 HIGH IRQ2 HIGH IRQ3 HIGH IRQ4 HIGH IRQ5 HIGH IRQ6 HIGH IRQ7 HIGH WAIT HIGH BREQ HIGH RES HIGH MRES HIGH NMI HIGH HSTBY HIGH PVCC 5V NG PVCC 3 3V G 271 6 2 7 CLOCK CK Command syntax and parameters e Setting ck lt mode gt e Display ck Parameter Type Description lt mode gt Keyword Selects the clock signal user Clock signal of user system 4 Clock signal 4 MHz of the emulator 6 Clock signal 6 MHz of the emulator 8 Clock signal 8 MHz of the emulator 10 Clock signal 10 MHz of the emulator 12 Clock signal 12 5 MHz of the emulator xtal Crystal oscillator of the evaluation chip board Description This command displays and sets clock signal used in the MCU The user can select whether to use the clock signal from the user system or from the emulator When the user selects a clock the emulator resets the MCU Therefore the internal I O registers and control registers hold the reset values For the reset values refer to appendix E 6 Differences between the Emulator and the MCU This command displays the type
131. ation 331 20 50 min 14 70 max 0 65 x 19 12 35 0 1 0 1 0 65 0 05 0 35 9 05 I I i 4 s i Uo Figure C 3 Recommended Mount Pad Dimensions of the User System IC Socket 332 C 1 3 Connection Using the HS7047ECH81H AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system or emulator or result in PERSONAL INJURY Also the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Notes 1 For more details on the HS7047ECH81H refer to the user s manual supplied with the evaluation chip board 2 This evaluation chip board can only be used in combination with the specified QFP socket IC149 100 054 B51 Install the FP 100M pin socket IC149 100 054 B51 manufactured by YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS Co Ltd on the user system to connect the emulator Since the pin arrangement is the same as that of the actual MCU refer to the hardware manual Figure C 1 shows the connection of the HS7047ECH81H figure C 2 shows the size restrictions for the installed components of the HS7047ECH81H and figure C 3 shows the recommended mount pad dimensions of the user system IC socket 333 User cable head E User system interface cable User system X4 SO AOLLNGIS MUTATE eer chip board Power supply cable Figu
132. ator Usage This section describes the preparation before emulator usage Figure 3 1 is a flowchart on preparation before the usage of the emulator CAUTION Read this section and understand its contents before preparation Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Reference Unpack the emulator Check the components against the component list Component list See section 3 2 instal Acrobat Reader Install the Reader only when it is necessary Connect the emulator See sections 3 3 1 to 3 3 7 See section 3 4 1 for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Set up the emulator See section 3 4 2 for WindowsNT 4 0 See section 3 4 3 for Windows 2000 Turn on the emulator Install the system program See section 3 5 Start the HDI and check the operation of the emulator See section 3 6 Figure 3 1 Emulator Preparation Flowchart 21 3 2 Installing the Acrobat Reader Acrobat Reader 4 0 is required to view the online help Acrobat Reader is provided on the CD R of this product The installation of Acrobat Reader is described below If you have already installed Acrobat Reader do not carry out this procedure 1 Insert the CD R of this product in the CD ROM drive Click Run from the Start menu 3 Specify Ar40eng exe in Pdf_Read English directory in the Run dialog box
133. ault ofbreak A break is generated oftrace Tracing is stopped lt timeopt gt Description Keyword Specifies the minimum time interval for time stamping of trace information time 20ns Display is in 20 ns units default time 1 6us Display is in 1 6 us units time 52us Display is in 52 us units time clk Trace information is acquired in units of clock cycles time clk2 Trace information is acquired in units of 1 2 clock cycles time clk4 Trace information is acquired in units of 1 4 clock cycles time clk8 Trace information is acquired in units of 1 8 clock cycles Specifies trace information acquisition mode and displays the mode settings Examples 1 To display the set trace information acquisition mode TM Results gt TM nabl trace_mode dma TM OFBREAK ofoff time 20ns To stop the acquisition of trace information and break when the trace buffer overflows 307 6 2 21 TRACE _SEARCH TS Command syntax and parameters ts range lt startcycle gt to lt endcycle gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt accessopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt irqgopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt resetopt gt lt resetmopt gt lt breqopt gt lt timeopt gt Parameter Type Description lt startcycle gt Numeric Specifies the start cycle value of the search range lt endcycle gt Numeric Specifies the end cycle value of
134. ay can be specified by setting the start and end pointers in bus cycles bus cycle pointers in Start and End on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box The pointer is a value relative to the location at which the delay condition has been satisfied Number of bus cycles before the delay condition has been satisfied are indicated by a minus sign while numbers of cycles after the condition s satisfaction are displayed with a plus sign Z Trace 695 records no filter io O x Code aB IB Time Stamp Clock 000005 LOLLLE TE SE OLETE LI 11111111 000HO0N00S500075201 000004 60000810 JSR Gh 00000810 460b0009 11111111 OOOHOOMOOSHOOTS2UE jsr ROP 000003 00000STs 00003200A 11111111 OOOHOOMOOSOONTS2UE 000002 00003000 ADD PH CS KR 00002000 F cs0000 11111111 1 1 OOOHOOM0NS00075202 void mai BREAK 000001 00002004 f 32a012 11111111 OOOHOOMOOSOONTS2U4 000000 E0003 h Li Figure 5 60 Trace Window The items shown in table 5 66 are displayed as trace information in the Trace window 191 Table 5 66 Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window Item Description and Format No Line number in the Trace window Label Label name BP Bus cycle pointer The location of a bus cycle relative to the bus cycle where the delay condition has been satisfied Pointers are usually negative values XXXXxXxX but when a delay condition has bee
135. bout setting up the PC interface board on Windows NT 4 0 For the installation of the PC interface board to the ISA bus slot refer to the manual of your host computer This section describes the general procedure for installing the PC interface board in the host computer Log on to the host computer as Administrator Check which upper memory areas have already been used Start Windows NT 4 0 Execute Start Programs Administrative Tools Common Windows NT Diagnostics Click the Memory button in the Resource tab and in the following form make a note of the upper memory areas that have already been used Exit Windows NT 4 0 Register the memory area for the PC interface board Select one of the memory areas that correspond to the following PC interface board switch settings and no other devices can access the selected memory area 46 If the Intel P amp P BIOS disk is supplied with the host computer register the memory area as follows 3 5 Start the host computer with the Intel P amp P BIOS disk Check the upper memory areas that have already been used with View System Resources Add Unlisted Card with Configure Add Card Others Click No in the dialog box displayed because there is no CFG file Move to the Memory hex list box in the Configure Unlisted Card dialog box Click the Add Memory button to display the Specify Memory dialog box Enter a memory area range that is not
136. breakpoint e The address is in any area other than CS area except the internal ROM RAM area e An instruction which may satisfy Break Condition U4 e The address of the delay slot for a delayed branch instruction Notes 1 When the number of passes is specified emulator firmware stops the program for about 100 ms every time the program passes the address set as a break condition so that it can update its count of passes As a result the program does not operate in 128 10 realtime When the program passes such an address the emulator executes the instruction at the address as a single step then returns to normal program execution Break Condition U4 becomes invalid during this single step execution The maximum number of software breakpoints and Stop At settings allowed in the Run Program dialog box is 255 Therefore when 255 software breakpoints have been set any further specification made by using the Stop At item of the Run menu is invalid Ensure that the total number of software breakpoints and settings made by using the Stop At item of the Run menu is 255 or less When a disabled breakpoint address is specified as a Stop At item in the Run Program dialog box the breakpoint becomes enabled after the first time that execution subsequently stops at that address When the content of a software breakpoint address is modified during execution of the user program the following message will be displaye
137. bus condition Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Count Delay a T Don t Care f Address Range Start H s M Outside Range Nonusermask User mask Figure 5 23 Break Condition A7 Dialog Box Address Page Table 5 29 Address Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no address condition Address The condition is satisfied when an address in the range above Start or that is selected by Mask is accessed Range The condition is satisfied when an address in the range set as Start End is accessed Start Sets the start of the range of address bus values as a numerical or symbolic value End When Range is selected sets the end of the range of address bus values as a numerical or symbolic value Outside Range The condition is satisfied at any address that is not in the range above Start or an address selected by Mask or in the range set as Start End Non user mask Sets no mask condition User mask Sets mask conditions Mask Sets required values for bits and selects bits to be masked after selecting Address and User mask The Mask setting is disabled if Range is selected as the type of address condition The Range condition will be satisfied or not satisfied regardless of any values set as part of the mask 139 b Data Page Take the following into account when specifying a data bus condition the address
138. but Renesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers
139. by a third party or made by you for a third party DISCLAIMER HITACHI MAKES NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THEREOF WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE OR AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT IN NO EVENT SHALL HITACHI BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECTIVE EMULATOR PRODUCT THE USE OF ANY EMULATOR PRODUCT OR ITS DOCUMENTATION EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY STATED OTHERWISE IN THIS WARRANTY THIS EMULATOR PRODUCT IS SOLD AS IS AND YOU MUST ASSUME ALL RISK FOR THE USE AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE EMULATOR PRODUCT RENESAS State Law Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which may vary from state to state The Warranty is Void in the Following Cases Hitachi shall have no liability or legal responsibility for any problems caused by misuse abuse misapplication neglect improper handling installation repair or modifications of the emulator product without Hitachi s prior written consent or any problems caused by the user system All Ri
140. byte0 lower byte of the lower word When byte is set for lt datawidth gt byte3 byte2 byte1 or byte0 is valid When word is set for lt datawidth gt high or low is valid When long is set lt position gt cannot be selected Mask specification is as follows To specify an 8 bit data break condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt byte lt position gt not To specify a 16 bit data break condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt word lt position gt not To specify a 32 bit data break condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt long not lt maskdata gt Specifies the mask data Add not to the specification to break the user program when the data bus holds a value other than the specified value 253 Parameter Description lt r wopt gt Specifies read or write condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is aor b To break the user program with the read cycle direction read To break the user program with the write cycle direction write lt accessopt gt Specifies bus status condition To break the user program with the data access cycle access dat To break the user program with the DMA DTC cycle access dma lt prbopt gt Specifies external probe signal condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt Specify each bit as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit spe
141. cable screws are colored to prevent an insertion error CN1 red CN2 yellow CN3 blue If the connector is connected incorrectly the connector will be damaged 3 Connect the trace cables into the station to evaluation chip board interface connectors CN1 CN2 and CN3 on the E8000S station s rear panel Confirm that the shape of the trace cable plug matches that of the station to evaluation chip board interface connector before connecting Also note which trace cable is connected to which E8000S station connector so that the other end of the trace cable is connected to the matching connector number on the evaluation chip board After the connection is completed alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the trace cable to prevent the upper or lower side of the trace cable from lifting off the connector Figure 3 3 shows how to correctly connect the trace cables to the E8000S station connectors 25 The color of the stickers on the panels for station to evaluation chip board interface connectors are red yellow and blue CN1 Tighten with a screw GND cable E8000S station rear panel Colors of the trace cables labels are red yellow and blue Connect the cables to the connectors with the same color Then tighten the screws Figure 3 3 Connecting Trace Cables to the E8000S Station A WARNING All three cables are bundled together at the other ends where they are to be connected to the evaluation
142. cations and do not apply an incorrect power voltage Use only the provided AC power cable Use only the specified type of fuse RENESAS Warnings on Emulator Usage Warnings described below apply as long as you use this emulator Be sure to read and understand the warnings below before using this emulator Note that these are the main warnings not the complete list Vi A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST RENESAS AWARNING Place the emulator station and EV chip board so that the trace cables are not bent or twisted A bent or twisted cable will impose stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the emulator station is placed in a secure position so that it does not move during use nor impose stress on the user interface RENESAS VII CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
143. ce Control Board Components for the SH7046 0 0 eee eceecceeseesecseeeeeeeeeeeees 7 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH7046 0 eee ee eeeeeesceseceeeeeeenes 8 Optional Component Specifications 0 eee eee esse cee cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseeeseenaes 8 Contents 0 CD Renere E a a E E haste 17 PC Interface Board Specifications sesesssessseeesseteesssesreereseeeresreresrerrenesreeresreerssee 40 Switch Settings for Memory Areas essseeseeeseesesrrerrseeerssrrrrsresresesterresreresserresresrent 42 Contents of Emulator System Programs eeesesesesseeseseesssrerrssesreeresteeresrerrsserrreresrene 47 Types of Connection and Drivers pesien eea a aie E S REA 49 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM Dialog BOX ssssesseesesreesesresresrrrreesreereseereeserreeresreeres 63 Configuration of the Sample Program sesssessseeesserseresrsrrerrsreeresrerrsserresresreerseeerssee 65 CPU Operation Mode Dialog Box Setting Example eee eecesecesecneeneeenee 67 Step Corman a AE AS sec sare ses cae siesta S O 84 Emulator Functions oo ic se 8etsvdieston token eel inate he ihe eae ee 95 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions sseseseesseeeseseeereseeeseesrreresrrerrsreerssene 96 Configuration Dialog BOX eee ee eeceseceseceseceseceeecaeecaeeeneseaeeeeeeeeeseenseenseenseenaes 99 General Page t isc 2ccscheoes beiwactendeaehGidae cau ateende chiawuscce dean desi teu es eteendouh eaneeetne te aebaes 101 Execution Model Pag
144. ce the program counter holds an odd value execution of the program is not possible Stack pointer is odd Since the stack pointer holds an odd value execution of the program is not possible The E8000S emulator cannot be started correctly Change the CPU Operating Mode The emulator was illegally started Change the CPU s operating mode Verify error at H x wrote H x read H x Verification failed at H x Cannot use command when user program executing A command line was input while it was not possible to issue commands to the emulator Wait for the completion of processing Command timeout The emulator did not respond after a command was issued from the HDI so a timeout occurred in the HDI Exit from the HDI turn on the power supply of the emulator and restart the HDI 315 Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages cont Error Message Emulator Command send receive check Error Description and Solution Illegal communication between the HDI and the emulator during HDI start up Exit from the HDI turn on the power supply of the emulator and restart the HDI If this does not solve the problem contact Hitachi s sales department or the agent through whom you purchased the HDI Emulator firmware not ready A message EMULATOR FIRMWARE NOT READY has been received from the emulator Exit from the HDI and check that the emulator is operating correctly Emulator Timeout A timeout mess
145. ceeeeeeneeceeneeeneeens 216 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeecessseceseeeeseeceereeeneeceeneeeneeens 217 Performance 1 Dialog Box Time Out Page eee eeeceeeeceeneeceeeceeneeceteeteneees 219 Performance 1 Dialog Box Count Page eeseeseseesceceseceeneeceseeeeneeceeeeeneeees 220 Input Function Range Dialog BOX 0 eee eee eeceeecesecesecesecaeceaecsaecaeeeneeeneeees 220 Performance Analysis Window Measurement of Executed Addresses 221 Performance Analysis Window Run Time and Execution Count eeeeeeeee 222 Performance Analysis Window Execution Time RatiOS cecceeesceeereeeteeeenees 223 System Status Window cescecsscsencecssecesncecsseceseeecsacceeneecsaeceeneecsaeeseneecaeeenees 226 Pulse Output Tami 8 r ots rages teuoeptons E E ewe NR 230 Memory Mapping Dialog Box eee cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaecsecaecsaecsaeenes 231 xii Figure 5 87 Figure 5 88 Figure 5 89 Figure 5 90 Figure 5 91 Figure 5 92 Figure A 1 Figure A 2 Figure A 2 Figure A 2 Figure A 2 Figure A 2 Figure A 2 Figure B 1 Figure B 2 Figure C 1 Figure C 2 Figure C 3 Figure C 4 Figure C 5 Figure C 6 Figure C 7 Figure C 8 Figure C 9 Figure E 1 Figure E 2 Figure E 3 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog BOX 00 eee eeeseeeeceeceseeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeennees 233 Stack sPrace W indOwW ss ica essen ried eee A ee ee 234 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box ee cee
146. cification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level forx 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition is specified as not including the state of the external probe signal at that bit location lt nmiopt gt Specifies NMI signal condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is aor b To break the user program when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To break the user program when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt irqopt gt Specifies IRQO to IRQ7 signal conditions This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify IRQO to IRQ7 signal conditions irq lt bit specification gt Specify each bit as follows To specify bits IRQO to IRQ7 7 65 4 3 2 1 O Bit location x x xX X X xX X xX Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ number When is specified the condition can be specified not to include the IRQ condition for bit location 254 Parameter Description lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count that satisfies the break condition This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b To specify pass count count lt value gt Any value from 1 to H FFFF can be specified as lt value gt lt delayopt gt Specifies the number of bus cycles to be executed after the break condition is satisfied This parameter can be used when lt type gt is a or b and lt channe
147. cifications Item Model Name Specifications User system interface HS7046ECH81H For the SH7046 FP 80Q cable for the SH7046 FP 80Q User system interface HS7047ECH81H For the SH7047 FP 100M cable for the SH7047 FP 100M PC interface board HS6000EII01H ISA bus PCI interface board HS6000EIC01H PCI bus HS6000EICO2H PC interface card HS6000EIP01H PCMCIA bus LAN adapter HS6000ELNO01H e TCP IP communications protocol e 10BASE T e 100BASE Tx Section 2 Components 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components The emulator consists of an E8000S station an SH7046 device control board an SH7046 evaluation chip board and a user system interface cable as shown in figure 2 1 By installing a PC interface board option ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus specifications on your host computer the SH7046 E8000S Hitachi Debugging Interface HDI can be used for debugging A LAN adapter can be connected to the emulator as a network enabling debugging by the HDI For details on the PC interface board and the LAN adapter refer to the description notes on each product Device control board HS7046EDD81H x PC interface cable option 2 roa Network LAN adapter S option PC interface cable option i PC interface board option wo Trace cable Evaluation chip board HS7046EBK81H E8000S station HS8000EST11H External probe B a trigger output pins User system
148. cified conditions in the Trace window The search conditions can be specified in the Trace Find dialog box Search conditions are the same as those for the trace filter functions except on the General page 200 Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Find from the menu Click Find Next in the pop up menu of the Trace window to jump to the next trace information item that satisfies the specified conditions Select the General page then select the Search from top check box to search from the start of the trace information General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time Figure 5 66 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page 5 7 Measurement of Execution Time 5 7 1 Measuring Execution Time to a Break or Termination This function provides a way of measuring the total time taken to execute the user program The user can use any of the methods shown in table 5 14 in section 5 3 1 Execution to start the user program The total execution time is the total time with the user program in execution from the start of execution until the program stops due to the satisfaction of a break condition The resulting measurement is displayed next to Run Time Count in the Platform page of the System Status window 201 System Status Of _ OF x Item Status Connected To SH7046 E8000S Emulator CPU SH7046 ate ie Mode Auto select Disabl
149. cifies an external probe signal condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To specify an external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x Lt bly el ol 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition can be specified not to include the external probe signal condition for bit location lt nmiopt gt Specifies an NMI signal Valid when lt type gt is a or b To trace the user program when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To trace the user program when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt irqopt gt Specifies IRQO to IRQ7 signal conditions Valid when lt type gt is a or b To specify IRQO to IRQ7 signal conditions irq lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows Specify each bit as follows To specify bits IRQO to IRQ7 7 65 4 3 2 1 O Bit location x x x X X xX xX xX Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ number When is specified the condition can be specified not to include the IRQ condition for bit location lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count until trace acquisition condition is satisfied Valid when lt tracetype gt is stop and lt type gt is a or b To specify a pass count count lt value gt Any value from H 1 to H FFFF can be specified as lt value
150. cify up to 255 software breakpoints Up to 65 535 passes can be specified for each software breakpoint User program Program flow A break occurs after the replaced instruction at address H 1000 is executed Instruction a Tee Figure 5 13 Example of a Software Break Instruction When memory is accessed in trace halt mode the contents at the specified address are replaced with a break instruction Setting a Software Break Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window and click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear 126 Break Condition B Condition C Condition U Point l Sequence Condition 4 Break point Hocoo0040 DiE BT Add Edit Reset Reset AII Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 14 Point Page Break Dialog Box Table 5 21 Point Page Options Option Description Break point Displays the specified pass point addresses The pass point and reset point address settings are displayed as follows lt pass point address gt lt number of passes gt lt number of passes gt indicates the number of times the breakpoint was passed before execution was completed This is cleared on the next execution Add Sets software breakpoints Clicking Add opens the Break Point dialog box Edit Allows the user to modify the software sequential breakpoint settin
151. conditions Trace Filter Function This function displays all trace information that satisfies the conditions specified in the Trace window The search conditions can be specified in the Trace Filter dialog box Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Filter from the menu and the Trace Filter dialog box will appear Select the 193 General page of the Trace Filter dialog box then select the Pattern radio button in the Type group box General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time Type Cycle Start osi 2 End p 255 Figure 5 61 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page Table 5 68 General Page Options Option Description Type Selects a format for the display of trace information Cycle Disables any search conditions set in the Trace Filter dialog box Displays the whole contents of the trace buffer in the Trace window Pattern Searches under the conditions set in the Trace Filter dialog box and displays the results in the Trace window Cycle Sets a range to be displayed Set negative values for as cycles before the delay condition was satisfied with the bus cycle on which the conditions are satisfied as the origin 0 Start is the pointer to the first bus cycle End is the pointer to the last bus cycle The input area must always be set The default values are D 51
152. consumption the MCU has sleep software standby and hardware standby modes D 2 1 Hardware Standby Mode Since the HSTBY signal from the user system is not input to the MCU in the emulator the emulator does not support this mode D 2 2 Sleep and Software Standby Modes e Break The sleep and software standby modes can be cleared with either the normal clearing function or with the break condition satisfaction forced break and the program breaks When restarting after a break the user program will restart at the instruction following the SLEEP instruction e Trace Trace information is not acquired in these modes e Memory access with emulator functions For information on displaying and modifying the contents of memory in the sleep and software standby modes refer to section E 8 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory D 3 Interrupts During execution and step execution the user can interrupt the MCU D 4 Control Input Signals RES BREQ and WAIT The MCU control input signals are RES BREQ and WAIT The RES signal is only valid when emulation has been started with normal program execution i e the RES signal is invalid when emulation has been started with step execution The BREQ and WAIT signals are valid during emulation with the display and modification of memory contents execution and step execution While emulation is being halted break the input of RES BREQ or WAIT signals to the MCU by the user sys
153. cseereeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesecesecaecnaecsaesaeeeas 235 AUM WitdOw icc onesies ied Beata ea Aesth eR Aaah 238 AUM Target Details Dialog Box eee cece cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesecesecnaecaecsaeeaes 239 Auto update Memory Edit Dialog BOX oo eee eee eeceeeceseceeceseceaecaeenaeenes 240 Basic Bus Cycle Software Wait ccccscccscessseesceesceeeceeeceeceseceaecaeceeecaeecaeeeneeeeeees 320 User System Interface Circuits 1 c ccccccecssccessceessecesseeeseeceeeeeeseeceeeeeseeceeeeeesaeenes 321 User System Interface Circuits 2 c cccccccccecssccssscesssecssecesseeceeeeesseceeeeeseeceeeeeesaeenee 322 User System Interface Circuits 3 ccccccccecssccsssceessecessceeeeceeeeeeseecseeeeseeceeeeeesaeenes 323 User System Interface Circuits 4 cc ccceccsccsscecssecsescecssecseeeecsseseeseecsaeseeseecsseensaes 324 User System Interface Circuits 5 ccccccececssccessceessecessceeeeceeseeesseceeeeeeeceseseeaeene 325 User System Interface Circuits 6 cccccccecssccessceessecssecesseecseeeeeseeceeeeeseeceeeeeesaeenes 326 External Dimensions and Mass of the Emulator cccceesceeseeesceeeceeeeeeenseeseeenes 327 External Dimensions and Mass of the Evaluation Chip Board cccccsceceseeeeees 328 Connection Using the HS7046ECH8 1H ou cece eeeeeeceeeceseceecesecaecaecnaeeneeeas 331 Restrictions on Component Installation 0 0 eeee cee cseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesereneensees 331 Recommended Mount Pad Dimensions of the User System
154. cts Trace Condition A for use as a sequential trace stop At this time any existing condition settings for Trace Condition A and Break Condition A are cleared Therefore any trace stop conditions which you wished to use must be specified again Select the Condition A page of the Trace window using the same procedure described when setting trace stop conditions the same setting procedure applies to the Condition B page For details on the Condition A and Condition B pages refer to section 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break Click the Edit button to open the Condition dialog box For details on the procedure for registering sequential trace stop conditions and the display of the number of times the conditions are satisfied on the status bar refer to section 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break 179 Trace Stop Due to Trace Buffer Overflow Trace acquisition can be stopped when the trace buffer in the emulator overflows Select Trace stop under Buffer Over Flow on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition erstmal oraint ent Bancel Apply l Figure 5 51 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page 180 Range Trace Mode Overview Information is only acquired while the specified conditions are satisfied User program Program flow a Trace buffer L Trace acquisition condition is satisfied
155. d after execution stops BREAKPOINT IS DELETED A xxxxxxxx When the above message is displayed use the Delete All or Disable button in the Breakpoints window to cancel all software breakpoint settings If it is not possible to correctly set a breakpoint when a session file is loaded the breakpoint is registered as DISABLE in the Breakpoints window Software breakpoints are ignored during step execution Do not set a software breakpoint immediately after the delay slot of a delayed branch instruction If this is attempted a slot illegal instruction interrupt will occur when the delayed branch instruction is executed and the break will not occur Do not allow the user program to modify memory at a breakpoint address The contents of the specified address where a breakpoint has been set are replaced by a break instruction during emulation When execution starts at the address of a software breakpoint counting of the number of passes starts from the next pass 129 5 5 2 Software Sequential Break Overview A software sequential break occurs when software breakpoints are encountered in the specified order Break condition The break condition is satisfied User program when instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2000 have been Program executed in sequence flow 1000 Break condition 1 No break occurs 2000 Break condition 2 The break condition is satisfied when instructions at addresses H 1000 and H 2
156. d number of steps Executes the specified number of steps Note that the specified address must be the start of an instruction If for example the address of the second byte of an instruction is specified execution will not stop and the specified number of steps will still be executed Click the Step dialog button specify the number of steps in Steps in the Step Program dialog box and start execution Selecting Step Over Calls allows a function call to be executed as a single step Select Step from the Run menu The settings are the same as above Stopping function Steps out of a function Execution stops Click the Step Out button execution at the line after the calling line in the Select Step Out from the Run program menu Note Some break conditions become disabled depending on the mode of execution in steps For details on the relationship between the types of steps and break conditions that become invalid see appendix E 7 Step Function 5 4 2 Interrupts during Step Execution Interrupts cannot normally be accepted during step execution Select Interrupts during step from the General page of the Configuration dialog box if you want interrupts to be accepted during step execution 123 5 5 Break Functions The emulator provides break function shown in table 5 20 The HDI displays a list of breakpoints in the Breakpoints window and the break conditions are speci
157. ddress H 200000 R address H 300000 To clear the settings when the sequential trace stop condition has been set for Trace Condition B TAC B Note It is not possible to use numbers to specify the points of a hardware sequential trace If this is attempted it sets the condition at the opposite position in the sequence of conditions To set the sequential conditions again clear all of the conditions 305 6 2 19 TRACE_DISPLAY TD Command syntax and parameters td range lt startcycle gt to lt endcycle gt Description Displays trace information Parameter Type Description lt startcycle gt Numeric Specifies the first cycle value of the range of trace information to be displayed lt endcycle gt Numeric Specifies the last cycle value of the range of trace information to be displayed Example To display acquired trace information within the range from D 1000 to D O TD RANGE D 1000 to 0 306 6 2 20 TRACE MODE TM Command syntax and parameters e Setting e Display Parameter lt dmaopt gt tm lt dmaopt gt lt tracemode gt lt timeopt gt tm Type Keyword Description Specifies whether or not trace information is acquired on DMA DTC cycles dma enable Acquired default dma disable Not acquired lt tracemode gt Keyword Specifies whether a break is generated or tracing is stopped when the trace buffer overflows ofoff A break is not generated def
158. der certain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas
159. dition For details on specifying the conditions refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break The descriptions given below are of Address Bus State Interrupt and Time settings a Address Page Use the Address page to specify bus conditions for use in searching for address bus information 195 General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time Address ri f Address Range Start HO f l H O Non user mask C User mask oo Figure 5 62 Trace Filter Dialog Box Address Page Table 5 70 Address Page Options Option Description Don t Care No address bus condition is set Type Type of address as a search condition Address to Mask are only available when address types All or PC are specified All The address bus settings from Address to Mask are available PC The program counter settings from Address to Mask are available External space Emulation non emulation memory area Internal ROM space Internal ROM area Internal I O space Internal I O area Internal RAM space Internal RAM area Address Selects the range set as Start or Mask as a trace search condition Range Selects the range set as Start to End as a trace search condition Start Sets the start address value as a numerical value or a symbol End When Range is selected sets the end address value as a numerical value or symbol Non user mask A mask c
160. dition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt byte To specify a 16 bit data trace search condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt word To specify a 32 bit data trace search condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt long lt maskdata gt Specifies the mask data To search for trace information on data of size smaller than a byte specify a mask lt accessopt gt Specifies a bus status condition To search tracing with the DMA DTC cycle access dma To search tracing with the CPU data access cycle access dat To search tracing with the CPU instruction fetch cycle access prg 310 Parameter lt r wopt gt Description Specifies read or write condition To search through the trace information for read cycles direction read To search through the trace information for write cycles direction write lt prbopt gt Specifies an external probe signal condition To specify an external probe signal condition prb lt bit specification gt A bit is specified as follows PRB1 to PRB4 signal bit specification 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x x x Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x Pilea 4 3 2 1 PRB number When is specified the condition can be specified not to include the external probe signal condition for bit location lt irqopt gt Specifies IRQO to IRQ7 signal conditions To specify IRQO to IRQ7 signal conditions irq lt b
161. dress range as a write protected area in the user memory area USER AREA Guarded Sets the address range as a access prohibited area in the user memory area EMULATION AREA EMULATION AREA Read Only Sets the address range in the emulation memory area Sets the address range as a write protected area in the emulation memory area EMULATION AREA Guarded Sets the address range as a access prohibited area in the emulation memory area The attribute settings listed above are only for external memory and cannot be applied to the internal ROM area internal RAM area and internal I O area Notes 1 Do not allocate emulation memory to memory area other than CS 2 Refer to appendix E 2 Emulation Memory for details on emulation memory and other limitations 5 12 Stack Trace Function The stack trace function displays the history of function calls In the stack trace function contents of memory are displayed in the Stack Trace window The Stack Trace window can be displayed by selecting Stack Trace from the View menu E Stack Trace Value func3 short Ox00000094 param 3 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fd8 f short local 3 param 2 local 2 param 1 local 1 main start F P L F P L F P L F L fune2 short funci short D 3 Ox00003fd4 unsigned long 0x00000072 Ox00003ffa Ox00003fe4 short D 2 Ox00003fe0 unsigned long Ox0000003e Ox00003ffa Ox00003ff0
162. e or 4 0 Level V lt Back Returns to the Pin Select Registers page Next gt Goes to the next page H UDI JTAG Clock Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings Note Set the level for detecting supply of a low voltage on the Vcc pin H UDI JTAG Clock Page Sets the H UDI JTAG interface input clock Set the conditions and click the Finish button to close the CPU Operating Mode dialog box The HDI will be restarted CPU Operating Mode H UDI JTAG Clock H UDILTAG Clock lt Back Cancel Help Figure 5 10 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box H UDI JTAG Clock Page Table 5 13 H UDI JTAG Clock Page Option Description H UDI JTAG Clock Sets the frequency of the clock for input to the H UDI Select 2 5 MHz initial value 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz CPU clock CPU clock 1 2 CPU clock 1 4 or CPU clock 1 8 CPU clock is a system clock 6 lt Back Returns to the Vcc Down Detection Level page Finish Sets the emulator according to the content of each page then re activates the emulator Cancel Cancels changes made for the settings Note The input clock for the H UDI must be set at a frequency lower than that of the clock that drives the peripheral module PQ 115 5 3 Realtime Emulation 5 3 1 Execution Table 5 14 shows the main forms of realtime execution Table 5 14 Settings in the Configuration Dialog Box Form Function Procedure
163. e Board HS6000EII01H Description Notes on Using the PC Card Interface HS6000EIP01H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the PCI Interface Board HS6000EICO1H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the PCI Interface Board HS6000EICO2H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Description Notes on Using the LAN Adapter HS6000ELN01H for the E6000 E8000 Emulator Hitachi Embedded Workshop User s Manual SuperH RISC engine C C Compiler User s Manual SuperH RISC engine Assembler User s Manual H Series Linkage Editor Librarian Object Converter User s Manual Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual Hardware Manual supporting each MCU Programming Manual supporting each MCU Notes 1 IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation 2s Microsoft Windows and WindowsNT 4 0 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or in other countries 3 Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States Abbreviation 1 Windows 95 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 95 operating system 2 Windows 98 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system 3 Windows Me is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows Millenium Edition 4 WindowsNT 4 0 is an abbreviation for Microsoft WindowsNT 4 0 operating system 5 Windows 2000 is an abbreviation for Microsoft Windows 2000 operating s
164. e CK signal 189 Ti Tw T2 Ti Tw T2 Ti Tw T2 Ti Tw T2 TI JA Ai Aref Data 3 TDA External probe X Undefined Figure 5 58 Tracing External Probe Signal 1 External probe signal a Information is traced on the falling edge of the T2 cycle of the CK signal figure 5 58 1 b When the level of the external probe signal changes while information is being acquired this change will not be included in the trace information figure 5 58 2 c If the sampling edge and the level of an external probe signal change at the same time the information traced will be undefined figure 5 58 3 If the sampling edge and any asynchronous input signal that is being traced changes at the same time the information traced will be undefined 2 Number of clocks Up to three clock cycles of tracing can take place in one bus cycle A 5 6 3 Trace Display Select the trace display format on the General page of the Trace Filter dialog box Select Filter from the pop up menu of the Trace window to produce this dialog box 190 Trace Filter xi General Type Cycle Patten m Cycle Stat f 0 512 End D 255 Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 59 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page When there is no trace information the Trace window will initially display nothing It will display no trace record once it has been updated Trace Display The range for displ
165. e PC Interface Board on Windows 2000 Support of the PC Interface Board The PC interface board is not supported in Windows 2000 When Using the PCI Interface Board Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select PCI Card Driver as the component Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch Install the PCI bus interface board into the host computer Turn on the host computer Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically Select Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location Specify lt Drive gt 7046 DRIVERS PCI 2000 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive Check that E6000 PCI Card has been detected and complete driver installation When Using the PC Interface Card Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select PC Card Driver PCMCIA as the component Install the PC interface card into the host computer Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically Select Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location Specify lt Drive gt 7046 DRIVERS PCMCIA 2000 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive Check that E8000 E6000 PC Card has been detected and complete driver installation Whe
166. e Sample Program ee eee eeseeceeeceeecesecesecaecsaecseesaeeeneeees 72 4 4 2 Displaying the Source Program eee eee eeeeceeeceseceeceseceaeceaecseecaeeeaeeeneseeeees 73 4 5 Setting the Software Breakpoint 00 eee ee eecesecesecneeceecaeecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeenseeeseeeseengees 75 4 6 Executing the Programs inserere tesia itr inre reoot Es ino e ore ES Ek reor E Eoi 76 4 7 Reviewing Breakpoints ierni e Es EE E E E ETE 78 AB Viewing Memory aei erae ameoa asse erora as orane e ETIESE EKS E ES De Ei E EREC Ee raS R EEs SERE E Oeri TE EE 79 4 9 Watching Variables oriotar e iE eE E EEEE EEEE EE E S have 81 4 10 Stepping Through a Program 0 cece ceseesecesecnsecssesaecsaecssesaecsaecsaecsaesaecsaecaaesaeenaeraes 84 4 10 1 Executing Step In Commando ceeceecseeceeesecseeeneeeaeeaeecaeeenseaeesneeeneeees 86 4 10 2 Executing Step Out Command 000 ceeeeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeneeeaeeseeeaeseaeeeeeens 87 4 10 3 Executing Step Over Command 00 0 0 ceeeseecseeeeeeseecneeeaeeeeecaeecseeeaeeneeeas 90 4 11 Displaying Local Variables cccsc0 cc scsseeu csessetece es cteeseacesbes coedsedea eden capesssenabey E ses es 92 4 12 Saving and Loading the Session eee eee eeceeceeeceeeceseeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 93 Section 5 Emulator PUnCwonss o cih si sa scassssxqeeuiies cdaadsnneiboss oaasacaaeeqiansisa sdvadeomeignatante 95 S L TntrO MC OM iyessscoes cscs scoeiness E EEE cape E ESEE Er E EEEE EEES ES 95 5 2 Setting the Emula
167. e emulator monitors and determines whether the user system is turned on or off by the UVcc pin pin 167 or 175 on UCN1 for HS7046EBK81H Accordingly after connecting the user system to the emulator be sure to supply power to the UVcc pin Otherwise the emulator assumes that the user system is not connected 336 C3 Connecting the Cables for Tracing A WARNING Always switch the emulator and user system OFF before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator Also the USER PROGRAM being debugged will be LOST C 3 1 Connecting the cables for tracing trace cables to the emulator Connect the trace cables to the emulator before connecting it to the HS7046EBK81H board CAUTION The ends of the trace cables CN1 CN2 and CN3 which are to be connected to the emulator are bundled together at the time of shipment so that the cables are not inserted into the wrong places The cables are also bundled together at their other ends which are to be connected to the evaluation chip board For details on the connection of cables to the emulator see 3 3 2 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board C 3 2 Connecting trace cables to the evaluation chip board Connect the cables to the evaluation chip board s connectors Make sure that the names on the trace cables emulator and E8000S station to evaluation chip board interface connectors CN1
168. e veges Bebb E 277 TE RAA KO AI mi DG IN B DAE E EE E T E E TEE 278 6 2 11 EXECUTION MODE EM Jere e a NA 279 6 2 12 GOZOPTION GP iner an Ais Sable a ee E a ie eaa a dota ATENT 282 62 Be aa A D G E D DEEE A SE E N E E 285 6 2 14 MAP SET MS aat e EEE OA OEA TRETEN I RS E 286 6 2 15 Performance Commands PS PC PA s ssessssssssssseseseseessereesseressseeesereessereesssressse 287 6 22 16 REFRESH RE oii 3 a E E RE ee tent o coved Seeded een E eS eam 295 6 2 17 STATUS STS E A coord Saseseesee bod Gitaweegunemiom T ee ake 296 6 2 18 Trace Condition Commands TAS TAC TAD 0 cc cc ccccceceessececseteeeeeeseeeenees 298 6 2 19 TRACE DISPLAY FTD eneee a a E eesceh TEREE E E 306 6 2 20 TRACE MODE TM eet ne taaa E a e E a 307 6 2 21 TRACE SEARCH TS Jannen ar EREA ENEE 308 Section 7 Emor Messa p S e e a a a aaa a aa 313 7 1 Emulator Error Messages of the Emulator ccecesceesseesseesceesceeeceeceseeeeeeeaeenseeneeeneeens 313 7 2 HDI Error Messages Related to the Emulator ccececceecceesceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeseensecneeeneeens 315 7 3 Error Messages for the LAN Driver au cece cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecesecsaecaecnaecnaeeneeens 318 Appendix A User System Mert aces icc ox cashes etvendetestenecea anes eemdse nt aeees 319 A 1 User System Interface Circuit ssi ceeeseceeceseeeeseeecesecsecaecsaecaaecaaecaeseseseaeeeeeeeeeees 319 vi Appendix B Emulator External Dimensions and Mass eseeseceseeeeeeeeeees 327
169. e wsscicsvicscciistnsiunitecsteccaeentoceied ae E A A 103 EX cution MOdE2 Page sicsincscevsevesiccespeceevecsavsunsd n a 105 CPU Operating Mode Page ee t oner ia aE ron E Ea ea a ESSE 106 CPU Operating Mode Dialog BOX ssesseseessessssesesreeesererssrerrsrerresresrenrsserrrnserrrereseeet 107 Device Pin Counts Page cengins caine ninn E EE E TSS 109 MD Pin Patene nren n a N a a a ee a E 111 Pin Select Registers Page rensar A EE E a E 113 Vcc Down Detection Level Pagengro einn a a a a 114 H UDI JTAG Clock Page nnenneccinnen oe ee aE ara E 115 Settings in the Configuration Dialog BOX sessssesssseessereesesesreerrsreeresrerrssesrreresreee 116 Emulation Modes s 6c sche eae ae E R ee ee A BS 117 Restrictions on Emulation Modes ec eecesecsecseeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeenseesecaecaessaesneeens 119 Causes for Termination s cc tiie sciise a aante r EEN E E ER A ESTE OT IE 121 Operating Status Display shieh enrere terere a ae aR E eaS ees cergeneevtets 122 Step Executions r A Ae elas R ais oleae Shia 123 Break Functions esine vescas teen Gites tugs e cs E A Silent cal E E EAE EE 125 Poi t Page Options niinen oa es E A E A SN 127 Break Point Dialog Box Options essesseseessseseseeessseeesssrrrrnesrreresrenrssrerrnresreeresrent 128 Sequence Page Options ann i ee ee re e a EEE e E a e E SE 132 Table 5 24 Table 5 25 Table 5 26 Table 5 27 Table 5 28 Table 5 29 Table 5 30 Table 5 31 Table 5 32 Table 5 33
170. eak Condition U1 dialog box To specify any further mask specify for the digits to be ignored Examples of mask specification is shown below Table 5 104 Address Mask Specification No Input Value Mask Unit Example Masked Bits 1 Binary 1 bit B 01101 Masks bits 0 to 2 2 Hexadecimal 4 bits H F50 Masks bits 0 to 11 242 5 16 Source Window Expanded Function 5 16 1 Setting BP Column In the HDI software breakpoints can be set cancelled or displayed and software sequential breakpoints can be displayed or cancelled in the BP column of the Source window Software breakpoints can be set or cancelled by selecting a program PC breakpoint with the left hand mouse button and double clicking in the BP column or by placing the cursor at the line where the breakpoint was set and press the F9 key This function is the same as for the BP columns in the Disassembly and Labels windows The contents of the items displayed in the BP columns are shown in table 5 105 Table 5 105 BP Column Display Item Displayed Item Contents No display Nothing is set Break A software break is set PASS A pass point for a software sequential break is set RESET A reset point for a software sequential break is set Notes 1 When a software breakpoint is set in the BP column the satisfaction count is 1 2 Software sequential breakpoints PASS or RESET can be displayed and cancelled in the BP column but cannot be se
171. eak Condition U3 Program execution does not stop after Break Condition U1 and U2 or Break Condition U3 and U4 have been satisfied and the execution times between the satisfaction of Break Condition U2 and Break Condition U1 and Break Condition U4 and Break Condition U4 are recorded as a total The measurement results from time interval measurement model 2 3 are displayed in Interval Time Count 2 gt 1 and Interval Time Count 4 gt 3 on the Platform page of the System Status window The measurement time is set by The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution The user can select between approximately 14 minutes with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us 26 seconds with a sampling interval during execution of 1 6 us or 0 33 seconds with 203 a sampling interval during execution of 20 ns as the maximum time intervals over which the emulator is to measure performance The counter for measurement has 24 bits The display format is shown below Interval time Count 2 gt 1 a D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS 00 0 E COUNT D 00000 b MAX D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS c MIN D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS d AVE D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS Interval Time Count 4 gt 3 e D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS 00 0 E COUNT D 00000 f MAX D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS g MIN D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS h AVE D 0000H 00M 00S 000000US 000NS a In time interval measurement mode 1 2 3
172. eak conditions from the first condition Table 5 51 Internal Sequential Break Modes Break Condition U1 to U4 Mode Description 1 A break occurs when internal break conditions U2 and U1 are satisfied in that order 2 A break occurs when internal break conditions U3 U2 and U1 are satisfied in that order 3 A break occurs when internal break conditions U4 U3 U2 and U1 are satisfied in that order Setting an Internal Sequential Break Specify the internal break conditions U4 U1 then select the internal sequential break mode from Emulation mode on the General page of the Configuration dialog box In the example shown in figure 5 43 internal sequential break mode 1 is selected 166 Execution Mode Execution Mode2 CPU Operating Mode Emulator Clock 4MHz E Break Condition U Sequential 2 gt 1 v Figure 5 43 Configuration Dialog Box Internal Sequential Break Any one of the modes shown in table 5 52 can be selected from Emulation mode Table 5 52 Emulation mode Options Break Condition U1 to U4 Option Description Sequential break mode U2 gt 1 Internal sequential break mode 1 Sequential break mode U3 gt 2 gt 1 Internal sequential break mode 2 Sequential break mode U4 gt 3 gt 2 gt 1 Internal sequential break mode 3 167 5 5 7 Forced Break A user program can be forcibly terminated by clicking the STOP button or by selecting Halt from the Run menu The sys
173. easurement mode Specification start lt address gt lt address gt Address value To specify the start address range in time measurement mode 3 Specification start lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt endopt gt Specifies the subroutine end address in time measurement modes 1 and 2 area access count mode and subroutine call count measurement mode Specification end lt address gt lt address gt Address numeric To specify the end address range in time measurement mode 3 Specification end lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt lt address1 gt Start address numeric lt address2 gt End address numeric lt timeopt gt Specifies the timeout period The user can use parameter lt timeopt gt in channel number 1 and time measurement modes 1 and 2 When the user sets a condition to PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS1 the emulator stops the execution of the user program after the time set to lt timeopt gt has passed In this case the user must specify pabreak in the GO_OPTION command Specification time lt time gt Parameter lt time gt specifies the time value in the following format mm ss uuuuuu mm minute 0 to 59 ss second 0 to 59 uuuuuu microsecond 0 to 999999 289 Parameter Description lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count The user can use parameter lt countopt gt in channel number
174. ecified Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box For details on the creation of hardware break conditions refer to the description of the Entry List page in Entry List Page under Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition in section 5 5 3 Hardware Break 154 Condition History Entry List Condition ea address H 4000 address H 3000 Edit address H 2000 address H 1000 Delete Enty gt Duplicate Sequence No Condition address H 1000 address H 2000 address H 3000 address H 4000 2 Delete Cancel Help Figure 5 35 Condition Dialog Box Entry List Page 155 Table 5 41 Entry List Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions that have previously been set are displayed in a list New The Condition A B dialog box is displayed so that new conditions can be created Edit Selecting a condition to be modified from the Condition list then clicking the Edit button displays the Condition A B dialog box so that the condition can be modified Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Condition list Duplicate Duplicates the condition selected in the Condition list v Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking this button adds that condition to the next empty spot in Nos 1 to 7 of the Sequence list VR Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clicking t
175. ection 3 Prepatation before Use a se Sactoed eee A a A om ena 3A Description on Emulator Usage se een e a E E E Saeed 3 2 Installing the Acrobat Reader so3te cy oacin ain ease deceit ain 323 Emulator Connectoren ous chives satvedy aia EEE SEa SAEK EE NEE anA seve 3 3 1 Connecting the Device Control Board s sessseeessereesseesererrsrreresrerrssrrrrsresrensesrees 3 3 2 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board eseeseeeseeeessseerssresrrserrrssesrrerrsreeresreeresene 3 3 3 Connecting the User System Interface Cable eeseeseeseeeseeereseesssererssrrressesrrers 3 3 4 Connecting the External Probe enei ee cesecesecnse cee ceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseenaees 3 3 32 selecting the Clock hirni Moka r e EA E ER Se eh Besos 3 3 6 Connecting the System Ground aseissa i en a aE 3 3 7 Setting the Host Interface Switch sssesseseesseesesesesereresresrssterresesrenrsrenreseeersserees 3 4 Setting Up with Windows Operating Systems c cccsscsssesssssssssessesseesseesecsessecseesesseesses 3 4 1 Setting Up the PCI Interface Board on Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows M cts ea i ah a ee ac a 3 4 2 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows NT 4 0 w ccsscsssessesssessesssesseessee 3 4 3 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows 2000 s sscssssssesseessesseeseesees 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications cece Contents iii 3 5 Installing the System Progra
176. ects the host computer to the E8000S station A PC interface board ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus or LAN adapter can be connected Marked PCIF For selecting the host interface Do not change the settings Marked SW1 For trace cable 1 that connects the E8000S station to the evaluation chip board For trace cable 2 that connects the E8000S station to the evaluation chip board Prevents a trace cable from being inserted into the wrong place Prevents a trace cable from being inserted into the wrong place 2 1 2 Device Control Board Components The names of the components on the device control board HS7046EDD81H of the E8000S station are listed below Alsddaor0zsh E e e Figure 2 4 Device Control Board A Device control board slot For installing the device control board depends on the target device a External probe connector CN4 For connecting the E8000S station to the external probe b Station to evaluation chip board For trace cable 3 that connects the E8000S station interface connector CN3 to the evaluation chip board c Power supply cable J1 For supplying power to the evaluation chip board 2 1 3 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration The names of the components on the evaluation chip board HS7046EBK8 1H of the emulator are listed below HS7046EBK81H HITACHI c b 1 Top view of the HS7046EBK81H board 2 Bottom view of the HS7046EBK81H board Stat
177. ed Clock Mode MD3 2 Clock Mode 1 Operating Mode MD1 0 Mode 3 single chip mode MD Value CE8000S 07 MD value User System 00 Pin Counts Device 80 IRQO HIGH IRQL HIGH IRQ2 HIGH IRQ3 HIGH IRQ4 HIGH IRQ5 HIGH IRQ6 HIGH IRQ HIGH BREQ HIGH BACK HIGH WAIT HIGH Vcc Down Detection Level 2 6V H UDI CITAG Clock 2 5MHZ Clock source Emulator Clock 12 5MHz Run status Break Cause of last break Interval Time Count 2 gt 1 MAX 2 gt 1 MIN 2 gt 1 AVE 2 gt 1 MAX 4 gt 3 MIN 4 gt 3 AVE 4 gt 3 Interval Time Count 4 gt 3 Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Not used Condition B Sequential Not used Interval Timer counter 20ns Bus timeout 100us Multi break PRB1 Disabled Internal ROM Option Disabled RES signal Enabled BREQ signal Enabled WAIT signal Enabled Output trigger TRGB Disabled output Trigger IRGU Disabled Emulation mode Timeout trace of Performance analysis Prohibit R w on the fly Disabled Interrupts during step Disabled i h Session Platform Memory 4 Events A Figure 5 67 System Status Window Display of Execution Time 202 In the window the user program execution time will be displayed as decimal numbers of hours minutes etc The user can use the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box to set a maximum period of measurement The maximum times are approximately 9999 hours with a sampling interval during execution of 52 us
178. ed CD R The provided CD R contains software for the SH7046 E8000S emulator and user s manuals Table 2 1 shows the configuration of the CD R All directories listed in this table are under the directory 7046 in the root directory Table 2 1 Contents of CD R Directory Name File Name Contents Note setup exe Installer System E8000 sys System program for the SH7046 E8000S emulator System shcenf046 sys Control program for the SH7046 E8000S emulator System shdct046 sys Configuration file for the SH7046 E8000S emulator System diag sys Diagnostic and maintenance program Drivers Pci 95 pcihei inf Setup information PCI For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pci 95 pcihei vxd Virtual driver PCI For Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows Me Drivers Pci Nt pcihei sys System file PCI For Windows NT Drivers Pci 2000 pcihei sys System file PCI For Windows 2000 Drivers Pci 2000 pcihei2k inf Setup information PCI For Windows 2000 Drivers lsa Nt emulator sys System file ISA For Windows NT Table 2 1 Contents of CD R cont Directory Name File Name Contents Notes Drivers Pcmcia 95 ulepcc inf Setup information PCMCIA For Windows 95 and Windows 98 Drivers Pcmcia 95 ulepcc vxd Virtual driver PCMCIA For Windows 95 and Windows 98 Drivers Pcmcia Nt ulepccnt sys System file PCMCIA For Windows NT Drivers Pcmcia 2
179. ed as a session file Loading this session file at HDI initialization will allow debugging to be resumed from the same state as the last session To save the session file select Save Session As from the File menu At this time the window for specifying the file name is displayed Input the session file name in the window and click the Save button To load the session file select Load Session from the File menu A session file can be automatically saved and loaded by setting the HDI Options dialog box of Options in the Setup menu To automatically save the session file click on the Save session automatically radio button in the Session page The dialog box for specifying the file at HDI termination is then displayed Specifying the file name enables session information to be automatically saved to the file from the following HDI termination To automatically load the session file enable Load last session on startup check box in the Session page The session information is automatically loaded For more details on sessions and a setting method refer to the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual on the CD R 93 94 5 1 Section 5 Emulator Functions Introduction The following is a full description of the emulator s functions including those that were not described in section 4 Tutorial Table 5 1 is a list of the emulator functions that are described in this section Table 5 1 Emula
180. ed from H 400 to H 40F CVD START 400 END 40F ADDRESS The display format is as follows gt CVD START 400 END 40F ADDRESS lt S ADDR gt lt E ADDR gt 00000400 0000040B To display the data as a list of the addresses of instructions that have not been executed from H 400 to H 40F CVD START 400 END 40F ADDRESS NOT The display format is as follows gt CVD START 400 END 40F ADDRESS NOT lt S ADDR gt lt E ADDR gt 0000040C 0000040F To display the ratio of executed address to all the addresses from H 400 to H 40F CVD START 400 END 40F RATE The display format is as follows gt CVD START 400 END 40F RATE lt S ADDR gt lt E ADDR gt lt RATE gt 00000400 0000040F 75 00 6 8 To display the rate of the data as a list of the addresses of instructions that have been executed or not from H 400 to H 40F with the dump format CVD START 400 END 40F DUMP The display format is as follows gt CVD START 400 END 40F DUMP 00000400 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FE FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 276 6 2 9 DEVICE_TYPE DE Command syntax and parameters de Description This command displays the selected target MCU Examples To display the selected MCU DE The display format is as follows gt DE Current device SH7046 277 6 2 10 END END Command syntax and parameters end Description This command returns control to user program emulatio
181. ed that customers contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein The information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors Please also pay attention to information published by Renesas Technology Corporation by various means including the Renesas Technology Corporation Semiconductor home page http www renesas com When using any or all of the information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein Renesas Technology Corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation or an authorized Renesas Technology Corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes such as apparatus or systems for t
182. ed under Type in the Breakpoints window Hardware sequential break An order of satisfaction can be specified for hardware break conditions Break Condition A or B When all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order a break occurs Break Condition X Sequential X A or B is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Internal break This break function is implemented by the MCU When any of the conditions specified as Break Condition U1 to U4 has been satisfied a break occurs Break Condition Un n number is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window When a reset point is specified Break Condition U Reset is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Internal sequential break An order of satisfaction can be specified for internal break conditions This kind of break occurs when all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order Break Condition U1 to U4 can be used in four levels of sequential break conditions Break Condition U Reset is used as the reset point for sequential break conditions Forced break This is the break for the forcible termination of a program that is issued when the STOP button on the toolbar is pressed Forced break due to writing to a write protected access forbidden area This kind of break occurs when the current user program attempts to write to an area of the emulation memory that has the
183. eeceaeeeeeeesnaeeesees 194 Trace Filter Dialog Box Address Page 0 ecceeccessseceeeecsseceereecnaeceeneeenseeeeees 196 Trace Filter Dialog Box Bus State Page 0 ee ceeeesseceeeeeesteceeneeceseceeneeenseeeees 197 Trace Filter Dialog Box Interrupt Page 0 eee eeseeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeceereeeneeeeeees 198 Trace Filter Dialog Box Time Page ee eeeseeeccesseeceeeeeeeeceereeeneeceseeeenaeeeeees 199 Trace Find Dialog Box General Page eee ceeeeesseceeeeeeneeceereeeseeceereeeeeeesees 201 System Status Window Display of Execution Time cscceseceeseeceeeeeneeeeees 202 Performance Analysis WindOw ccesccessceceseeeeseeceeeeeseeceaeeeeaeeceaeeseneeceaeeeenters 206 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 00 eee eeeeeeceseceneeeseeneee 208 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 0000 eee eeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeees 209 Example of Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 000 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeaes 210 Performance Analysis Dialog BOX cecceesceessecesececeseceeeeeceaeceeeeeceaeeeeaeecsaeenenees 211 Performance 1 Dialog Box General Page 0 cece eeeeeeseecseeceeeeeceteceeneeceeeeeneees 213 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page ceescessseceseeeeneeceereeeneeceereeeeeees 214 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeessscesreeeseeceeeeeeneeceeneeeeeees 215 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page cesccessecesreeesee
184. eeenes 88 Figure 4 25 Source Window Step Out Step In ee eesceenceceseceeeeeceseceeaeeceaeeseneecsaeeenees 88 Figure 4 26 Watch Window Display Example 2 eee eeccesscesecesecesecsecaeecneeeseeeeeeeeeeseenes 89 Figure 4 27 Source Window Before Step Over Execution cescceeeecsseceereeceseceeneeenaeceeneees 90 Figure 4 28 Source Window Step OVEL ccescescceesseceeececsseceeneecaecesneecsaeceeneecsaeceeeeeeaeeeeneees 91 Figure 4 29 Watch Window Display Example 3 0 eee ceeeecesscesecesecesecseceeecneeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 91 Fig re 4 30 Locals Wind aw decreet enn er e a a ei 92 Figure 4 31 Locals Window Displaying Array a Elements 000 cee cece cneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 92 Figure 5 1 Configuration Dialog BOR isen aaen as aip S E RE Na 98 Figure 5 2 Configuration Dialog Box General Page sesesseeeeseereeresrsererrsreerssrrrrssesresreseee 100 Figure 5 3 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode1 Page eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 102 Figure 5 4 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page seeeesesesseeseseersererrsrrerserrers 104 Figure 5 5 Configuration Dialog Box CPU Operating Mode Page esseere 106 Figure 5 6 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Device Pin Counts Page sceeeeeseeeees 108 Figure 5 7 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box MD Pin Page eee eee eeeeeeceseeeseeeaes 110 Figure 5 8 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Pin Select Registers Page eee 112 Figure 5 9 CP
185. egisters Sets the registers for selecting pins Vcc Down Detection Selects the detection level of Vcc Down Level H UDI JTAG clock Sets the input clock to the H UDI JTAG interface Note Settings made in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box are saved in the emulatorand not in the session file The initial values on each page are the values initially installed with the system files If the settings have changed the initial values at initiation are the changed values 107 Device Pin Counts Page Use this page to select the target MCU Set the conditions on each page as required then click the Next button CPU Operating Mode Device Pin Counts L suos A S A E Figure 5 6 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Device Pin Counts Page 108 Table 5 9 Device Pin Counts Page Item Description Operating Mode Auto This setting is activated when the user system is connected and allows select automatic detection of the number of pins on the user system and the settings of the MD pins When the user system is not connected the settings under Pin Counts and on the MD Pin pages are used initial value Disabled Device Selects the target MCU Select Custom to specify the number of pins on the supported MCU under Pin Counts initial value SH7046 Pin Counts Specifies the number of pins of the supported MCU 80 80 pins 100 100 pins 112 112 pins 144 144 pins
186. er on reset signal res enable Enabled default res disable Disabled lt busrequest gt Keyword Enables or disables the input of the bus mastership request signal breq enable Enabled default breq disable Disabled lt wait_signal gt Keyword Enables or disables the input of WAIT signal wait enable Enabled default wait disable Disabled lt trigger_bcb gt Keyword Specifies the pulse output mode when the emulator satisfies Break Condition B or Trace Condition B trgb 1 trgb 2 trgb 3 trgb 4 trgb 5 trgb 6 trgb 7 or trgb 8 The emulator will output a pulse when the emulator satisfies a channel condition set to Break Condition B or Trace Condition B trgb all The emulator will output a pulse when the emulator satisfies a channel condition set to Break Condition B or Trace Condition B trgb disable The emulator stops the execution of user program but does not output a pulse default 280 Parameter Type Description lt trigger_bcu gt Keyword Specifies the pulse output mode when the emulator satisfies hardware break BCU trgu enable The emulator stops the execution of user program and outputs a pulse trgu stop The emulator does not stop the execution of user program but outputs a pulse trgu disable The emulator stops the execution of user program but does not output any pulse default Description This command displays and sets debugging conditions while
187. errreesrenresrenssreresee 43 Connecting the E8000S Station to the PC Interface Board eseseeeseeeeeeeeereereeeee 44 Start Menu System Install Too cee eeeceesecsseceeececeeeceeneeceaeeeeeeeceaeeeeneecsaeeeeneees 48 Browse for Folder Dialog BOX s sessssssessseeserssressesssesessseesserrsressresseesseseeseesseessee 49 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH7046 0 0 eee eeeeseceseceseccneeeseeeeeeeseenseenseeeaes 50 System Install Completed Dialog Box SH7046 eeseeececssecesereeeneeeeseeeenees 51 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH7046 eee ee eeeeeecesecesecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeenseeeaes 52 Start Menu Initiating the HDI 0 0 eee eeneecsseceenceceaeceeneecaeceseeecaeeeeaeecnaeeeenees 53 Select Session Dialog BOX cee eescceencecsseceeeeeceseceeececaeceeaeecaeeeeaeecaeeeeneecnaeeeeneees 53 Driver Details Dialog Box When ISA Bus Is Selected 0 0 0 cee eeeseeeneeeeeeceeneees 54 Status Bar during the HDI Initiation cece eeeceeeceeeeeecesecaecnaecseeeneeas 54 Status Bar at the HDI Initiation Completion esesseesseeeessereeesesreerrsreersrerrssesreeresreee 54 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 1 ee ceeeeeeesecssecseeeneeeeeeees 55 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 2 eeeeeescesecsseeseeeneeeneeees 55 Error Message on PC Interface Board Connection Failure eee eee eee eseeereeees 56 Error Message on Emulator Connection Failure eeceeceseceeceeeeneeceeeneeees 56
188. ers whenever the system is activated or the MCU is reset by commands Table E 3 Initial Values of Registers in the MCU and the Emulator Register Name PC Emulator Power On Power on reset vector PC value Reset Reset CPU Power on reset vector PC value MCU Reset Power on reset vector PC value RO to R14 H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined R15 SP Power on reset vector Power on reset vector Power on reset vector SP value SP value SP value SR H 000000FO H 000000FO H 00000XFX GBR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined VBR H 00000000 H 00000000 H 00000000 MACH H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined MACL H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined PR H 00000000 Value before reset Undefined Note X indicates an undefined value 2 There is a delay on these signals since the user system interface circuit in the emulator includes pull up resistors and buffers Due to the pull up resistors the signals can be at a high 355 level even when they are also in their high impedance state Take these points into account when preparing hardware for the user system For details on the user system interface and the delays on signals see appendix A User System Interface Circuit E 7 Step Function Some types of break will be disabled according to the type of step function to be executed Table E 4 shows the relations between the type of step function and the enabling or disabling of break condition
189. essaesneeens 235 Table 5 100 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Options oo ee ee cee cee cnne cess cece sneeeeeeeeeees 236 Table 5 101 Access Types for Displaying and Modifying Contents of Memory 04 236 Table 5 102 Characteristics of Displaying and Modifying Contents of Memory 04 237 Table 5 103 Dialog Boxes for Setting Auto Update Memory Items 0 0 eeeeee entree 238 Table 5 104 Address Mask Specification 0 0 e ee ceecesecesecssecseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeesecesecaeeaeenaeeaes 242 Table 5 105 BP Column Display Item eee cee cseecneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeensecesecsaecsaeenaeenes 243 Table 6 1 List of Commands 25 2 s cccceseveve cs seh ibis i cosh esceus E eee dehoes ch tune CE EEOSE EESE 247 Tables7 4 Error Messages i ci tn aati nc ct Gari nee AGT RRS ORR AE ee 313 Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages nie eea e a E EE EE EAA AE ESE A ES E 315 Table A 1 Bus Timing when Using the Emulator Bus Clock 40 0 MHZ cee ceeeeseeteeeeeeee 319 Table C 1 User System Interface Cable and User Interfaces 00 eee cee ceeecesecneeceetneeene 329 Table D 1 Emulator State and Operation of Internal Modules eee cece cese cnc cess eeeene 346 Table E 1 Pins Occupied Solely by the Emulator oe cece eeeceeeceeeensecesecsaecnaesaeeneeeas 353 Table E 2 Delay Time for Signal Connected via the Evaluation Chip Board eee 353 Table E 3 Initial Values of Registers in the MCU and the Emulator eee ener 355 Table E 4 Relat
190. ettings of the PC Interface Board Memory Area Setting The PC interface board uses a 16 kbyte memory area on the host computer The memory area to be used must be allocated to the memory area on the host computer with a switch on the PC interface board Any 16 kbytes in the range of H C0000 to H EFFFF can be allocated figure 3 11 Addresses to be allocated must not overlap the memory addresses of other boards An overlap will cause incorrect operation 40 H C0000 H C4000 H C8000 H CC000 H D0000 Setting at shipment H D4000 H D8000 H DC000 H E0000 H E4000 H E8000 H EC000 H EFFFF Figure 3 11 Allocatable Memory Area of PC Interface Board Switch Setting A rotary switch is installed on the PC interface board figure 3 12 The switch is used to set the memory area allocation Table 3 2 lists the switch setting states The switch setting at emulator shipment is No 4 memory area H D0000 to H D3FFF PC interface board Enlarged front view Rotary switch Figure 3 12 PC Interface Board Switch Table 3 2 Switch Settings for Memory Areas Switch Setting Memory Area Switch Setting Memory Area 0 H C0000 to H C3FFF H E0000 to H E3FFF 1 H C4000 to H C7FFF 9 H E4000 to H E7FFF 2 H C8000 toH CBFFF A H E8000 to H EBFFF 3 H CC000 to H CFFFF B H ECO000 to H EFFFF 4 setting at shipment H DOOOO to H DSFFF C Not used 5 H D4000 to H D7FFF D Not used 6 H D8000 to H DBFFF E Not
191. f short D i Ox00003fec unsigned long Ox00000012 D 103 Ox00003ffa short Figure 5 88 Stack Trace Window 234 Table 5 98 Stack Trace Window Options Option Description Kind Symbol type F Function P Function parameter L Local variable Name Symbol name Value Symbol value address and type Click the right hand mouse button with the cursor in the Stack Trace window The pop up menu will be displayed The menu includes the following options Table 5 99 Options in the Pop up Menu Option Description Copy Copies the highlighted text to the Windows clipboard so that the text can be pasted to other applications Go to Source Displays the source code in the program that corresponds to the selected function in the Source window View Setting Opens the Stack Trace Setting dialog box and sets the display format of the Stack Trace window The format of the Stack Trace Setting dialog box is displayed in figure 5 89 Stack Trace Setting Nest level 1 64 fo m Display symbol IV Parameter V Local Variable Diaplay Radix Hexadecimal Decimal C Octal Binary Cancel Figure 5 89 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box 235 Table 5 100 Stack Trace Setting Dialog Box Options Option Description Nest level Specifies the number of function call nestings for display in the Stack Trace window Max 64 Display sy
192. f the user sets a subroutine end address to an address near to an address next to a branch or delay slot instruction the emulator will not be able to measure the performance analysis correctly Therefore before setting the end address the user must check how the MCU operates after the cycle that the branch instruction are prefetched and make sure not to set the end address to address in the prefetch cycle that will not be executed due to a branch instruction The emulator can continuously measure performance analysis up to 14 minutes when specified as 52 us 26 seconds when specified as 1 6 us or 0 33 second when specified as 20 ns by setting the TIME option in the EXECUTION_MODE command When the user sets break or trace condition to Break Condition C or Trace Condition C no condition can be set to PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS that has the same number In other words when the user sets break or trace condition to Break Condition C1 or Trace Condition C1 no condition can be set to PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS1 To set a condition to PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS the user must cancel the settings of Break Condition C or Trace Condition C The emulator increments the pass count when it passes through a subroutine end address Therefore the emulator will display one more than the specified pass count the subroutine execution time and number of times the subroutine was executed The emulator cannot measure the step execution time 294 6 2 16 REFRESH RF Co
193. fer to appendix E of the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual provided on the CD R E 1 10 Line Assembly Regardless of the Radix setting the default for line assembly input is decimal Specify H or 0x as the radix for a hexadecimal input E 1 11 Profiler Function This product does not support the profiler function 349 E 1 12 Usage with Another Version of HDI e Automatic load of session files If automatic load of session files is active in an environment with another HDI installed the following error message is displayed when initiating this HDI and the program is not linked up invalid target system lt recently used debugging platform name gt In this case change the target session file from File New Session or the Load Session menu e Uninstallation of another version of HDI If another version of HDI is uninstalled after this HDI has been installed the Auto update Memory and stack trace functions will not be used In this case reinstall this HDI E 1 13 Operation During Accessing Files Do not perform other operations during saving in the Load Program Verify Memory Save Memory or Trace window because this will not allow correct saving to be performed E 1 14 Moving Source File Position after Creating Load Module When the source file is moved after creating the load module the Open dialog box may be displayed to specify the source file during the debugging of the created load
194. fied in the dialog boxes for break functions Breakpoints lel Es FlefLine Symb ype TUTORIAL ci48 _sort QO00306C Break Condition Al Enable address H 306c xand O00010D4 Break Condition B L Enable address H 10d4 TUTORIAL c 24 mam 00003000 Break Condition U1 Enable address H 3000 pc Figure 5 12 Breakpoints Window For details on the Breakpoints window refer to the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual on the CD R 124 Table 5 20 Break Functions Type Description Software break The contents of the specified address are replaced by a break instruction a dedicated instruction for use with the emulator and the program is then executed When the break instruction is executed a break occurs Break Point is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Software sequential break An order for the satisfaction of conditions can be specified for software breakpoints When all of the specified conditions have been satisfied in the specified order a break occurs Up to seven pass points in order of satisfaction and one reset point can be specified Break Sequence is displayed under Type in the Breakpoints window Hardware break This type of break is generated by the dedicated hardware in the emulator Conditions can be specified as Break Condition A B and C and when one of these conditions has been satisfied a break occurs Break Condition Xn X A B or C n number is display
195. for internal ROM valid mode 00000000 1M 000FFFFF 100100000 2M 001FFFFF 00200000 2M 003FFFFF 00400000 H 007FFFFF H 00800000 00BFFFFF 00C00000 4M H 0OFFFFFF Figure E 2 Memory Map in the Valid Internal ROM Mode Internal ROM Reserved H 00400000 1M H 004FFFFF H 00500000 1M H 005FFFFF H 00600000 1M H 006FFFFF H 00700000 1M H 007FFFF 00800000 1M H 008FFFFF H 00900000 1M H 009FFFFF H 00A00000 1M H OOAFFFFF H 00B00000 1M H 00BFFFFF H 00C00000 2M H O0DFFFF H 00E00000 2M H O0FFFFFF Reserved Internal RAM for expansion Reserved Internal I O slave I O Internal RAM 352 H 00200000 128K H 0021FFFF H 00220000 128K H 0023FFFF H 00240000 128K H 0025FFFF H 00260000 128K H 0027FFFF H 00280000 128K H 0029FFFF H 002A0000 128K H 002BFFFF H 002C0000 H 002E0000 128K H 002FFFFF H 00300000 128K H 0031FFFF H 00320000 128K H 0033FFFF H 00340000 128K H 00360000 128K H 0037FFFF H 0038000 128K 039FFFF 03A0000 128K 03BFFFF 0360000 128K 03D FFFFI 03E0000 128K H 003FFFFF SB Short block LB Large block E 3 User System Interface 1 The pins listed in table E 1 are occupied solely by the emulator and are not connected to the user system Table E 1 Pins Occupied Solely by the Emulator FP 80Q Pin No FP 100M Pin No Signal Name 74 97
196. fter referred to as the ESI The procedure is described below To install the system programs use Auto Install or Custom Install mode Auto Install mode automatically installs all system program Custom Install mode allows flexibility in the installation of the system programs First Auto Install is described Turn on the E8000S station Select SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software Tools System Install Tool from Start Programs jAccessories gt Startup gt PRA gt HBMS DOS Prompt Ey Windows Explorer G Documents 5 X E8000S Emulator Software gt LAN Adapter Configuration Pas Hitachi Debugging Interface K System Install Tool Help Edy setings A N Eind Q iw Bun Loa ot Figure 3 15 Start Menu System Install Tool When the ESI has started up the Select Driver dialog box will be displayed Select the driver for the connection of the host computer and the E8000S Emulator from Driver Table 3 4 shows the types of connections and drivers 48 Table 3 4 Types of Connection and Drivers Connection Contents of File When connecting the emulator to a PC interface Emulator ISA Driver board When connecting the emulator to a LAN adapter E8000 LAN Driver When connecting the emulator to a PCI Emulator PCI Card Driver interface board When connecting the emulator to a PC interface Emulator PC Card Driver card When Link up is displayed on the status bar the
197. g box is displayed Open Lookin Tutoisd A al c Debug fa initsct c a lowsre c sbrk c File name tutorial c Files of type c Files amp c inl 7 Cancel A Figure 4 8 Open Dialog Box 73 e Select Tutorial c and click the Open button The Source window is displayed If necessary select whatever font or size you like by selecting the Font option from the Customize submenu in the Setup menu Label Source 00003000 _main void main void long a l0 min max long j int i 00003002 for i O i10 itt o0000300a j rand 00003012 ifij lt of 00003016 J je o00030la ali j 000032036 sortia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 max a 9 Figure 4 9 Source Window Displaying the Source Program 74 4 5 Setting the Software Breakpoints A breakpoint is one of the debugging functions The Source window provides a very simple way of setting breakpoints For example to set a breakpoint at the line that contains the sort function call e Double click the BP column on the line containing the sort function call The will be displayed on the line containing the sort function to show that a software breakpoint is set at that address PA TUTORIAL c BE E Line Address Label Source 00002000 _main void main void long a l0 min max long J int i i 00003002 for i O i lt 10 itt o000300a j randi 00003012 if j lt Of 0000201
198. ge 160 Table 5 46 Address Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no address condition Address Select this button to set the address bus value specified in Start as the condition Only program Select this button so that the condition is satisfied as soon as the value fetched address specified in Start is on the address but before the instruction is fetched from the address Only program fetched address after Select this button so that the condition is only satisfied after an instruction fetch from the address specified in Start Range The condition to be satisfied is the address ranges specified in Start and End only available with Break Condition U1 and Break Condition U3 Start End Sets an address bus value as a numeric or symbolic value Non user mask Sets no mask condition User mask Sets mask conditions Mask Sets the mask bits if User mask is selected Masked bits on the data bus satisfy this break condition regardless of their values Note When Break Condition U2 or Break Condition U4 is selected it is not possible to set Range for Break Condition U1 or Break Condition U3 respectively In this case clear the condition settings in Break Condition U2 or Break Condition U4 161 b Data Page Use this page to specify the data bus conditions Address Data Bus State Count Data I Don t Care Value H Off
199. ghts Reserved This user s manual and emulator product are copyrighted and all rights are reserved by Hitachi No part of this user s manual all or part may be reproduced or duplicated in any form in hard copy or machine readable form by any means available without Hitachi s prior written consent Other Important Things to Keep in Mind 1 Circuitry and other examples described herein are meant merely to indicate the characteristics and performance of Hitachi s semiconductor products Hitachi assumes no responsibility for any intellectual property claims or other problems that may result from applications based on the examples described herein 2 No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patents or other rights of any third party or Hitachi Figures Some figures in this user s manual may show items different from your actual system Limited Anticipation of Danger Hitachi cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard The warnings in this user s manual and on the emulator product are therefore not all inclusive Therefore you must use the emulator product safely at your own risk IIl RENESAS SAFETY PAGE READ FIRST e READ this user s manual before using this emulator product e KEEP the user s manual handy for future reference Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism DEFINITION OF SIGNAL WORDS A This is the safet
200. gs selected in the Break point list box Clicking Edit opens the Break Point Sequence dialog box Reset Clears the software sequential breakpoint settings selected in the Break point list box Reset All Clears all software sequential breakpoints Click the Add button to open the Break Point dialog box Specify the breakpoint s address and the number of passes then click the OK button 127 Address Address Value H 2002c8 Count Number p 1 numbers Figure 5 15 Break Point Dialog Box Address Page The display returns to the Point page The Break point list box now displays the specified address and the number of passes Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Table 5 22 Break Point Dialog Box Options Option Description Value Sets the breakpoint s address as a numeric or symbolic value Count Number Sets a number of passes A break occurs when the breakpoint has been passed the specified number of times The default setting is H 1 Any value from H 1 to H FFFF can be set here When a software break is set the instruction at the specified address is replaced It is only possible to set a software break in the RAM area including the standard emulation memory However it is not possible to set a software breakpoint at an address that satisfies any of these conditions e The address holds H 0000 e The address is used as part of a software sequential
201. halt mode emulation continues and is not suspended Entering trace halt mode Trace halt mode can be entered in any of the following ways e Select Halt from the pop up menu of the Trace window e When emulation is in timeout trace stop mode trace halt mode is automatically entered when the condition set in Performance Analysis 1 is satisfied i e when the specified timeout period or number of passes has been exceeded e Trace halt mode is automatically entered when a condition that has been specified as a trace stop condition Trace Conditions A B C either as individual channels or as sequential breaks is satisfied TRACE STOP will be displayed in the status bar e Trace halt mode is automatically entered when a trace condition due to a trace buffer overflow is satisfied Returning from trace halt mode Any of the following actions will return the system to normal emulation e Enter the END command in the Command Line window e Select Restart from the Trace window s pop up menu Stopping the execution of the user program any of the followings actions will stop execution of the user program e Enter the HALT command in the Command Line window e Click the Stop button e Select Halt from the RUN menu 120 5 3 3 Display of Cause for Termination and Operating Status Cause for Termination when emulation is terminated the cause of termination is displayed as the Cause of last break on the
202. he emulator is to measure performance The counter for measurement has 24 bits How to Set the Conditions for Measuring the Performance To set the conditions for measuring the performance use the Performance Analysis dialog box that can be displayed by clicking Edit in the pop up menu in the Performance Analysis dialog box An example of the use of Performance Analysis 1 is described below Performance Analysis Ea PA Condition 1 mode time name main start H O end H 66 time 0 0 1 0 count D 1 2 mode time2 name sort start H 68 end H 128 3 mode time3 name change start H 68 to H 128 end H 12a to H 18a 4 By Performance3 5 Empty 6 Empty 7 Empty 8 Empty Edit Reset Reset All i ance Apply Help Figure 5 72 Performance Analysis Dialog Box 211 Table 5 76 Performance Analysis Dialog Box PA Page Option Condition Description Displays the execution time and the settings of the subroutines which execution count is measured Empty is displayed when nothing is set Performance Analysis 1 setting e Performance Analysis 2 setting Performance Analysis 3 setting Performance Analysis 4 setting Performance Analysis 6 setting 2 3 4 5 Performance Analysis 5 setting 6 7 Performance Analysis 7 setting 8 Performance Analysis 8 setting Edit Modifies the Performance Analysis settings that are set in the Condition list box Clicking this b
203. his button places that condition next to Reset in the Sequence list No Numerical values indicate the sequential point number Reset indicates the reset point Sequence Displays a list of sequential conditions that have been specified Delete Deletes the condition selected in the Sequence list The status of hardware break condition satisfaction before the actual hardware break occurs will be displayed on the status bar during program execution in the following format Condition Aor B Seq lt Number of passes specified number gt When no condition has been specified the status of hardware break conditions is displayed from Condition B to Condition A rather than in the format shown above Figure 5 36 shows an example of the display A hardware sequential break condition has been specified with Nos 1 to 3 of Break Condition A and No 1 has been satisfied A hardware sequential break condition has also been specified with Nos 1 to 5 of Break Condition B and Nos 1 to 3 have been satisfied Condition B Seq 3 5 Condition A Seq 1 3 AB 00001028 Figure 5 36 Example Display of the Status of a Hardware Sequential Break Condition 156 5 5 5 Internal Break Break Condition U Overview These break functions use the MCU s on chip break function The internal break conditions are shown in table 5 42 A given Break Condition U is satisfied when all of its specified conditions are satisfied an AND condition Table 5 42
204. ialog Box Page Description Trace Condition A1 General Selects the trace acquisition mode to A6 and A8 Address Sets address bus conditions Trace Condition B1 to B6 and B8 Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets access type and read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Trace Condition A7 General Selects the trace acquisition mode Trace Condition B7 Address Sets address bus conditions Data Sets data bus conditions Bus State Sets access type and read write cycle conditions Probe Sets external probe signal conditions Interrupt Sets external interrupt signal conditions Count Sets satisfaction count conditions Delay Sets delay conditions Trace Condition C1 General Selects the trace acquisition mode to C8 Address Sets address bus conditions Bus State Sets access type conditions Specify the required conditions on the corresponding pages then click the OK button The Trace condition A7 dialog box closes and the display returns to the Condition A page The specified trace stop conditions will now be displayed as condition 7 in the Condition list box Click the Close button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace stop conditions for the other channels are specif
205. id position of the data bus value high upper word low lower word byte3 upper byte of the upper word byte2 lower byte of the upper word byte1 upper byte of the lower word byte0 lower byte of the lower word When byte is set for lt datawidth gt byte3 byte2 byte1 or byte0 is valid When word is set for lt datawidth gt high or low is valid When long is set lt position gt cannot be selected Mask specification is as follows To specify an 8 bit data trace condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt byte lt position gt not To specify a 16 bit data trace condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt word lt position gt not To specify a 32 bit data trace condition mask specification data mask lt maskdata gt long not lt maskdata gt Specifies the mask data To trace the user program at values smaller than the data size specify the mask data Add not to the specification to trace the data other than the specified one lt accessopt gt Specifies bus status condition To break the user program with the data access cycle access dat To break the user program with the DMA DTC cycle access dma 300 Parameter Description lt r wopt gt Specifies a read or write condition Valid when lt type gt is a or b To trace the user program during the read cycle direction read To trace the user program during the write cycle direction write lt prbopt gt Spe
206. ied 134 Table 5 25 Hardware Break Conditions Break Condition Description Address bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Access type The condition is satisfied when the access type matches the specification Read Write The condition is satisfied by reading or writing as specified External probe The condition is satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match a specification External interrupt The condition is satisfied when the external interrupt signal levels match a specification Satisfaction count The break occurs when the above conditions are satisfied the specified number of times Delay The break occurs the specified number of bus cycles after the above conditions have been satisfied Figure 5 20 shows an example of the operation of a hardware break when an address bus condition and satisfaction count condition have been specified User program Break condition The address H 2000 is accessed for H 50 times Break dition i Break occurs after the address EAN oon H 2000 is accessed for H 50 times satisfied Program flow Branch instructions etc Figure 5 20 Example of a Hardware Break with a Satisfaction Count Condition Specified Figure 5 21 shows an example of the operation of a hardware break when an address bus condit
207. ied in the same way The options on each page are the same as those of the corresponding Break Condition A1 to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes except the General page For details of the options on each page refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break When the trace conditions are satisfied during emulation TRACE STOP will appear in a dedicated message box or on the status bar and the emulator will enter the trace halt mode To leave trace halt mode and reactivate the emulation select Halt from the pop up menu in the Trace window or execute the END command in the Command Line window To leave the trace halt mode and end emulation execute the HALT command in the Command Line window 176 Notes 1 Trace Condition Al to A8 share hardware with Break Condition Al to A8 Therefore when any channel of Break Condition A1 to A8 has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Trace Condition Al to A8 2 Trace Condition B1 to B8 share hardware with Break Condition B1 to B8 Therefore when any channel of Break Condition B1 to B8 has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Trace Condition B1 to B8 3 Trace Condition C1 to C8 share hardware with Break Condition C1 to C8 and Performance Analysis 1 to 8 Therefore when any channel of Break Condition C1 to C8 or Performance Analysis to 8 has been specified it is not possible to set or modify Trace Condition C1 to C8 177 c Displaying a History of Trace Sto
208. igure 5 82 Figure 5 83 Figure 5 84 Figure 5 85 Figure 5 86 Trace Acquisition in Trace Stop Mode 0000 cece eeeeeeeeeceeeceeecesecesecsecsaecnaeesaeenes 172 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Condition A Page eeeesceeceesseceeeeeneeeees 174 Trace Condition A7 Dialog Box General Page cee eeseceeneeeseeceeneeenseeeeees 175 Configuration Dialog Box Sequential Trace Stop eee ee eeeceeecesecsse esse eneeene 179 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page ee eeseeeeeesseceeeeenseeeees 180 Example of Range Trace Mode eee ceeceecceeceseceeceseceeceecaeesaeseaeseeeeseeeseeneensees 181 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page eee eesceeneecnseceeneeenseeeeees 182 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page cee eeesceeneeceteceeneeenseeeenes 184 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page 0 cee eesceeneeceseceeneeenseeeenes 186 Configuration Dialog Box General Page 00 0 eee eeeeceeneeceseceeececeeceeneecseeeesnees 187 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page cc eesceseecsseceereeeneeeees 188 Tracing External Probe Signal eee cee cseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseessecsaecaecaeesaeeaee 190 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page ee ceeeeessecesnceesseceeeeecaeceeeeeenaeeeeees 191 KEEA nS oI E E Ae teti coeds A tatees sone cit thee deed sects ee ees 191 Trace Filter Dialog Box General Page eeceeeessseceseecseceee
209. ill appear Select the Condition A page Click condition 1 to select it from the Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Trace Condition A1 dialog box General Mode Range Trace Stop f Subroutine Range in subroutine Subroutine Address Figure 5 54 Trace Condition A1 Dialog Box General Page Select Subroutine subroutine trace mode on the General page Click the OK button to return to the Condition A page The Sequential Condition list displays the sequential trace stop conditions that have been specified Specify the subroutine address range in the Subroutine Address group box If is selected as the address range the Input Function Range dialog box will be displayed When the name of a subroutine is specified in the Input Function Range dialog box the start and end addresses of the subroutine will automatically be displayed Click the OK button Close the Trace Condition A1 dialog box to return to the Condition A page The Condition list displays the conditions for trace acquisition that have been specified Click the Close button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box Subroutine trace conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way 184 Subroutine Range Tracing Mode Overview Trace information is acquired when instructions and operands within the range between the start and end addresses of a sub
210. ime measurement mode 3 Access area count measurement mode Subroutine call count measurement mode Name Pat Figure 5 73 Performance 1 Dialog Box General Page 213 Table 5 78 Options on the General page Option Description Subroutine time measurement mode 1 Selects subroutine measurement mode 1 Subroutine time measurement mode 2 Selects subroutine measurement mode 2 Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Selects subroutine measurement mode 3 Access area count measurement mode Selects access area count measurement mode Subroutine call count measurement Selects subroutine call count measurement mode mode Name Sets a name for the address range to be measured e Address Page Set conditions for the address range on this page The format varies according to the subroutine measurement mode selected on the General page The format of the Address page is shown below When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 is selected Set the start and end addresses General Address Time Out Count r Subroutine Address Start Ho Ea D P_MAP Figure 5 74 Performance 1 Dialog Box Address Page 214 Table 5 79 Options on the Address page When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 is Selected Option Description Start Sets a start address as a numerical or symbolic value End Sets an end address as a numerical or symbolic value
211. in any area other than CS area except the internal ROM RAM area e The address holds an instruction which may satisfy Break Condition U4 e The address of the delay slot for a delayed branch instruction Notes 1 When the number of passes or reset point is specified emulator firmware stops the program every time the program passes the address set as a break condition so that it can update its count of passes As a result the program does not operate in realtime it will stop about 100 ms When the program passes such an address the emulator executes the instruction at the address as a single step then returns to normal program execution Break Condition U4 becomes invalid during this single step execution 2 When a software breakpoint is set in the delay slot of a delayed branch instruction the value in the PC will become illegal Do not set a software breakpoint at the slot instruction after a delayed branch instruction 3 Do not allow the user program to modify values in memory at software sequential breakpoints 4 When execution starts from the first pass point counting of numbers of passes starts the next time a breakpoint is passed 5 5 3 Hardware Break Overview Hardware break functions are implemented by dedicated hardware in the E8000S station The hardware break conditions shown in table 5 25 can be specified for Break Condition A B or C Hardware break occurs when all of the specified conditions an AND condition are satisf
212. ine start address and end address for l1 12 Timeout value and count setting value only when the respective conditions are set in l1 or 12 Start address range and end address range for 13 Access area address range Call subroutine address range only for SC TOTAL RUN TIME Total period of execution H hours M minutes S seconds US microseconds NS nanoseconds Count Select Count to produce the information on the run times and number of passes in the user program in numerical form shown in figure 5 82 Performance Analysis Count Used 1 2 3 5 Display type Execution time and execution count in numerical values NO NAME MODE RATE RUN TIME 1 sort I1 D 6 4 D OOOOH 00M 00S 004452US 400NS 00001 change 12 D 2 1 D OOOOH 00M 00S 001482US 860NS D00001 MAX D OOOOH 00M 00S 001482US 860NS MIN D 0000H 00M 00S 001482US 860NS AVE D OOOOH 00M 00S 001482US 860NS array_a AC D 6 4 D O000H 00M 00S 004452US 340NS lt ACCESS gt D 00107 rand SC D 1 4 D O000H 00M 00S 001000US 500NS lt CALL SUB gt D 00010 TOTAL RUN TIME D OOQQH 00M 00S 068873US 240NS Figure 5 82 Performance Analysis Window Run Time and Execution Count 222 Table 5 87 Display Format of Results When Count is Selected Item Contents NO Channel number NAME Subroutine name MODE Subroutine measurement mode 11 Subroutine time measurement mode 1 12 Subroutine time measurement mode
213. ing Emulation Emulation Halted Execution or Step Internal Module Break Execution WDT watchdog timer No Yes MTU multifunction timer pulse unit Yes Yes MMT motor management unit Yes Yes CMT compare match timer Yes Yes SCI serial communication interface Yes Yes DTC data transfer controller Yes Yes HCAN2 Hitachi controller area network 2 Yes Yes UBC user break controller No Yes AUD advanced user debugger Yes Yes I O port Yes Yes A D converter Yes Yes H UDI Hitachi user debugging interface Not available Not available Notes 1 If a break occurs during a DTC cycle vector read read write of transferred information or data read write the DTC continues operation until the DTC cycle is complete The DTC resumes operation after it returns to emulation 2 The user cannot use the H UDI 346 Appendix E Notes on Debugging E 1 Notes on HDI E 1 1 Memory Test Function This product does not support the memory test function which is used by selecting Test from the Memory menu E 1 2 Source level Execution e Step Even standard C libraries are executed To return to a higher level function use the step out function In a for statement or a while statement executing a single step does not move execution to the next line To move to the next line execute two steps E 1 3 Watch e Local variables at optimization Depending on the generated object code local variables in a C source file tha
214. ing emulation memory area is displayed Here the emulation memory can be allocated in 1 Mbyte units Large Block 0 11 xxxxKB The remaining emulation memory area is displayed Here the emulation memory can be allocated in 128 kbyte units Short Block 0 7 yyyyKB Short Block 8 15 zzzzKB Click the Close button to close the dialog box Click Add button to open the Add Memory Mapping dialog box to allocate emulation memory To modify the allocation of emulation memory select the memory contents for modification from From To Mapping then click the Edit button The Edit Memory Mapping dialog box will be displayed Edit Memory Mapping Memory Mapping H 003FFFFF Setting EMULATION AREA 7 Cancel Help Figure 5 87 Edit Memory Mapping Dialog Box Table 5 96 Configuration Items of the Edit Add Memory Mapping Dialog Box Option Description From Sets the start address of an emulation memory block To Sets the end address of an emulation memory block Setting Selects the memory type When the OK button is clicked the conditions are set and the dialog box is closed When the Cancel button is clicked the dialog box is closed and the conditions are not set The following shows the memory types that can be set in the Setting combo box 233 Table 5 97 Settings for Memory Type Available in the Setting Combo Box Memory Type USER AREA Read Only Description Sets the ad
215. ing of instruction at lt start address range gt and stops measuring at lt end address range gt The emulator increments the number of passes lt countopt gt whenever it passes through lt start address range gt and fetches the instruction from lt end address range gt Specification mode time3 The user can use channels 1 3 5 and 7 in time measurement mode 3 Area access count mode The emulator counts the number of times the subroutine between lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt has accessed the area specified by lt accessopt gt The subroutine execution time is measured by using subroutine time measurement mode 1 Specification mode access The user can use channels 1 3 5 and 7 in area access count mode 288 Parameter lt modeopt gt cont Description e Subroutine call count measurement mode The emulator measures counts that the subroutine specified by lt startopt gt and lt endopt gt has called the subroutine specified by lt subroutineopt gt The subroutine execution time is measured by using subroutine time measurement mode 1 Specification mode subroutine The user can use channels 1 3 5 and 7 in subroutine call count measurement mode lt nameopt gt Specifies the subroutine to measure the performance Specification name lt subroutine name gt lt startopt gt Specifies the subroutine start address in time measurement modes 1 and 2 area access count mode and subroutine call count m
216. ing sleep mode or standby mode the system leaves that mode and execution resumes from the instruction following the SLEEP instruction E 8 3 Parallel Access The display of memory cannot be updated or modified by parallel access during standby mode 357 E 9 CPU Operating Mode 1 Number of pins on the supported MCU and the MCU s operating mode When the emulator starts up it determines the number of pins on the supported MCU and the MCU s operating mode according to the following procedure 358 Is the user system connected Are the number of pins and MCU operating mode to be 2 read from the user system Read the number of pins and MCU operating mode from the connected user system s the combination of th number of pins and MCU operating mode correct 3 Determination 1 Determination 2 Determination 3 Notes 1 Ifthe user system is not connected to the user system interface cable the emulator will detect a low voltage on Vcc Vcc Down from the user system and be linked down Seton the MD Pin Device page of the CPU Operating Mode dialog box Only the single chip mode is available with the SH7046 80 pins Expanded MCU mode is not available with the SH7047 100 pins Figure E 3 Procedure of Determination 359 Determination 1 Uses the number of pins and MCU operating mode read from the connected user system Determination 2 Uses the number of pins read from the connected user system MC
217. initiation of the ESI has been completed Select the Auto Install radio button in the Select Install dialog box The Browse for Folder dialog box will be displayed so select the directory where the system program is stored The default directory will be a directory under SYSTEM in the HDI installation directory Browse for Folder 24 x Select Directory My Computer H E 3 Floppy 4 Win38us C 9 Hew EM Hdd E8000s EMD 70x System H Tutorial E hopej3 HA My Documents Program Files Sea Recucled zi Cancel Figure 3 16 Browse for Folder Dialog Box When OK is clicked the E8000 Load Files dialog box will be displayed Check the file names for installation 49 Figure 3 17 E8000 Load Files Dialog Box SH7046 Click the OK button Installation of the system programs to the flash memory of the E8000S station will commence The file name will be displayed in the status bar as each file is installed Click Cancel to return to the Select Install dialog box When the registration is complete the System Install Completed dialog box will be displayed 50 System Install Completed Figure 3 18 System Install Completed Dialog Box SH7046 Click the OK button The installation of the system program to the flash memory of the E8000S station will be completed and
218. instruction is executed address lt address gt pcafter To specify the address range address lt address gt to lt address gt lt address gt Address numeric When masking the address value is specified the access condition for the address bus can be specified address mask lt maskdata gt address mask lt maskdata gt pc address mask lt maskdata gt pcafter lt maskdata gt Specifies the mask data lt dataopt gt Specifies a data condition To break on a specified 8 bit value data lt data gt byte To break on a specified 16 bit value data lt data gt word To break on a specified 32 bit value data lt data gt long lt data gt Address value numeric Specifies a mask value To break on a specified 8 bit value mask data mask lt maskdata gt byte To break on a specified 16 bit value mask data mask lt maskdata gt word To break on a specified 32 bit value mask data mask lt maskdata gt long lt maskdata gt Specifies the mask data To generate a break on data of size smaller than a byte specify a mask Instruction fetch cycles are not a target of break specifications lt r wopt gt Specifies a read write condition direction read Searches for a read cycle direction write Searches for a write cycle 260 Parameter Description lt accessopt gt Specifies a bus status condition To break the user program with the execution cycle access dat To break the user program wi
219. int Enable or Disable This command enables or disables break conditions Break Condition A B C sequential points and reset points Break Condition A B that have been set When the user does not specify the channel number the emulator enables or disables all of the specified break conditions When the user specifies a hardware sequential break the user cannot specify a channel number Examples 1 To set the following conditions for channel 2 of Break Condition A Address condition An address bus value from H 10027C to H 100304 Read write cycle condition Write cycle only BCS A CHANNEL 2 ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE 256 2 To set the following conditions for channel 4 of Break Condition B Data condition Data bus value of H 4750 Read write cycle condition Read cycle only BCS B CHANNEL 4 DATA MASK H 4750 DIRECTION READ 3 To set the following conditions for channel 5 of Break Condition A Address condition An address bus value other than H 10027C External probe condition PROBE4 low PROBE3 high PROBE2 low PROBEI high BCS A CHANNEL 5 ADDRESS H 10027C NOT PRB 0101 4 To set the following conditions for channel 7 of Break Condition B NMI signal condition NMI low BCS B CHANNEL 7 NMI LOW 5 To set the following conditions for channel of Break Condition B Address condition Mask specification at address bus value H 1000 BCS B CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS MASK H 1000 6 T
220. ints the emulator stops the execution of the user program Do not set software breakpoints to the following addresses An address whose memory content is H 0000 The address where BREAKSEQUENCE_SET was set Areas other than CS except for the internal ROM RAM area Instructions that satisfy Break Condition U4 Slot instruction of the delay branch instruction 265 Cancellation This command clears software breakpoints that have been set When lt address gt is omitted all of the set breakpoints will be cleared Display This command displays software breakpoints that have been set The following shows the display format gt BD H 00001000 D 1 D 1 Enable H 00002000 D 1 D O Disable H 00003000 D 1 D 0 Enable a a Breakpoint address b Number of times specified c Pass count cannot be displayed during user program execution d Enable Disable Enable or Disable This command enables or disables software breakpoints that have been set When the user does not specify parameter lt address gt all of the specified software breakpoints are enabled or disabled Examples 1 To set a software breakpoint at address H 00001000 BP H 00001000 To disable a software breakpoint set at address H 00001000 BE H 00001000 DISABLE To enable a software breakpoint set at address H 00001000 BE H 00001000 ENABLE To enable all software breakpoints that have been set BE ENABLE To clear a softwa
221. ion Range dialog box in which the start address of the called subroutine s address range is input as a numerical or symbolic value When the setting is made in this dialog box the start and end addresses of the end address range are automatically displayed e Time Out page Use this page to set the timeout value This dialog box is only displayed to allow setting of the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 218 General Address Time Out Count m Time Out T Don t Care po Eh fo M S us Figure 5 78 Performance 1 Dialog Box Time Out Page Table 5 83 Options of the Time Out Page Option Description Don t Care Selects no timeout value Input area Sets a timeout value as a numerical value When this is omitted the setting is 0 M minutes in the range from 0 to 59 S seconds in the range from 0 to 59 US microseconds in the range from 0 to 999999 Note The maximum measurement time is approximately 14 minutes If the value set is greater than 14 minutes it will be ignored When a time out occurs while the display of the Performance Analysis window is being updated the message RUN TIME OVERFLOW will be displayed e Count page Set the value for the maximum number of passes This dialog box is only displayed to allow setting of the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 219 General Address Time Out Count I Don t Care Count o Figure 5 79 Performa
222. ion and delay condition have been specified 135 Break condition H 50 bus cycles are executed after Program the address H 2000 flow is accessed User program Break condition is satisfied No break occurs H 50 bus cycles i Break occurs H 50 bus y a cycles after the satisfaction a all of the condition Figure 5 21 Example of a Hardware Break with Delay Condition Specified Break Conditions A B and C Eight channels for each condition 24 channels in total can be specified The conditions that can be specified as Break Conditions A B and C are shown in table 5 26 Table 5 26 Specifiable Hardware Break Conditions Break Condition A Break Condition B Break Condition C Break Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O X Access type O O O Read Write O O X External probe O O X External interrupt O O X Satisfaction count O O X Delay O O X Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified The delay condition is only available for Break Conditions A7 and B7 Setting a Hardware Break The setting of Break Condition A7 is taken as an example Place the cursor in the Breakpoints window then click the right hand mouse button to display the window s pop up menu Select Add from the menu and the Break dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page 136 ConditionB CondiionC Condition Point Sequence Condition 4 Condition 2 direction read
223. ion file cannot be loaded To load a session file correctly the value of the MCU because the value of the MCU operating mode when a session file was saved and the value operating mode when a session file of the current MCU operating mode must be matched was saved and the value of the current MCU operating mode are different 317 7 3 Error Messages for the LAN Driver When the LAN adapter HS6000ELNO1H is used error messages of the following type may be output due to a network problem WSXXXXXXXx lt error message gt WSXXXXXXXX Error code xxxxxxxx is an alphanumeric string lt error message gt Error message that corresponds to the error code If such an error message is output consult your system manager 318 Appendix A User System Interface A l User System Interface Circuit The circuits that interface the MCU in the emulator to the user system include buffers and resistors When connecting the emulator to a user system adjust the user system hardware compensating for FANIN FANOUT and propagation delays The AC timing values when using the emulator are shown in table A 1 Note The values with the emulator connected in table A 1 are measurements for reference and are not guaranteed values Table A 1 Bus Timing when Using the Emulator Bus Clock 40 0 MHz MCU Specifications ns Values with Emulator Connected ns Item Min Max Min Max tRDS 15 30 tACC tcyc x n 2 39 tcyc x n 2
224. ion for Emulator ISA Driver Figure 3 28 Error Message on Emulator Connection Failure The causes of such failures are given below e The AC power cable is not connected to the emulator or the E8000S station power is not turned on e The PC interface board and the E8000S station are not correctly connected via the PC interface cable 56 3 7 2 Error Messages from the Emulator The emulator checks its internal RAM and registers from initiation of the HDI until Link up is displayed in the status bar This is a diagnostic function The emulator executes the diagnostic program when its power is turned on or when its system program is initiated After the emulator displays any of the error messages described below the emulator will display the Target Link Down dialog box and terminate the HDI session Errors when checking internal RAM and registers at power on The emulator checks its internal RAM and registers at power on If an error occurs either of the following error messages is displayed during HDI operation Error Message Description RAM ERROR ADDR xxxxxxxx The emulator checks its internal RAM and W DATA XxxXxxxxxx R DATA XxxxXxXxxx registers at power on If an error occurs the address write data and read data are displayed in the following form Xxxx REGISTER ERROR The emulator checks the registers of the W DATA xx R DATA xx E8000S station and displays the message xxxx Name of the emulator inte
225. ion to evaluation chip Pa board interface connectors 3 Side view of the HS7046EBK81H board Figure 2 5 Evaluation Chip Board HS7046EBK81H a Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN1 b Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN2 c Station to evaluation chip board interface connector CN3 d Crystal oscillator terminals e User system or interface cable connector f HS7046PWB20H g HS7046PWB30H h Power supply connector J1 For trace cable 1 that connects the E8000S station to the evaluation chip board For trace cable 2 that connects the E8000S station to the evaluation chip board For trace cable 3 that connects the E8000S station to the evaluation chip board For installing a crystal oscillator to be used as an external clock source for the MCU For connecting the user system interface cable Dedicated connector to the user system interface cable is attached This is a dedicated board to the evaluation chip For connecting the device control board to the evaluation chip board Note a to h listed above are referred to as HS7046EBK81H 15 2 1 4 Configuration of User System Interface Cable The names of the components of the user system interface cable are given below Figure 2 6 Configuration of User System Interface Cable a Connector for the user system For connection to the user system 2 2 Configuration of the Provid
226. ions between the Type of Step Function and Available Break Conditions 356 Table E 5 Suspension of Program Execution Reference Values cece cee sseereeeeeeeeeeeeeees 357 Table E 6 Measurement Environment cece cee cscecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesecsecsaecsaecsaessaeeaeeens 357 xvii Section Overview 1 Overview This system is an efficient software and hardware development support tool for application systems using the HD64F7046 and HD64F7047 hereafter referred to as SH7046 microcomputer developed by Hitachi Ltd As peripheral functions for use with its high speed CPU the SH7046 incorporates an interrupt controller user break controller bus state controller internal DMAC direct memory access controller data transfer controller multi function timer pulse unit motor management timer watchdog timer comparison match timer serial communications interface SCI Hitachi controller area network A D converter I O ports memory etc The emulator operates in place of the SH7046 and performs realtime emulation of the user system The emulator also provides functions for efficient hardware and software debugging The emulator package consists of the E8000S station a device control board for the SH7046 an evaluation chip board and a user system interface cable The emulator is connected to the user system via the user system interface cable By installing a PC interface board available for ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus
227. it Memory Mapping dialog box Add Allows the allocation of new memory by displaying the Add Memory Mapping dialog box Reset Clears the memory allocation information selected under From To Mapping Reset All Clears all memory allocation information under From To Mapping Since the Emulator operating modes set different emulation memory areas the Target Device Configuration list box will display different memory areas according to the operating mode Table 5 95 Items Displayed in the System Memory resources List Box Display Description Short Block 0 15 address range Emulation memory can be allocated in 128 kbyte units 128Kbytes By 1 Block Unit in the displayed address range Large Block 0 11 address range Emulation memory can be allocated in 1 Mbyte units in 1Mbytes By 1 Block Unit the displayed address range ROM AREA address range Internal ROM area RAM AREA address range Internal RAM area INTERNAL I O address range Internal I O area Notes 1 Emulation memory cannot be allocated in single chip mode 2 Refer to appendix E 2 Emulation Memory for details on memory mapping The System Memory resources list box displays the remaining emulation memory in the following format xxxx yyyy and zzzz are displayed in hexadecimal When no memory is allocated as Short Block the information below will not be displayed REMAINING EMULATION MEMORY 232 The remain
228. it specification gt A bit is specified as follows To specify bits IRQO to IRQ7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit location x x xX X X xX X xX Value to be specified Specify 0 low level or 1 high level for x 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IRQ number is specified the condition can be specified not to include the IRQ condition for bit location lt nmiopt gt Specifies an NMI signal condition To search through the trace information when the NMI signal is high nmi hi To search through the trace information when the NMI signal is low nmi low lt resetopt gt Specifies a RES signal condition To search through the trace information when the RES signal is low res low 311 Parameter lt resetmopt gt Description Specifies a MRES signal condition To search through the trace information when the MRES signal is low mres low lt breqopt gt Specifies a BREQ signal condition To search through the trace information when the BREQ signal is low breq low lt timeopt gt Description Searches through the trace information for the specified period of time To check the trace information at a specific time time lt time1 gt To search through the trace information for a specified range of time time lt time1 gt to lt time2 gt Specify the start of the period as lt time1 gt and the end of the period as lt time2 gt Specify the search time as follows hhh mm ss uuuuuu hhh Ho
229. itions Nos 2 to 7 can be added in sequence The order in which the conditions must be satisfied to generate a break is the order in which they were added in the Sequence list box Click the WR button to add a reset point The reset point condition will be displayed to the right of Reset in the Sequence list box Click the OK button to return to the Condition A page and the hardware sequential break conditions will have been set The Sequential Condition list displays the hardware sequential break conditions that have been specified Click the OK button to close the Break dialog box Condition History Entry List Condition address H 1000 address H 2000 address H 3000 address H 4000 Ej Sequence No Condition address H 1000 address H 2000 ade 00 address H 4000 2 Cancel Help Figure 5 34 Condition Dialog Box History Page 153 Table 5 40 History Page Options Option Description Condition Up to 32 conditions can be displayed in a list as a history of the conditions that have been set as Break Condition A or B Entry Makes the condition selected in the Condition list available for use again as a channel of Break Condition A or B Clicking the Entry button moves any condition selected in the Condition list box to the Entry List page and deletes it from the Condition list on the History page v Selecting a condition from the Condition list then clic
230. king this button adds that condition to the Sequence list as one of Nos 1 to 7 VR Selecting a condition from the Condition list and clicking this button adds that condition as the reset condition in the Sequence list No Numerical values indicate the sequential point number Reset indicates the reset point Sequence Displays the sequential conditions that have been specified as a list Delete Deletes any condition selected in the Sequence list b Specifying hardware sequential break conditions on the Entry List page A hardware break condition can be created on the Entry List page in the Condition dialog box then added as a sequential break condition The Condition list displays the hardware break conditions that have been created Click to select a condition then click the V button the condition will be added to the Sequence list box as No 1 In the same way hardware break conditions 2 to 7 can be added in sequence The order in which the conditions must be satisfied to generate a break is the order in which they were added in the Sequence list box Click the WR button to add a reset point The reset point condition will be displayed to the right of Reset in the Sequence list box Click the OK button to return to the Condition A page and the hardware sequential break conditions will have been set The Sequential Condition list displays the hardware sequential break conditions that have been sp
231. l_number gt is 7 To specify the number of bus cycles to be executed delay lt value gt Any value from 1 to H 7FFF can be specified as lt value gt 255 Description Setting This command specifies hardware break conditions Break Condition A B C The emulator stops program execution when the specified conditions are satisfied For details on conditions refer to the description of lt option gt in the BCS command When the user specifies a hardware sequential break sequential points and reset points can be set Cancellation This command clears hardware break conditions Break Condition A B C sequential points and reset points Break Condition A B When the user does not specify a channel number all of the specified hardware break conditions are cleared If the user specifies a hardware sequential break the user cannot specify a channel number Display This command displays break conditions Break Condition A B C that have been set When the user does not specify a channel number the emulator displays all of the specified hardware break conditions Break Condition Xn lt Enable Disable gt lt Contents specified gt X A B C n Number from 1 to 8 The following will be shown when a hardware sequential break is specified Break Condition X Sequential lt Enable Disable gt n lt Contents specified gt X A B n Sequential number start from 1 and condition is satisfied at maximum of 7 R indicates a reset po
232. lt of performance analysis when the timeout or excessive number specification is satisfied in Performance Analysis 1 mode DOUBLE DEFINITION Software break or software sequential break is specified for the same address INVALID ADDRESS An illegal address was specified 314 7 2 HDI Error Messages Related to the Emulator Error messages that occur in HDI processing are also displayed in error message dialog boxes Tables 7 2 lists these error messages descriptions of the errors and solutions to the errors Table 7 2 HDI Error Messages Error Message Addresses are few Description and Solution Too few points have been specified for a software sequential break Specify at least two addresses Can not set the minimum time Since the performance information has already been acquired the minimum time interval is impossible to change Change the performance information after reinitialization Command not ready The function that was entered for execution is not available now Internal I O Area Loading of program to the I O area was attempted Invalid address The specified address is invalid Invalid mask value The specified mask value is invalid Invalid value Invalid command syntax Invalid value or symbol xx The specified value or symbol is invalid No condition data No condition has been specified Specify one or more valid conditions Program counter is odd Sin
233. m eee eeseceseesecesecesececesecaecaecaecsaecsecsaecsaecsaeeasenaeenaes 47 3 6 Initiating the HDI and Checking the Emulator eee cece cee ceseceeceseceecaeensesnaeenee 52 3 7 Troubleshooting eoe eenean oa ies a E cote eset sents a cence 55 3 7 1 Error Messages from the HDI etiese irese reiros 55 3 7 2 Error Messages from the Emulator 2 0 0 0 cece eeeecceeeceeecesecesecaecenecseecaeseaeeeeeees 57 3 7 3 Troubleshooting Procedure ss0ssccsscesegeessesoessisesscossceseevssessnsntenacesbesenessosavesoys 60 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program 0 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 62 3 87 Uninstallation c 25 cscascesesesipegcaeassectavk sous e Ene EEE EEE EE ETETE 64 3 8 1 Uninstalling SoftWw te seeieinssicnrsissisesi eerie sereen n oee E EK r eesse 64 3 8 2 Uninstalling the Acrobat Reader c cccssssssssssssessessseesesssessecsssssessssneesecsseesecsnees 64 SECU Tutoralsserene ss taidaedgpnldaa vn Gish ved saad did a eh Wad Dud ai 65 41 Introd cton ien tise enbes teh a eE E celbevingsn diate Lidetoed E EEA EEEE EEE EER 65 AD Running the HDD ses csssesscch os sisssssogsessceesse sees tek euhs ta vce essceseee ates beh E Eae ea a EESE Sro EEE pE RSET eat Es 66 4 3 Setting the Memory Map ssrsresssserererereessrsrerersrereeserersrerernensrerersreeesrerererereerensrerersenerees 69 4 4 Downloading seie rire E ck ots seee setae wa sea sv EAE SATS oa sae bee ON AA eee E a ees 72 4 4 1 Downloading th
234. m number of executions then execute the user program When the specified time or number is exceeded a break occurs For details on the Performance 1 dialog box Time Out page and Count page refer to section 5 8 Setting Performance Conditions Note Software break conditions and software sequential break conditions are ignored 169 5 6 Realtime Trace Functions The emulator allows realtime trace acquisition of up to 131 070 cycles of the SH7046 bus information This has no effect on the user system during emulation A total of up to 65 536 lines of information can be displayed in the HDI s Trace window For details on the Trace window refer to the manual for the Hitachi Debugging Interface User s Manual on the CD R 5 6 1 External Bus Trace Function Trace Conditions A B and C are available Specify a trace acquisition condition on the Condition A B C page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box which will be displayed by clicking the Acquisition in the pop up menu of the Trace window The trace acquisition modes for external trace are shown in table 5 53 170 Table 5 53 Trace Acquisition Modes Acquisition Mode Description Free trace Trace acquisition is continuous from the start of user program execution until any of the break conditions is satisfied Trace stop Trace acquisition stops when a specified condition is satisfied In this mode realtime emulation will not stop but trace acq
235. mbol Specifies symbols other than functions for display Specifies whether parameters and local variables will be displayed Display Radix Specifies the radix for the display in the Stack Trace window To refer to the online help system press the F1 key after moving the cursor to the Stack Trace window 5 13 Displaying and Updating the Contents of Memory 5 13 1 Displaying and Updating the Contents of Memory during Execution The Emulator accesses memory in three ways to display and update the contents of memory during user program execution Table 5 101 Access Types for Displaying and Modifying Contents of Memory Access Type Description Stop Time Display Modification Short break Temporarily suspends the Large Enabled Enabled execution of the user program Parallel access Temporarily halts the Small Enabled Enabled execution of the user program Auto update Memory Automatically updates the None Enabled Disabled display of the contents of memory without stopping the execution of the user program Note For details on stopped periods and other notes refer to appendix E 8 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory The respective access types have the following characteristics 236 Table 5 102 Characteristics of Displaying and Modifying Contents of Memory Access Type Target Window Command Line Target Memory Area Short break Windows other than the Auto update Areas other than the target
236. ments by each instruction For a line that calls a function the whole of the called function is executed in a single step Step Out Steps out of a function and stops at the next line that calls the function in the program Step Steps the specified counts repeatedly at a specified rate 84 Before executing program stepping confirm that the program is executed up to the sort function line at address H 00003036 Label Source 90003000 _main void main void long a l0 min max long j int i 00003002 fori i 0 is10 itt jf oo000300a j randi 00003012 ifij lt 0 00003016 j j o000301a ali j 0000303e 00003042 Figure 4 21 Source Window Step Execution 85 4 10 1 Executing Step In Command The Step In command steps into the called function and stops at the first line of the function e To step into the sort function select Step In from the Run menu or click the Step button in the toolbar PM TUTORIAL lt BoE Line Address Label Source 00003036 Break sortia 0000303e min a 0 00003042 max al9 00003046 min 0 000030 da max O o000304e change a 000032056 min a 9 0000305a max a 0 oo00030Se while 1 long t int i 4 EK qap Figure 4 22 Source Window Step In The highlighted line moves to the first line of the sort function in the Source window 86 4 10 2 Executing Step Out Command The Step Out
237. mmand syntax and parameters rf Description Updates the HDI memory information Examples To update the HDI memory information RF 295 6 2 17 STATUS STS Command syntax and parameters sts Description Displays status information for the emulator For details refer to the contents of the System Status window described in section 5 9 Displaying Various Information Examples To display status information for the emulator STS Display gt STS Emulator Status Connected To CPU Operating Clock Mode Operating D Value ode Auto select MD3 2 ode MD1 0 E8000S D Value in Counts RQO RQ1 RQ2 RQ3 RQ4 RQ5 RQ6 RQ7 DWH HH HH HHH Ww 2 REQ BACK WAIT User System Device SH7046 SH7046 E8000S Disabled Clock Mode 0 ode 3 296 Emulator single chip mode Vcc Down Detection Level H UDI JTAG Clock Clock source Run status Break Cause of last break Interval Time Count 2 gt 1 MAX 2 gt 1 MIN 2 gt 1 AVE 2 gt 1 Interval Time Count 4 gt 3 MAX 4 gt 3 MIN 4 gt 3 AVE 4 gt 3 Run Time Count Condition A Sequential Condition B Sequential Interval Timer counter Bus timeout Multi break PRB1 Internal ROM Option RES signal BREQ signal WAIT signal Output trigger TRGB Output trigger TRGU Emulation mode Prohibit R W on the fl
238. modified When the emulator cannot be initiated correctly the following message box will be displayed Click Yes to display the CPU Operating Mode dialog box The operating mode must be modified HDI N The E8000S emulator connot be started correctly Change the CPU OPERATING MODE Figure 3 26 CPU Operating Mode Modification Message Mode 2 3 7 Troubleshooting 3 7 1 Error Messages from the HDI PC Interface Board Connection Failure When the HDI cannot detect the PC interface board for the emulator the HDI will display the following error message 55 E8000S Platform IN Driver Error Cannot locate ISA interface card Unable to restore previous configuration for Emulator ISA Driver Will attempt to set default values instead Figure 3 27 Error Message on PC Interface Board Connection Failure The causes of such failures are given below a The address ranges that was set by the switch on the rear panel of the PC interface board is different from that set in the next setting e Settings of the Computer Properties dialog box e Settings of the CONFIG SYS file e Settings of the SYSTEM INI file b Another application is using the selected memory area Emulator Connection Failure When the HDI cannot detect the E8000S station the HDI will display the following message box E8000S Platform N Driver Error Emulator is switched off or not connected Unable to set default configurat
239. mulator can allocate emulation memory to CS areas in 4 Mbyte units The following two types of memory can be specified 69 When the Add button is clicked the Add Memory Mapping dialog box is displayed In the sample program allocate emulation memory to memory range H 00000000 to H 003FFFFF 4 Mbytes Add Memory Mapping x Memory Mapping From H o000000d To H 003FFFFF Setting EMULATION AREA x Cancel Help Figure 4 4 Add Memory Mapping Dialog Box e Set the From and To edit boxes to H 00000000 and H 003FFFFF respectively set the Setting combo box to EMULATION AREA and click the OK button 70 The Memory Mapping dialog box will now show the ranges to which emulation memory is allocated Memory Mapping x To Mapping Target Device configuration Short Block 0 15 OO000000 001FFFFF 128K bytes by 1 Block Unit Large Block 0 11 00200000 00FFFFFF 1Mbytes by 1 Block Unit RAM AREA FFFFDOOO FFFFFFFF INTERNAL 1 0 FFFFS000 FFFFBFFF System memory resources REMAINING EMULATION MEMORY Large Block 0 11 0000 KB Short Block 0 7 0000 KB Short Block 8 15 0000 KB Map type Memory ini Edit Add ese Reset All Help Figure 4 5 Memory Mapping Dialog Box at Setting e Click the Close button of the Memory Mapping dialog box to close the dialog box For details on the allocation of emulation memory refer to section 5 11 1 Emulation Memor
240. n Using the LAN Adapter Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select E8000 LAN Driver as the component Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn on the LAN adapter Select SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs and start the LAN Adapter Configuration Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration Turn off the LAN adapter and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn on the LAN adapter Then LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed 39 Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications Table 3 1 lists the ISA bus PC interface board specifications For details on the PCI bus and PCMCIA bus interface boards refer to their description notes Table 3 1 PC Interface Board Specifications Item Specifications Host computer that canbe used ISA bus specifications PC or compatible machine System bus ISA bus specifications Memory area 16 kbytes Memory area setting Can be set at every 16 kbytes in the range from H C0000 to H EFFFF with a switch Switch S
241. n its architecture Standard emulation memory 4 Mbytes can be set in 1 Mbyte or 128 kbyte units to the memory space For details refer to section E 2 Emulation Memory D 1 1 Internal ROM Area e Access to the internal ROM area The emulator includes substitute RAM for the MCU s internal ROM The substitute RAM is accessed if an attempt is made to access the internal ROM The internal ROM area access differs between user program execution and the emulator commands Only read access is enabled during execution of the user program A break occurs if the internal ROM area is written to However if write access to the internal ROM area has been selected in the Configuration dialog box both reading and writing are enabled For access with emulator functions Memory window or loading read and write are always enabled The internal ROM area is accessed in one state e Flash memory The emulator does not support the flash memory D 1 2 Internal I O Area If an attempt is made to access the internal I O area the internal I O area in the MCU installed in the emulator is accessed To break the user program when the internal I O area is written to or accessed use the hardware break or internal break D 1 3 External Memory Area The MCU s external memory area can be set with all memory attributes that the emulator supports 343 D 2 Low Power consumption Mode Sleep Software Standby and Hardware Standby For reduced power
242. n specified as a break or trace condition the bus cycles during the delay period are positive XXXXXX PC 32 bit program counter values Code Instruction code being executed Nothing is displayed here in cycles that are not instruction execution cycles Break The contents of the specified address where a software breakpoint or software sequential breakpoint has been set are replaced by a break instruction and executed F8000S Invalid cycles AB 32 bit address bus values DB 32 bit data bus values in 4 bit units MA Type area of memory accessed by the bus master EXT Emulation non emulation memory ROM Internal ROM IO Internal I O area RAM Internal RAM NON No access R W Whether the cycle was for reading or writing R read cycle W write cycle STS DMA Internal DMA DTC execution cycle AUD AUD cycle BRL User bus release DAT CPU data access cycle except for PC relative data access PRG CPU instruction fetch cycle includes PC relative data access IRQ IRQO to IRQ7 signal state X7X6x5xX4x3x2x1x0 xn is the state of IRQn 0 low level 1 high level NMI NMI signal state 0 low level 1 high level RES RES signal state 0 low level 1 high level MRES MRES signal state 0 low level 1 high level BRQ BREQ signal state 0 low level 1 high level VCC Voltage on VCC 1 search level or more 0 less than search level 192 Table 5 66 Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window cont
243. n when the trace halt state is entered due to the satisfaction of trace conditions This command clears the trace information and the emulator starts to acquire new trace information Example To return the emulator state from parallel mode to user program execution mode END 278 6 2 11 EXECUTION_MODE EM Command syntax and parameters e Setting em lt time_count gt lt timeout gt lt multi_break gt lt internal_rom gt lt reset_signal gt lt busreqeust gt lt wait_signal gt lt trigger_bcb gt lt trigger_bcu gt e Display em 279 Parameter lt time_count gt Type Keyword Description Specifies the execution time measurement unit time 52us 52 us unit time 1 6us 1 6 us unit time 20ns 20 ns unit default lt timeout gt Keyword Sets the timeout detection time tout 100us 100 us unit default tout 1 6ms 1 6 ms unit tout 13ms 13 ms unit tout 210ms 210 ms unit lt multi_break gt Keyword Enables or disables the multibreak function the emulator can simultaneously stop the execution of user programs in other emulators by using external probe 1 mb enable Enables multibreak mb disable Disables multibreak default lt internal_rom gt Keyword Enables or disables the write to the internal ROM rom enable Enabled rom disable Disabled default lt reset_signal gt Keyword Enables or disables the input of RES pow
244. nU Point Sequence Condition A Sequence point 1 H 00001000 D 10 2 H 00001100 D 0 Edit Reset All Figure 5 18 Break Dialog Box Sequence Page Table 5 23 Sequence Page Options Option Description Sequence point Displays the specified pass point addresses Empty is displayed if there are no settings 1 to 7 Settings for pass point addresses 1 to 7 R Setting of the reset point address The pass point and reset point address settings are displayed as follows lt pass point address gt lt number of passes gt The number of passes indicates the number of times the pass point or reset point was passed while the program was being executed However counting re starts from 0 when the number of passes exceeds D 16383 Cleared on the next execution Edit Allows the user to modify the software sequential breakpoint settings selected in the Sequence point list box Clicking Edit opens the Break Point Sequence dialog box Reset All Clears all software sequential breakpoint settings in the Sequence point list box 132 Click the Edit button to open the Break Point Sequence dialog box Specify pass point addresses in the order of Address 1 to Address 7 a reset point address in Reset Point when the specified pass points are executed in order from Address 1 to Address 7 the break condition will be satisfied Click the OK button Address r Sequence Point
245. nce 1 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 84 Options on the Count Page Option Description Don t Care Selects no maximum number of passes Input area Sets a maximum number of passes as a numerical value A break occurs when the conditions set in the Performance1 dialog box are satisfied the specified number of times The default value is D 1 Any value from D 1 to D 65 535 can be set here Note This condition is detected as an overflow The test takes place when the user program passes through the end address Therefore the execution time and execution count displayed after break due to this setting will represent the number of specified passes plus one When a time out occurs while the display of the Performance Analysis window is being updated the message RUN TIME OVERFLOW will be displayed Entering a function name in Subroutine Address of the Input Function Range dialog box will automatically set the address range of that function in the area for the user input of addresses to the Address page Input Function Range Subroutine Address main Cancel Figure 5 80 Input Function Range Dialog Box 220 Displaying the Results of Performance Measurement The results of performance measurement are displayed in the Performance Analysis window To display the results click the right hand mouse button with the cursor in the Performance Analysis window then select a menu item from the pop up menu
246. ndition is satisfied when the external probe PRB signal levels match a specification Satisfaction count Trace acquisition stops when the above conditions are satisfied the specified number of times Delay Trace acquisition stops the specified number of bus cycles after the above conditions have been satisfied Trace stop conditions that can be specified for each of the eight channels of Trace Conditions A B and C 24 channels in total are shown in table 5 55 Table 5 55 Specifiable Trace Stop Conditions Trace Stop Trace Condition A Trace Condition B Trace Condition C Condition 1 to 8 1 to 8 1 to 8 Address bus O O O Data bus O O X Access type O O O Read Write O O xX External interrupt O O X External probe O O X Satisfaction count O O X Delay O O X Notes O Can be specified X Cannot be specified The delay condition is only available for Trace Conditions A7 and B7 173 b Setting Trace Stop Conditions Trace Condition A7 is taken as an example of setting a trace stop condition Place the cursor in the Trace window then click the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu Select Acquisition from the menu and the Trace Acquisition dialog box will appear Select the Condition A page Trace Acquisition 1 type stop address H O 2 type range direction read 3 Empty 4 Empty Figure 5 48 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Condition A Page
247. nnel_number gt To specify a reset point bcud reset e Enable or Disable bcue channel lt channel_number gt lt mode gt To specify a reset point bcue reset lt mode gt Parameter lt channel_number gt Type Numeric Description Sets an internal break Break Condition U channel number from 1 to 4 For BCUS commands items that can be specified as lt option gt depend on the channel number For the lt option gt parameter see the description of the BCUS command lt option gt parameters 1 lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt lt accessopt gt or lt countopt gt 2 to 4 lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt r wopt gt or lt accessopt gt lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables internal break enable Enabled disable Disabled lt reset gt Keyword Specifies a reset point of the internal sequential break To specify a reset point only valid when reset is specified with the BCUS command address lt address gt 259 Description of the bcus command lt option gt Specify one or more conditions Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies an address condition To specify an address as a break condition address lt address gt To specify the address as prefetched and to generate a break before the corresponding instruction is executed address lt address gt pc To specify the address as prefetched and to generate a break after the corresponding
248. nseeeeneees 76 Figure 4 12 System Status Window 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeceeeeeecesecesecsaecsaecsaecaeecseseaeseeeeeeeeerenerens 77 Figure 4 13 Breakpoints Window 00 cee ee cescesecesecnee cee caeecseseneseeeeeeeeeeeseessecaecsaecnaecsaesnaeeas 78 Figure 4 14 Open Memory Window Dialog BOX eee ceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeecesecesecaecsaesaeeneeeas 79 Figure 4 15 Long Memory WindoW eseeesseesssesesssreerssrsreresresresrerrssesrenresrenresrertsseeressesresresrent 80 Figure 4 16 Instant Watch Dialog BOX esssesssseesseeesesesererrsreeresreersserrrssesrenresrenrsseerrnsesrreresrentes 81 Figure 4 17 Watch Window Window Displaying the Array eseseesseeesseeeesseesererrrrrerrsrreresee 82 Figure 4 18 Add Watch Dialog BOX ieee ce cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesecesecaecsaecsaecseecaeeeaeseaeseeeeaeenes 82 Figure 4 19 Watch Window Window Displaying the Variable 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 Figure 4 20 Watch Window Window Displaying Array Elements 00 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 Figure 4 21 Source Window Step Execution eceescceeccecsseceenceceseeeeceeceaeceeeeecaeeeeneecsaeeeaees 85 Figure 4 22 Source Window Step In ceeeeesscesceecseceeeeecsseceeneecaeceeeeecaeceeneecsaeceneeeaeeeeeeees 86 Figure 4 23 Source Window Step Out eee eescesneecsseceseeecsseceseeeceaceeseeecaeeeeaeecaeeeeaeecsaeesaees 87 Figure 4 24 Watch Window Display Example 1 eee eeeeeeceseceseceseceseceeecneeeneseaeesee
249. nted hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document
250. o set the following conditions for channel 6 of Break Condition B Address bus value Except the range from H 100000 to H 1001C0 BCS B CHANNEL 6 ADDRESS H 100000 TO H 1001CO NOT 7 To display the condition for channel 6 of Break Condition B BCD B CHANNEL 6 The display format is as follows gt BCD B CHANNEL 6 Break Condition B6 Enable address H 100000 to H 1001c0O not 8 To display all of the conditions set to Break Condition A BCD A The display format is as follows gt BCD A Break Condition Al Disable Break Condition A2 Enable address H 10027c to H 100304 direction write Break Condition A3 Disable Break Condition A4 Disable Break Condition A5 Enable address H 10027c not prb 0101 Break Condition A6 Disable Break Condition A7 Disable Break Condition A8 Disable 9 To enable the conditions set to channel 3 of Break Condition B BCE B CHANNEL 3 ENABLE 10 To clear all of the conditions set to Break Condition A BCE A DISABLE 257 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 To clear the condition set to channel 3 of Break Condition B BCC B CHANNEL 3 To clear all of the conditions set to Break Condition A BCC A To set a sequential point when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A Address bus value H 100000 BCS A CHANNEL P ADDRESS H 100000 To set a reset point when a hardware sequential break is set to Break Condition A Address bus value H 300000 BCS A CHANNEL R
251. ocation of pin 1 as shown in figures C 8 and C 9 then use four screws FP 80Q M2 0 x 6 mm FP 100M M2 6 x 6 mm to fix the cover to the IC socket Hold the soldered part of the IC socket in place by hand to prevent rotational pressure due to screwing CAUTION Use the dedicated driver which is attached The torque for screwing must be 0 299 Nem or less If acontrolled torque is not possible stop screwing as soon as the pressure required changes abruptly Excessive pressure on the screws will damage the threads of the sockets or cause contact failures by cracking the solder on the IC socket Crack in the soldered connection of the IC socket will result in the emulator malfunction In that case check for the conduction by using for example a tester and solder that part again if necessary 339 Screws M2 0 x 6 mm flat washers lt g _ Upper cover MCU SH7046 Pin 1 mark lt ag _ C socket IC149 080 017 B5 manufactured by YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS Co Ltd User system Figure C 8 Installing the MCU FP 80Q 340 Screws M2 6 x 6 mm flat washers lt Upper cover MCU SH7046 Pin 1 mark lt a IC socket IC149 100 054 B51 manufactured by YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS Co Ltd User system Figure C 9 Installing the MCU FP 100M 341 342 Appendix D MCU Internal Module Support D 1 Memory Space The MCU has a 4 Gbyte memory space i
252. of the host computer When the host computer is activated without a given card or an inappropriate driver is installed it is not possible to start the given driver The service control manager informs the user of the error but it causes no other problem When Using the PC Interface Board Refer to section 3 4 4 PC Interface Board Specifications ISA Bus Specifications and set the operating system environment and install the ISA bus interface board Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select ISA Driver as the component Restart the host computer When Using the LAN Adapter Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select E8000 LAN Driver as the component Connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn on the LAN adapter Select SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software Tools LAN Adapter Configuration from Start Programs and start the LAN Adapter Configuration Set the LAN adapter by LAN Adapter Configuration Turn off the LAN adapter and connect the LAN adapter to the target network and turn on the LAN adapter Then LAN adapter must be turned off even when the network is not changed Note When using a LAN adapter that has already been set it is unnecessary to set it again Use LAN Adapter Configuration to define only the host computer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration 38 3 4 3 Setting Up th
253. of the clock signal that has been set When the user selects user for the clock signal but the user system clock is not input from the user system the emulator will generate an error and select the clock in the emulator When the user turns on the emulator the emulator will select the user system clock user evaluation chip board crystal oscillator xtal and emulator internal clock signal 12 and set the correct clock signal Examples 1 To select the user system clock signal CK USER 2 To display the selected clock signal CK The display format is as follows gt CK Clock Emulator Clock 12 5MHz 272 Note When the user system is selected and the following abnormal condition holds the emulator system program will not run correctly and the emulator will display error message USER SYSTEM NOT READY when the user inputs commands or starts the HDI In this case the user must exit the HDI and start it again e If user has been selected and the user system clock has been used but the user system clock is cut off V_ is supplied correctly 273 6 2 8 Coverage Commands CVS CVC CVD e Setting COVERAGE SET CVS e Cancellation COVERAGE _ CLEAR CVC e Display COVERAGE _ DISPLAY CVD Command syntax and parameters e Setting cvs lt mode gt e Cancellation eve lt addropt gt e Display cvd lt addropt gt lt dispopt gt Displays the result of a coverage trace cvs Displays the settings Parame
254. office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions un
255. ol Panel from the Start menu Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select Adobe Acrobat Reader x x from the list of applications installed on the tabbed page Install Uninstall and click the Add Remove button Follow the directions on the screen 64 4 1 Section 4 Tutorial Introduction The following describes the main functions of the HDI by using a sample program for sorting random data For more complicated usage refer to section 5 Emulator Functions The sample program performs the following actions The main function generates 10 pieces of random data to be sorted The sort function generates the array and inputs the random data in the array and sorts the random data in ascending order The change function inputs the array generated by the sort function and changes the data in descending order Table 4 1 shows the configuration of the sample program Table 4 1 Configuration of the Sample Program Item No Description of File File Name and Directory 1 HEW workspace file HEW HDI5 E8000S 7046 TUTORIAL TUTORIAL HWS 2 ELF DWARF2 type HEW HDI5 E8000S 7046 load module file TUTORIAL TUTORIAL DEBUG TUTORIAL ABS 3 S type load module HEW HDI5 E8000S 7046 file TUTORIAL TUTORIAL DEBUG TUTORIAL MOT 4 Source file main HEW HDI5 E8000S 7046 program TUTORIAL TUTORIAL TUTORIAL C Note This sample program is created by using the SuperH RISC engine C C compiler Package V6 0 0r1
256. om the start of user program execution until any of the break conditions is satisfied The free trace mode is the default when no trace condition is specified 171 User program Program flow Trace buffer Break condition is satisfied Figure 5 46 Trace Acquisition in Free Trace Mode Trace Stop Mode a Overview Trace acquisition stops when the specified conditions are satisfied User program Program flow Trace memory 65 535 bus Break condition cycles is satisfied oe Figure 5 47 Trace Acquisition in Trace Stop Mode In this mode execution of the user program will not be suspended but the emulator enters the trace halt mode The trace stop conditions are shown in table 5 54 When all of the specified conditions an AND condition are satisfied trace acquisition will stop 172 Table 5 54 Trace Stop Conditions Condition Address bus Description The condition is satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus The condition is satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Access type The condition is satisfied when the access type matches the specification Read Write The condition is satisfied when the read write condition is as specified External interrupt The condition is satisfied when the external interrupt signal levels match a specification External probe The co
257. omputer For details on the usage of the LAN Adapter Configuration refer to the online help of the LAN Adapter Configuration 3 4 2 Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows NT 4 0 When Using the PCI Interface Board e Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch e Install the PCI interface board into the host computer e Turn on the host computer Log on as Administrator e Install the provided software Select PCI Card Driver as the component e Restart the host computer 37 When Using the PC Interface Card Exit from the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch Install the PC interface card into the host computer Turn on the host computer Log on as Administrator Install the provided software Select PC Card Driver PCMCIA as the component Check the values specified for use by the PC interface card before the information is requested during installation Select and start Administrative Tools Common Windows NT Diagnostics from Start Programs to check the current status of IRQ I O ports and memory in the resource panels and set values that will not cause contention with other devices Required resources are as follows one channel for IRQ H F bytes for I O ports H 4000 bytes for use as memory Restart the host computer Note Default settings start all the drivers selected as Drivers components after the activation
258. on both sides of the board E8000S station rear panel Device control board Power supply cable Oo Figure 3 2 Connecting the Device Control Board 3 3 2 Connecting the Evaluation Chip Board At shipment the evaluation chip board is packed separately from the E8000S station Use the following procedure to connect the evaluation chip board to the E8000S station or to disconnect them when moving the emulator A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY 23 Check that the emulator power switch is turned off Ensure that the power lamp on the left side of the E8000S station s front panel is not lit Remove the AC power cable of the E8000S station from the outlet if the cable is connected to the outlet AWARNING When connecting the cable ensure that the upper or lower side of the cable does not lift off the connector Alternately tighten the screws on both sides of the cable while gradually pushing the cable toward the connector Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD damage the user system and emulator and will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST E8000S station E8000S station Incorrect Correct 24 CAUTION At shipment the trace
259. on efficiency of user programs 4 Mbyte emulation memory for use as a substitute user system memory installed as a standard item A LAN adapter for connecting the emulator to a host computer via a LAN interface LOBASE T or LOOBASE TX allowing loading of the SH7046 E8000S Hitachi Debugging Interface into the host computer This enables graphic display operations in a multi window environment and source level debugging A PC interface board for the ISA bus PCI bus or PCMCIA bus connected to the host computer through the PC interface cable The HDI can be loaded into the host computer to enable e Graphic display operations in a multi window environment e Source level debugging Note Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation USA 1 1 Notes on Usage CAUTION READ the following warnings before using the emulator product Incorrect operation will damage the user system and the emulator product The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Check all components with the component list after unpacking the emulator 2 Never place heavy objects on the casing Observe the following conditions in the area where the emulator is to be used Make sure that the internal cooling fans on the sides of the emulator must be at least 20 cm 8 away from walls or other equipment Keep out of direct sunlight or heat Refer to section 1 2 Environmental Conditions Use in an environment with constant temperature and humidity P
260. on of User System Interface Cable sssesseseeeseeeseseeesssreereserrrerrsreerrsreeresene 16 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board sseseeseseeeseresssreesrererreresrrerrsrees 19 System Configuration Using a LAN Adaptet esssseessseeesseeeeesrrsrreresreerrsrrrrssesreeresreet 20 Emulator Preparation FlOWchart escceescecsseceeececseeceseeecsaceeseeecaeeeeneecaeeeeaeecaeeesnees 21 Connecting the Device Control Board sssesseeeesseresrssrsreerrsreeresrerreserreeresrenresrerresene 23 Connecting Trace Cables to the E8000S Station eee eeeeeeceeeeeseeeseenseenaes 26 Connecting Trace Cables to the Evaluation Chip Board 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 27 Connecting the User System Interface Cable eee ceeecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeereeseenseenaes 28 Extemial Probe Connectors a a a a A E ys tens AE NRSR 30 Installing the Crystal Oscillator sseeeseseeeseeeseeeseseetreeeresreersrrsresreererrnesrenresreresreeee 32 Connecting the System Ground 000 0 eee cee cseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecesecssecaecnaeesaessaeeaeeeaes 33 Connecting the Frame Ground eee ces cesecssecseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesecssecsecaecnaessaeeaee 34 Host Interface Switches sun a conn th eve cg ovyew oe E AS 35 Allocatable Memory Area of PC Interface Board 00 0 eee eeseceseceeecneeeeeeeeeeeeees 41 PC Interface Board SWiteh ei eesriie rne E EE ESES EEAS E 42 Installing the PC Interface Board sseesseesesseessereesssrseresrsersresrerrss
261. on your host computer the SH7046 E8000S Hitachi Debugging Interface hereafter referred to as HDI can be used for debugging A LAN adapter allows the connection of the E8000S station to the host computer as a network Connecting the LAN adapter also enables debugging using the HDI For details on PC interface boards available for ISA bus PCI bus and PCMCIA bus specifications and LAN adapter refer to their description notes Device control board HS7046EDD81H PC interface cable option l r Network LAN adapter option PC interface cable option i PC interface board option Trace cable Evaluation chip board AUT HS7046EBK81H E80008S station HS8000EST11H A External probe trigger output pins User system interface cable 2 IC socket User system Figure 1 1 Emulator for the SH7046 The emulator provides the following features 1 Realtime emulation of the MCU at 50 MHz 2 A wide selection of emulation commands promoting efficient system development 3 4 Efficient debugging enabled by variable break functions and a mass storage trace memory On line help functions to facilitate command usage without a manual 128 kcycles Parallel access with a command execution during emulation for example e Trace data display e Emulation memory display and modification Performance analysis Measurement of subroutine execution time and count for evaluating the executi
262. ondition is not specified User mask A mask condition is specified Mask When Address and User mask is selected the mask is set When Range is specified the value becomes invalid b Bus State Page Use the Bus State page to specify bus conditions for use in searching i e access type and read and write cycle information 196 Trace Filter General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time m Bus State BREQ signal C Al C Low Data Don t Care DMA DTC Program Fetch Read Write C Read Write Figure 5 63 Trace Filter Dialog Box Bus State Page Table 5 71 Bus State Page Options Bus State Group Box Option Description All This search condition is any access type Data This search condition instruction execution cycles only DMA DTC This search condition is DMA DTC cycles only Program Fetch This search condition is CPU instruction fetch cycles only Read Write Group Box Option Description Read Write Sets either read write cycles as a search condition Read Sets read cycles as the search condition Write Sets write cycles as the search condition 197 BREQ signal Group Box Option Description Low Sets the low level of the BREQ signal as a search condition Don t Care The BREQ signal is not a search condition c Interrupt Page Use the Interrupt page to specify condi
263. ons and 5 6 Realtime Trace Functions 105 CPU Operating Mode Page Use this page to set and display the details of the MCU s operating mode General Execution Model Execution Mode2 CPU Operating Mode Operating Mode Auto select Disabled Clock Mode MD3 2 Clock Mode 0 Operating Mode MD1 0 Mode 3 single chip mode MD Value E80005 03 MD Value User System 00 Pin Counts Device 80 IRQO HIGH IRQ1 HIGH IRQ2 HIGH IRQ3 HIGH IRQ4 HIGH IRQS HIGH IRQ6 HIGH IRQ HIGH BREQ HIGH Setting Figure 5 5 Configuration Dialog Box CPU Operating Mode Page Table 5 7 CPU Operating Mode Page Option Description Item Displays a list of the CPU Operating Mode items Status Displays the current setting for the item Setting Displays the CPU Operating Mode dialog box that is used to change the settings When Finish is clicked in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box the emulator restarts and ignores the settings made in other dialog boxes 106 5 2 2 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Use this wizard style dialog box to set the MCU s operating mode This dialog box has four pages and they are listed in table 5 8 Changing the settings in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box will restart the HDI Table 5 8 CPU Operating Mode Dialog Box Page Description Device Pin Counts Selects the target MCU MD Pin Sets the MCU operating mode Pin Select R
264. ons and Mass of the Emulator 327 HS7046EBK81H ee y HITACHI 140 0 9 z 5s A u c i wi 2s 59 HS7046EBK81H Unit mm Mass of the evaluation chip board HS7046EBK81H 0 950 kg Figure B 2 External Dimensions and Mass of the Evaluation Chip Board 328 Appendix C Connecting the Emulator to the User System C 1 Connecting to the User System AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system or emulator or result in PERSONAL INJURY Also the USER PROGRAM will be LOST The emulator is connected to the user system by using the user system interface cable Table C 1 User System Interface Cable and User Interfaces User System Interface Cable User Interface HS7046ECH81H FP 80Q IC 149 080 017 B5 HS7047ECH81H FP 100M IC 149 100 054 B51 Note The IC149 series is manufactured by YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS Co Ltd 329 C 1 1 Installing IC Socket 1 Installing IC Socket Install the IC socket for an FP 80Q package to the user system After checking the location of pin 1 on the IC socket apply epoxy resin adhesive to the bottom of the IC and fasten it to the user system before soldering 2 Soldering IC Socket After fastening solder the IC socket to the user system Be sure to completely solder the leads so that the solder slops gently over the leads and fo
265. ormance measurement information select Initialize from the pop up menu of the Performance Analysis window Before the initialization the emulator will display a message box to ask you if you want to initialize the information To initialize the information click the OK button Note When using the The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution in the Configuration dialog box to modify the unit for counting by the execution time measurement counter be sure to reset the settings for performance analysis before altering the minimum time interval Otherwise the emulator will continue to use the minimum time interval from before the alteration in measuring the program s performance 224 5 9 Displaying Various Information The System Status window displays a variety of information set by each dialog box Open the System Status window by selecting Status from the View menu 225 System Status Of _ OP x Item Status Connected To H7046 E8000S Emulator CPU SH 7046 Operating Mode Auto select Disabled clock Mode MD3 2 Clock Mode 1 Operating Mode MD1 0 Mode 3 single chip mode MD Value E80005 07 MD Value User System Pin Counts Device IRQO IRQL IRQ2 IRQ3 BACK WAIT Vcc Down Detection Level H UDICITAG Clock Clock source Emulator Clock 12 5MHz Run status Break Cause of last break Interval Time Count 2 gt 1 MAX 2 gt 1 MIN 2 gt 1 AVE 2 gt 1 Interval Time Count 4 gt 3 MAX 4 gt 3 MI
266. ot be entered e Memory cannot be written to or read from during execution 5 8 Performance Analysis Function Performance analysis applies functions of the Emulator to the measurement of performance 5 8 1 Measuring with E8000S Station Function The emulator s performance analysis function is for measuring the efficiency of parts of a user program in terms of their execution times against the overall execution time and for measuring the number of times a part of the user program is executed e Setting the Conditions for Performance Measurement In the HDI the user can set the execution efficiency and the execution count through a certain dialog box and display the measured results in the Performance Analysis window Performance Analysis Address iof x Not Used Display type Subroutine address list no information Figure 5 68 Performance Analysis Window In the Performance Analysis window the user can assign any of eight independent channels To set a condition click Edit in the pop up menu of the Performance Analysis window to produce the Performance 1 to 8 dialog box 206 Measurement Mode Measurement modes are explained in table 5 74 Table 5 74 Measurement Modes Measurement Mode Description Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 1 Measures the execution time and number of passes through the subroutine over the specified address range Measurement starts with the execution of the subrou
267. ount page of the Performance 1 dialog box which can be opened from the Performance window then execute the user program When either the execution time or count exceeds the specified conditions trace acquisition will stop 187 For details on the Performance 1 dialog box Time Out page and Count page refer to section 5 8 Performance Analysis Function Other Conditions In the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box tracing can be specified to stop on the overflow of the trace buffer the tracing of DMA or DTC cycles can be selected and the minimum period for time stamping of acquired bus tracing information can be specified Trace Acquisition Trace Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C Mode mM DMA DTC Cycle Trace Buffer Over Flow Time Stamp l 20ns v Close Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 57 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Mode Page a Acquisition on DMA DTC cycles Acquisition of trace information on DMA or DCT cycles is selected in the DMA DCT Cycle Trace check box in the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box b Minimum period for time stamping The minimum period for time stamping is specified as Time Stamp in the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box 188 Table 5 65 Time Stamp Group Box Options Option Description Time Stamp Selects the minimum time for the time stamping of the measured bus
268. p Conditions and Creating a New Condition A history of trace stop conditions that have been set as Trace Condition A or B can be displayed in the Condition dialog box New conditions can also be created by using the Condition dialog box Click to select condition 1 from the Condition list box on the Condition A page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Click the Set Condition button to open the Condition dialog box The Condition dialog box has the pages shown in table 5 58 Table 5 58 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Pages Page Description History Displays the history of conditions that have been set as Trace Condition A or B Conditions can be moved from the History page to the Entry List page Entry List Creates modifies duplicates and deletes conditions for Trace Condition A or B For details on each page refer to the description under Displaying a History of Hardware Break Conditions and Creating a New Condition in section 5 5 3 Hardware Sequential Break Sequential Trace Stop a Overview A sequential trace stop occurs after a set of channels of a trace stop condition has been satisfied in a specified order This function uses Trace Condition A or B a sequence of up to seven trace stop conditions and one reset point can be specified as Trace Condition A or B The user must consider the order of satisfaction in specifying trace stop conditions for Trace Conditions A and B tracing only
269. perating Mode page in the Configuration dialog box For details on the CPU Operating Mode dialog box refer to section 5 2 Setting the Emulator Operating Conditions 67 The HDI window is shown in figure 4 2 Al Hitachi Debugging Interface SHX E8000S Emulator File Edit View Run Memory Setup Window Help Of Hae BAe amp MO ews BaSAC OAT WES Nie 0 8 2 WA t fa a AN ci ee ae a ie ai EE Figure 4 2 HDI Window Numbers in figure 4 2 indicate the following 1 Menu bar Indicates the HDI command menus for the use of the HDI 2 Toolbar Contains convenient buttons as shortcuts of menu commands 3 Status bar Indicates the state of the emulator and progress information about downloading 4 Help button Activates the HDI on line help 68 4 3 Setting the Memory Map In the next step allocate the emulation memory e Select Configure Map from the Memory menu to display the current memory map The Memory Mapping dialog box is displayed Memory Mapping Ed From To Mapping Target Device configuration Short Block 0 15 OO000000 001FFFFF 128K bytes by 1 Block Unit Large Block 0 11 00200000 00FFFFFF Mbytes by 1 Block Unit RAM AREA FFFFDOOO FFFFFFFF INTERNAL 1 0 FFFFS000 FFFFBFFF System memory resources REMAINING EMULATION MEMORY Large Block 0 11 4096 KB Map type Memory Se Figure 4 3 Memory Mapping Dialog Box before Setting The e
270. r defect execute the provided diagnostic program to collect the internal details from the emulator Please inform us of the results of testing For details on the diagnostic program refer to section 3 7 4 Operating Procedure for the Diagnostic Program 60 Can data be input to the host computer normally START Emulator syste System failure defect System defect Emulator monitor Console Yes message connected displayed correctly Power lamp on Connect with power on Check power supply correctly breaker fuse outlet No to emulator Get ready to Defect in source power on power or emulator power Failure Fuse fail again Have the diagnosis occurred test of the emulator Power lamp monitor at power Emulator defect on passed System fan working Svs rodam defect Switch defect initiated RSS System Correct system defect correctly program installed Re install correct system program Have the diagnosis System test of the emulator Is it an error defect system program at generated by pwer on passed register program execution break System memory or shared memory E 7 defect DCONT error valuation chip I
271. race e When the dump option is set and the address range is specified the start address and end address are adjusted to be a multiple of 16 and multiple of 16 1 respectively XXXXXXXX YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY YY yy XXXXXXXX Address yy Displays information on executed addresses as a hexadecimal 00 FF number One bit is one address and 1 is set in bits that correspond to executed addresses Example 0001000 8FO00 The data 8F at the head of the list indicates that addresses 1000 1008 100A 100C and 100E all have instructions that have been executed The addresses until they are reinitialized display the coverage trace information on the program that has been executed e When the rate option is set the ratio of addresses that have executed instructions to all the addresses is displayed lt S ADDR gt lt E ADDR gt lt RATE gt XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX rr rr e a XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Coverage address range rr rr Rate e Number of instructions executed a All addresses Examples 1 To use the coverage trace function CVS ON 2 To display the settings of the coverage trace function CVS The display format is as follows gt CVS CVS ON 3 To reinitialize the result of a coverage trace from H 400 to H 40F CVC START 400 END 40F 4 To reinitialize the result of a coverage trace 275 CVC To display the data as a list of the addresses of instructions that have been execut
272. race information in the bus cycles that match the specified conditions when instructions and operands of the subroutine set by its start and end addresses are accessed For conditions that can be set see the description of lt option gt for the tas command When more than one condition is set for range tracing the trace information is acquired when the OR of the conditions is satisfied When the trace stop condition is set trace information is acquired until the trace stop condition is satisfied When the trace stop condition is satisfied acquisition of trace information halts and the system enters the trace halt state To resume acquisition exit from the trace halt state by using the END command When a subroutine trace has been specified and the specified subroutine has called other subroutines execution in the called subroutines is not traced When the sequential trace stop has been specified the sequential point and a reset point must be set 302 Cancellation Cancels the trace conditions Trace Condition A B C sequential points or reset points Trace Condition A B setting When the channel number is omitted all trace conditions are cancelled A channel number cannot be set when a hardware sequential condition is in place Display Displays the set trace conditions Trace Condition A B C When the channel number is omitted all trace conditions that have been set are displayed Display format is as follows Trace Condition Xn l
273. ram by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 9 8 us 50us Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 50 us 100us Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 100 us 500us Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 500 us Ims Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 1 ms 5ms Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 5 ms 10ms Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 10 ms 50ms Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 50 ms 100ms Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 100 ms 500ms Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 500 ms 1s Executes the user program by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 1 s pabreak A break occurs under the timeout condition set by the Performance 1 dialog box or the PERFORMANCE_SET command set by channel 1 patrace A trace acquisition under the timeout condition set by the Performance 1 dialog box or the PERFORMANCE_SET command set by channel 1 and execution continues sb1 Internal sequential break mode 1 A break occurs when break conditions set by Break Condition U2 1 are satisfied in the sequence of 2 1 sb2 Inte
274. range from H 100000 to H 1001C0 as the address condition for Trace Condition B on channel 3 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 3 TYPE STOP ADDRESS H 100000 TO H 1001CO NOT To display settings for Trace Condition B on channel 3 TAD B CHANNEL 3 gt TAD B CHANNEL 3 Trace Condition B3 Enable type range H 100000 to H 1001c0 not To display all settings for Trace Condition TAD A gt TAD A Trace Condition Al Disable Trace Condition A2 Enable type range address H 10027c to H 100304 direction write Trace Condition A3 Disable Trace Condition A4 Disable Trace Condition A5 Enable type stop data H 11111111 long prb 0101 Trace Condition A6 Disable Trace Condition A7 Disable Trace Condition A8 Disable 304 10 11 12 13 14 To cancel conditions set as Trace Condition B on channel 2 TAC B CHANNEL 2 To cancel all settings for Trace Condition A TAC A To set Trace Condition B as a sequential point at an address bus value of H 100000 when a sequential trace stop condition has already been set TAS B CHANNEL P ADDRESS H 100000 To set Trace Condition B as a reset point at an address bus value of H 300000 when a sequential trace stop condition has already been set TAS B CHANNEL R ADDRESS H 300000 To display the settings when the sequential trace stop condition has been set for Trace Condition B TAD B gt TAD B Trace Condition B Sequential Enable 1 address H 100000 2 a
275. ransportation vehicular medical aerospace nuclear or undersea repeater use The prior written approval of Renesas Technology Corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export control restrictions they must be exported under a license from the Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of Japan and or the country of destination is prohibited Please contact Renesas Technology Corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein tENESAS C 7 D mh on lt D D SH7046 E8000S Emulator HS7046EBK81H User s Manual Desa ecw Onis Rev 1 0 2001 07 Cautions Hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of Hitachi s or any third party s patent copyright trademark or other intellectual property rights for information contained in this document Hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party s rights including intellectual property rights in connection with use of the information contained in this document Products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice Confirm that you have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design purchase
276. ration puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them Trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury fire or property damage Remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs with appropriate measures such as i placement of substitutive auxiliary circuits ii use of nonflammable material or iii prevention against any malfunction or mishap Notes regarding these materials 1 These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the Renesas Technology Corporation product best suited to the customer s application they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights or any other rights belonging to Renesas Technology Corporation or a third party Renesas Technology Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage or infringement of any third party s rights originating in the use of any product data diagrams charts programs algorithms or circuit application examples contained in these materials All information contained in these materials including product data diagrams charts programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials and are subject to change by Renesas Technology Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons It is therefore recommend
277. re C 4 Connection Using the HS7047ECH81H Cable head 13 5 11 2 IC socket l 7 IC149 100 054 B51 Unit mm manufactured by YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS Co Ltd User system Tolerance 0 5 mm Figure C 5 Restrictions on Component Installation 334 17 10 min e fp 13 80 max gt a 0 50 x 24 12 00 0 05 0 50 0 05 0 30 0 05 gt iis a n y E L A A SS m Te 2 oO Lo z o LO i 5 S ai Il xt A x o Ww o m SS SS E Ea y SS IM lll Unit mm Figure C 6 Recommended Mount Pad Dimensions of the User System IC Socket 335 C 2 Precautions for User System Connection When connecting the evaluation chip board to the user system note the following 1 Secure the E8000S station location Place the E8000S station and evaluation chip board so that the station to trace cable is not bent or twisted as shown below A bent or twisted cable will impose stress on the user interface leading to connection or contact failure Make sure that the E8000S station is placed in a secure position so that it does not move and impose stress on the user interface during use LZ HITACHI E8000s 2 Make sure the power supply is off Before connecting the evaluation chip board to the user system check that the emulator and the user system are turned off 3 Connect the UVcc to the user system power Th
278. re breakpoint set at address H 00001000 BC H 00001000 To clear all software breakpoints BC 266 6 2 5 Software Sequential Break Commands BSS BSC BSD BSE e Setting BREAKSEQUENCE_SET BSS e Cancellation BREAKSEQUENCE_CLEAR BSC e Display BREAKSEQUENCE_DISPLAY BSD e Enable or Disable BREAKSEQUENCE_ENABLE BSE Command syntax and parameters e Setting bss lt address1 gt lt address2 gt lt address3 gt reset lt address8 gt e Cancellation bse e Display bsd e Enable or Disable bse lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt address1 gt Numeric Sets the address of the first pass point When the user sets an odd address it is rounded down to an even address lt address2 gt Numeric Sets the address of the second pass point lt address3 gt Numeric Sets the addresses of the third pass point and subsequent points The user can set up to seven pass points lt address8 gt Numeric Sets the address of the reset point lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables software sequential breakpoints enable Enables breakpoint setting disable Disables breakpoint setting 267 Description Setting This command sets software sequential breakpoints When the emulator executes the user program from the first pass point address emulation will pass the software sequential breakpoints and stop at the last pass point If emulation does not pass the pass points in the specified order the
279. reak Dialog Box Condition U Page ceesceecessseceeeecsseceeneecseeceeneeenaeeeees 158 Figure 5 38 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Address Page ceeeeseeceereeeseeceereeeeeeeee 160 Figure 5 39 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Data Page ee eeeeseeceeeeeeneeceneeeeneeeeee 162 Figure 5 40 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Bus State Page ee eesceseeeeseceereeeeeees 163 Figure 5 41 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Count Page eee eeseeceeeeeeneeceneeeeneeeeee 164 Figure 5 42 Break Condition U Reset Dialog Box eecceecesecesecesecesecseecaeeeaeeeaeeeeeees 165 Figure 5 43 Configuration Dialog Box Internal Sequential Break eee eee eee eee eeee 167 Figure 5 44 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Buffer Overflow e ec eeeeeeseeceeeeeeneeeeee 168 Figure 5 45 Configuration Dialog Box Timeout Break ee ee eeseceeeeeeseeceereeeeeceereeeneeceeees 169 Figure 5 46 Trace Acquisition in Free Trace Mode cece cee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeceseceseenaeesaeenee 172 xi Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Figure 5 52 Figure 5 53 Figure 5 54 Figure 5 55 Figure 5 56 Figure 5 57 Figure 5 58 Figure 5 59 Figure 5 60 Figure 5 61 Figure 5 62 Figure 5 63 Figure 5 64 Figure 5 65 Figure 5 66 Figure 5 67 Figure 5 68 Figure 5 69 Figure 5 70 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 5 74 Figure 5 75 Figure 5 76 Figure 5 77 Figure 5 78 Figure 5 79 Figure 5 80 Figure 5 81 F
280. ring the subroutine performance The following shows the display format 1 To display an execution time ratio for the program execution state gt PA GRAPH NO NAME MODE RATE __ 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1 SUBA Il D 10 0 8 2 SUBB 2 D 20 0 Woas 3 SUBC B D 30 0 KAk 5 SUBD AC D 15 0 eH 7 SUBE SC D 30 0 ennnannnes a b c d e TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 00M 10S 000020US 250NS _ f a Channel number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Time measurement mode 11 Time measurement mode 1 I2 Time measurement mode 2 13 Time measurement mode 3 AC Area access count mode SC Subroutine call count measurement mode d Displays the execution time ratio numerically e Displays the execution time ratio as a graph f Total execution time Hours H minutes M seconds S microseconds US and nanoseconds NS 291 2 To display subroutine address list gt PA ADDRESS NO NAME MODE ADDRESS 1 SUBA Il 00000100 00001FFO TIME xxxH xxM xxS xxxxxxUS COUNT nnnnnnnn a b c d e f g 2 SUBB 2 00005000 00007FF0 3 SUBC 13 00010000 0001008F h 00020000 00020098 i 5 SUBD AC 00002030 0000207F lt ACCESS gt FFFFFFO0O FFFFFF7F 0 7 SUBE SC 00020100 0002FFFF lt CALL SUB gt 00030000 00030060 k TOTAL RUN TIME D 0000H 10M 00S 000020US 250NS 1 a Channel number b Subroutine name up to 32 characters can be used c Time measurement mode
281. rms solder fillets Use slightly more solder than the MCU C 1 2 Connection Using the HS7046ECH81H AWARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system or emulator or result in PERSONAL INJURY Also the USER PROGRAM will be LOST Notes 1 For more details on the HS7046ECH81H refer to the user s manual supplied with the evaluation chip board 2 This evaluation chip board can only be used in combination with the specified QFP socket IC149 080 017 B5 Install the FP 80Q pin socket IC149 080 017 B5 manufactured by YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS Co Ltd on the user system to connect the emulator Since the pin arrangement is the same as that of the actual MCU refer to the hardware manual Figure C 1 shows the connection of the HS7046ECH81H figure C 2 shows the size restrictions for the installed components of the HS7046ECH81H and figure C 3 shows the recommended mount pad dimensions of the user system IC socket 330 User cable head Ee User system interface cable Evaluation chip board Power supply cable Figure C 1 Connection Using the HS7046ECH81H Cable head 13 5 11 2 Unit mm Tolerance 0 5 mm User system IC socket IC149 080 017 B5 manufactured by YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS Co Ltd Figure C 2 Restrictions on Component Install
282. rnal register when an error occurs where an error occurs Note Operation continues if an error occurs but the error should be investigated according to section 3 7 Troubleshooting without loading the emulator system program Diagnostic checks at program start up Next the emulator system program starts up The emulator system program performs diagnostic checks of the registers of the emulator When an error is thus detected in the emulator the emulator displays the following error message while the HDI is operating 1 Errors that may occur when registers that control emulation are being tested The emulator control registers are being checked If an error occurs one of the following messages is displayed 57 Error Message INVALID DCONT BOARD Description Another device control board is connected Please check the MCU type and install the correct emulator system program or exchange the device control board DEVICE CONTROL BOARD DISCONNECTION The device control board is disconnected EVACHIP BOARD DISCONNECTION EVACHIP BOARD DISCONNECTION x The evaluation chip board is disconnected Check that the trace cable and power supply cable J1 is correctly connected x indicates the trace cable or power supply cable J1 that is not correctly connected x CN1 CN2 CN3 or J1 XXXXXXXX REGISTER ERROR W DATA xxxx R DATA xxxx An error occurred in the register XXXXxXxxXx Name of
283. rnal sequential break mode 2 A break occurs when break conditions set by Break Condition U3 2 1 are satisfied in the sequence of 3 2 1 sb3 Internal sequential break mode 3 A break occurs when break conditions set by Break Condition U4 3 2 1 are satisfied in the sequence of 4 3 2 1 measurement Sets time interval measurement mode 1 measurement2 Sets time interval measurement mode 2 measurement3 Sets time interval measurement mode 3 283 Pin Mode Description timcb Measures the execution time with the execution time measurement function by specifying the condition no_break Temporarily disables the software and hardware break conditions Description This command displays and sets emulation mode during user program execution Examples 1 To set the emulation mode so that the user program is executed by inputting the RES signal to the MCU at intervals of 100 ms GP EML MODE 100MS To display the current emulation mode during user program execution GP The display format is as follows gt GP Emulator emulation mode Cyclic reset 100ms Notes When the user selects 6 5us 9 8us 50us 100us 500us 1ms 5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms or 1s for the emulation mode the emulator will disable all trace and break conditions Also the emulator cannot halt tracing when the user selects the Halt button in the Trace window When the user selects measurementl measurement2 measurement3 or timcb for the
284. rotect the emulator from dust Avoid subjecting the emulator to excessive vibration Refer to section 1 2 Environmental Conditions 4 Protect the emulator from excessive impacts and stresses Before using the emulator s power supply check its specifications such as power voltage and frequency When moving the emulator take care not to vibrate or otherwise damage it After connecting the cable check that it is connected correctly For details refer to section 3 Preparation before Use Supply power to the emulator and connected parts after connecting all cables Cables must not be connected or removed while the power is on For details on differences between the MCU and the emulator refer to appendix E 6 Differences between the Emulator and the MCU 1 2 Environmental Conditions CAUTION Observe the conditions listed in table 1 1 when using the emulator The following environmental conditions must be satisfied otherwise the user system and the emulator will not operate normally The USER PROGRAM will be LOST Table 1 1 Environmental Conditions Item Specifications Temperature Operating 10 to 35 C Storage 10 to 50 C Humidity Operating 35 to 80 RH no condensation Storage 35 to 80 RH no condensation Vibration Operating 2 45 m s max Storage 4 9 m s max Transportation 14 7 m s max AC input power Voltage 100 V to 240 V AC Frequency 50 60 Hz Power consumption 200 VA Ambient g
285. routine are accessed but only on those bus cycles where the specified conditions are matched Table 5 62 shows the conditions for the subroutine range trace mode When all of the specified conditions are satisfied an AND condition trace information will be acquired Table 5 62 Conditions of Trace Mode within a Subroutine Range Break Condition Description Address bus Satisfied when the value on the address bus matches the specified value Data bus Satisfied when the value on the data bus matches the specified value Access type condition Satisfied when the access type matches the specified bus status condition Read write cycle Satisfied when the cycle is a read write cycle as specified External interrupt signal Satisfied when the levels of the external interrupt signals matches the specified condition External probe signal Satisfied when the levels of the external probe PRB signals matches the specified condition Subroutine Range Trace conditions that can be specified for channels 1 3 5 and 7 of Trace Conditions A and B are shown in table 5 63 Table 5 63 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions Condition Trace Condition A 1 3 5 7 Trace Condition B 1 3 5 7 Address bus Data bus Access type Read Write External interrupt O OO O O OF O O OO O O OF O External probe Note O Can be specified X Cannot be specified Trace Condition A1 is used as
286. rval of approximately 500 ms the display of the specified memory contents while the user program is being executed A color may be applied to indicate the contents that have been modified since the last update of the display Allows the setting of a maximum of 8 points auto update memory items each running for a maximum of 32 bytes Allows the display of memory contents in ASCII bit byte word longword or single precision floating point formats with or without a sign and in decimal or hexadecimal 237 The following dialog boxes are used to set items for the auto update memory function Table 5 103 Dialog Boxes for Setting Auto Update Memory Items Dialog Box Description Auto update Memory Add Dialog box for registering items for the auto update memory function Select the address format of display and number of bytes of memory to be displayed AUM Target Details Dialog box for registering other settings for auto update memory items In particular those conditions that depend on the target MCU are set here In an auto update of memory the contents of the specified area of memory are displayed in the AUM window The AUM window is displayed by selecting Auto update Memory Window from the View menu and registering the Auto update Memory in the Auto update Memory Add dialog box E AUM ON H 00003FD0 32bytes Word oj x ress Data OOOO3FDO 0000 20DA 0000 9000 0000 53DC 0000 2704 OOO
287. s eee cee cseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseceseceaecsaecaeeseeens 173 Condition A B C Page Options oo eee ee cee cee ceseceeecseecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneensees 175 Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 176 Pages of the Condition Dialog Box Pages ee ee eecesecesecnsecseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 178 Range Trace Condi trons a sccsces eiye opdevancuscetepsesec beste scp E OSEERE ESS 181 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions eee eseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceseceaeeaesaeeseeens 182 Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 183 Conditions of Trace Mode within a Subroutine Range ow eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 185 XV Table 5 63 Table 5 64 Table 5 65 Table 5 66 Table 5 67 Table 5 68 Table 5 69 Table 5 70 Table 5 71 Table 5 72 Table 5 73 Table 5 74 Table 5 75 Table 5 77 Table 5 78 Table 5 79 Table 5 80 Table 5 81 Table 5 82 Table 5 83 Table 5 84 Table 5 85 Table 5 86 Table 5 87 Table 5 88 Table 5 89 Table 5 90 Table 5 91 Table 5 92 Table 5 93 Table 5 94 Table 5 95 Table 5 96 Table 5 97 Table 5 98 Table 5 99 Specifiable Range Trace Conditions eee cseeseececeeeeseeeeeeeseceseceaecaecsaeeneeeas 185 Trace Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 Dialog Box Pages 186 Time Stamp Group Box Options cece eeceeseeeecesecesecsecsaecneecaeesaeeeaeeeeeees 189 Trace Information Items and Display Format in Trace Window eee 192 Trace Search Func
288. s Table E 4 Relations between the Type of Step Function and Available Break Conditions Step In Step Over Step Out Hardware break BREAK CONDITION A B C O O O Internal break BREAK CONDITION U internal X X X sequential break Hardware sequential break BREAK CONDITION O X X SEQUENTIAL A B Software break X X xX Software sequential break X X X Timeout break X X X Break due to trace buffer overflow X X X Note O Break conditions are enabled X Break conditions are disabled 356 E 8 Displaying and Modifying the Contents of Memory E 8 1 Suspension of Program Execution Reference Periods Table E 5 shows the reference value for displaying and modifying the memory contents during user program execution Table E 5 Suspension of Program Execution Reference Values Period Method of Access Condition Suspended Short breaks Read Reading a 256 byte longword from the 4 2 ms internal RAM Write Writing a longword to the internal RAM 1 2 ms Parallel access Read Reading a longword from the internal 320 ns RAM Write Writing a longword to the internal RAM 320 ns Auto update Memory Execution of the user program does not stop Table E 6 shows the environment in which these measurements were obtained Table E 6 Measurement Environment Item Setting System clock 6 12 5 MHz Clock mode Clock mode 0 H UDI clock 2 5 MHz E 8 2 Short Break When memory is displayed or modified by a short break dur
289. s on the error messages displayed during ESI operation refer to Troubleshooting in the ESI help file For help on the ESI select SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software Tools System Install Tool from the Start menu 3 6 Initiating the HDI and Checking the Emulator The next step is to check that the emulator and the HDI are initiated correctly Turn on the emulator after confirming that the S7 and S8 DIP switches of SW1 on the emulator are turned on 52 Select SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software Hitachi Debugging Interface from the Start menu Ion Programs 00S Emulator Software E Al Hitachi Debugging Interface Windows98 Figure 3 20 Start Menu Initiating the HDI The Select Session dialog box will be displayed Select the target emulator name in the combo box then click the OK button Select Session x fe a Figure 3 21 Select Session Dialog Box When the HDI is started up for the first time a Driver Details dialog box will be displayed Use Driver to select the correct driver for the connected interface PC interface board PCI interface board PC interface card or LAN adapter and click the Close button Refer to table 3 4 Types of Connections and Drivers The example below is when the emulator is to be connected to the PC interface via the ISA bus 53 Driver Emulator ISA Driver v Details Interface ISA Channel d0
290. s the low level of the MRES signal as a search condition Don t Care The MRES signal is not a search condition d Time Page Use the Time page to specify time stamp conditions for use in the search for external bus trace information General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time roo Iam T Don t Care C Point Range From fo jf fo ffo fo H M S US wfo Afo Afo oe H M US Figure 5 65 Trace Filter Dialog Box Time Page 199 Table 5 73 Time Page Options Option Description Don t Care No time stamp condition is set Point Sets the trace search condition to values above the value set as From Range Sets the range set by From to To as a trace search condition From Sets the time stamp value from which the valid range starts as a numerical value decimal When any number is omitted 0 is assumed H hour 0 to 999 M minute 0 to 59 S second 0 to 59 US microsecond 0 to 999999 To When Range is selected sets the time stamp value of the end of the range of valid values as a numerical value decimal When any number is omitted 0 is assumed H hour 0 to 999 M minute 0 to 59 S second 0 to 59 US microsecond 0 to 999999 Notes Do not use this page if number of clock cycles have been selected for display Trace Find Function This function makes the display jump to the trace information item that satisfies the spe
291. scription This command sets the emulator s emulation memory Example To set the address range from H 4000000 to H 4FFFFF as the emulation memory area MS H 4000000 H 4fffff EMULATOR Notes e The user must not allocate the emulation memory to an area other than CS e The user cannot set the memory map over the reserved area e The standard emulation memory cannot be allocated in the single chip mode 286 6 2 15 Performance Commands PS PC PA e Setting PERFORMANCE SET PS e Cancellation PERFORMANCE CLEAR PC e Display PERFORMANCE_ANALYSYS PA Command syntax and parameters e Setting ps channel lt channel_number gt lt modeopt gt lt nameopt gt lt startopt gt lt endopt gt lt timeopt gt lt countopt gt lt accessopt gt lt subroutineopt gt e Cancellation pe channel lt channel_number gt e Display pa lt display_mode gt Parameter Type Description lt channel_number gt Numeric Sets the performance channel number from 1 to 8 lt display_mode gt Keyword Sets the display mode of program execution state address Displays subroutine address list count Displays execution time and execution count in numeric graph Displays an execution time ratio in graph form default init Initializes measurement information 287 Description of the ps command Parameter lt modeopt gt Description Sets the conditions to acquire data relating to performance analysis
292. scription Sets the unit of time to be counted by the counter for measuring execution time Select 52 us 1 6 us or 20 ns Initial value 20 ns Bus timeout Sets the timeout detection period for emulation commands Select 100 us 1 6 ms 13 ms or 210 ms Initial value 100 us Multi break PRB1 Selects whether or not the multibreak function uses external probe 1 to break execution by multiple emulators one after another is enabled during execution Initial value Disabled Internal ROM Option Write enable for the internal ROM Selects whether or not writing to the internal ROM area is enabled Initial value Disabled RES signal Selects whether or not the input of the RES signals is enabled Initial value Enabled BREQ signal Selects whether or not the input of the BREQ signals is enabled Initial value Enabled WAIT signal Selects whether or not the input of the WAIT signals is enabled Initial value Enabled 103 Execution Mode2 Page Use this page to set sequential conditions Condition A and Condition B trace break or unused and to set the conditions for the output of a trigger when a break occurs Figure 5 4 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode2 Page 104 Table 5 6 Execution Mode2 Page Option Description Sequence Sets a sequential break or trace Not used The conditions in Condition A are not set as sequential break or trace
293. se of the diagnostic program modify the Diagnostic Program resource information in the way shown below The dialog box for confirming the initiation of the diagnostic program will not be displayed on the initiation of the HDI Diagnostic Program N 3 8 Uninstallation 3 8 1 Uninstalling Software This section describes the procedure for uninstalling software Be sure to terminate all executing applications before uninstalling software Select Settings Control Panel from the Start menu Double click the Add Remove Programs icon Select SH7046 E8000S Emulator Software from the list of applications installed on the tabbed page Install Uninstall and click the Add Remove button Uninstall according to the directions on the screen The setup program is executed again to allow the modification correction or removal of the installed applications Select removal to uninstall applications Note Shared files may be detected during uninstallation Do not remove shared files if they might be used by other HDIs When Windows NT 4 0 is used you might be asked whether you want to remove information registered in the driver s registry Do not remove information registered in the registry if it might be used by other HDIs If other HDIs will no longer start up because of uninstallation reinstall the other HDIs 3 8 2 Uninstalling the Acrobat Reader Only uninstall the Acrobat Reader if it is necessary Click Settings Contr
294. settings Table 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions Setting Item Description Emulator settings Clock Note Use the Selects the clock supplied to drive the MCU Configuration dialog Conditions for emulation box to make these settings Sets conditions for emulation in terms of the following items Operating mode during execution emulation mode Interrupts during step execution Enabled or disabled Memory access during emulation Enabled or disabled Minimum unit for the execution time measurement counter Timeout detection period for emulation commands Entering multibreak mode Enabled or disabled Writing to the internal ROM area Enabled or disabled Input of control signals Enabled or disabled Sequential conditions for Condition A and Condition B Controls conditions for trigger output during breaks Enabled or disabled Table 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions cont Seiting Item MCU settings Operating mode of the user Use the CPU system Operating Mode Description Specifies whether the input of the MCU operating mode pins of the user system is enabled dialog box to make Clock mode Sets the mode for the MCU driving clock these settings Operating mode Sets the operating mode Number of pins for the supported MCU Sets the number of pins for the supported MCU Pin select register Sets the registers that select the pins for
295. splay returns to the Condition A page The specified trace conditions will now be displayed as condition 1 in the Condition list box Click the Close button to close the Trace Acquisition dialog box 186 Range trace conditions for the other channels are specified in the same way The options on each page are the same as those in the corresponding Break Condition Al to A8 B1 to B8 C1 to C8 dialog boxes except the General page For details of the options on each page refer to section 5 5 3 Hardware Break Trigger Output A low level pulse is output from the trigger output probe when the conditions specified for Trace Condition B are satisfied during execution of the user program Timeout Trace Stop Trace acquisition can be stopped when execution time or number of passes exceeds the respective conditions timeout or maximum number of passes specified in Performance Analysis 1 To use this function select Timeout trace of Performance Analysis under Emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box Configuration Ea General Execution Model Execution Mode CPU Operating Mode CPU SH7046 Clock Emulator Clock 12 5MHz2 Bd Emulation mode Timeout trace of Performance analysis 7 I Interrupts during step Driver Emulator PCI Card Driver Figure 5 56 Configuration Dialog Box General Page Specify the timeout on the Time Out page and the maximum number of passes in execution on the C
296. ss Longword data is read and written in two word cycles A data condition is only valid for word access when specified as longword An address condition is only valid for a longword access cycle when specified as a multiple of two Word access Word data is read and written in single bus cycles A data condition is only valid for word access when specified as word An address condition is only valid for a longword access cycle when specified as a multiple of two Byte access Byte data is read and written in single bus cycles A data condition is only valid for word access when specified as word Any address condition whether an even or odd number is valid 354 3 8 bit bus area This area is accessed by byte four byte accesses for a longword and two byte accesses for a word Either an odd or even number is a valid address specification but the data specification must be for a byte E 5 Hardware Sequential Break Trace Function 1 Six or more external bus cycles are required between the satisfaction of each condition that is specified 2 When a user program is executed with the address of a PC address condition specified a sequential break or a sequential trace stop may not operate correctly Specify the address of the instruction following the address condition as the PC then execute the user program E 6 Differences between the Emulator and the MCU 1 Note that the emulator initializes some general or control regist
297. t in the BP column To set a software sequential breakpoint use the Break window or the BSS command 243 244 Section 6 Command Line 6 1 List Format This section explains the format for the command list in section 6 2 Some commands are explained on a single page Some commands are explained over several pages 6 1 1 Description The entries are in the following format Command name abbreviation Command syntax and parameters Shows input format for each command Description Describes the usage and function of each command Examples Example of usage Notes Notes on using the command Some entries have no notes 6 1 2 Format Symbols used in the command format have the following meanings lt gt Contents of lt gt are parameters Parameters enclosed by can be omitted lt gt The parameter shown in the left lt gt can be expressed in the format in the right lt gt l One or both can be selected non exclusively Hither of two or one can be selected exclusively The parameters of each command are explained in the tables in section 6 2 245 6 1 3 Parameter Type Input 1 Numerical parameters Numerical parameters must be supplied as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal numbers symbols or expressions A symbol can consist of up to 32 characters Operators e g and can be used to delimit expressions 2 Keyword parameters The bold faced characters in the tables
298. t internal breakpoint channel 2 to break on the address bus value of H 1000000 before it is executed on the instruction fetch cycle lt addropt gt BCUS CHANNEL 2 ADDRESS H 1000000 PC To set internal breakpoint channel 3 to break on the address bus value of H 1000000 before it is executed on the instruction fetch cycle lt addropt gt BCUS CHANNEL 3 ADDRESS H 1000000 PCAFTER 261 4 To set lt accessopt gt as the execution cycle and to set lt r wopt gt as the read cycle on internal breakpoint channel 4 BCUS CHANNEL 4 ACCESS DAT DIRECTION READ 5 To specify address bus value H 1000000 as a reset point of the internal sequential break BCUS RESET ADDRESS H 1000000 6 To display the internal breakpoint channel settings BCUD CHANNEL 1 Display gt BCUD CHANNEL 1 Break Condition U1l Enable address H 1000000 data mask B Q byte direction write 7 To display all internal breakpoints BCUD Display gt BCUD Break Condition Ul Enable address H 1000000 data mask B Q byte direction write Break Condition U2 Enable address H 1000000 pc Break Condition U3 Enable address H 1000000 pcafter Break Condition U4 Enable access dat direction read Break Condition U Reset Enable address H 1000000 8 To disable internal breakpoint channel conditions BCUE CHANNEL 1 DISABLE 9 To enable all internal breakpoint conditions BCUE ENABLE 10 To cancel internal breakpoint channel 2 conditions BCUC CHANNEL 2
299. t is compiled with the optimization option enabled will not be displayed correctly Check the generated object code by displaying the Disassemble window e Variable name specification When a name other than a variable name such as a symbol name or function name is specified no data is displayed Example The function name is main main e Array display When array elements exceed 1000 elements from after 1000 will not be displayed 347 E 1 4 Symbol Description for Expression When a symbol of the following condition is described in an expression enclose the symbol name with and e When a symbol is defined by a load module and the symbol name includes a space Example func short long e When a symbol is registered in the Labels window and the symbol name includes characters other than alphanumeric characters Example ASM_DATA1 10 E 1 5 Register Function The default input radix in the Register dialog box is hexadecimal irrespective of the Radix display When a radix other than a hexadecimal is input specify the prefix code such as B E 1 6 Session File Function When the Load last session on startup check box in the HDI Options dialog box is valid and the HDI is activated loading the session file can be stopped by clicking the Stop button during HDI activation E 1 7 Command Line Window e Command file To display the message Not currently available while executing a command file
300. t settings gt X A B C n Channel number from 1 to 8 The following will be displayed when a hardware sequential condition has been specified Trace Condition X Sequential lt Enable Disable gt n lt Settings gt X A B n Sequential number starts from 1 and condition is satisfied at the maximum of 7 or R for a reset point Examples 1 To set address bus values from H 10027C to H 100304 as the address condition and the write cycle as the read write cycle condition of Trace Condition A on channel 2 range trace TAS A CHANNEL 2 TYPE RANGE ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE To set a value of H 4750 as the condition for the data bus and the read cycle as the read write cycle condition of Trace Condition B on channel 4 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 4 TYPE STOP MASK H 4750 LONG DIRECTION READ To set a value of H 11111111 as a data condition and external probe 4 low external probe 3 high external probe 2 low and external probe 1 high as the external probe conditions of Trace Condition A on channel 5 trace stop TAS A CHANNEL 5 TYPE STOP DATA H 11111111 LONG PRB 0101 To set the low NMI as the NMI signal condition for Trace Condition B on channel 7 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 7 TYPE STOP NMI LOW 303 To set bus value H 1000 as the address condition for Trace Condition B on channel 1 trace stop TAS B CHANNEL 1 TYPE STOP ADDRESS MASK H 1000 To set address bus values outside the
301. te seee see tesuss se dees sieren sea es o EEE hE ree EERSTE orai Raia 148 Entry List Page Options 0 eee neerieeeeoe Eo er one Eie e ei ES 149 Condition A B Page Options When a Hardware Sequential Break Has Been Specife dhera eree S E O E EESE E NEEE SEEE EPEE Mesblesstsseeurtesy 152 History Page Options s r a aie ae eee See S 154 Bntty List Pagse Optons sns eie eE Ea A a S SR 156 Internal Break Conditions esesseeseeeseseersseersseeerssreressertesresrestsseerrnresteeesrenrseeersse 157 Specifiable Internal Break Conditions seseseeessseseseesesreerssrsreeesreeresrerrnserrenresreet 158 Condition U Page Options 20 0 ec eeceeceeeceseceseceseceeecaeecaeeeaeseeeseaeeeeeseeeeeensees 159 Break Condition U1 U4 Reset Dialog Box Pages eee ee eeeecesecseeeeeeeee 159 Address Page Options iseinean ienes rte eeke Ta RNAS p EEIE ORT ARESE 161 Data Page Options ersen ne e e en a aloes coseeaenes cevseheesdpeepsufeess 162 Bus State Page OptiSeo reee eee n oT Ei ea upe SES 163 Count Page OPON S nise aean Gi S e E E R A E SERES 164 Break Condition U Reset Page Options 0 00 eee eee ees eeeeceseeesecesecnsecaeesaeenee 165 Internal Sequential Break Modes Break Condition U1 to U4 eee eeeeeeneees 166 Emulation mode Options Break Condition U1 to U4 eee eeeceeneeenteeeeneees 167 Trace Acquisition Modessa n E E EEA T aneeen 171 Trace Stop Conditions nee n a R E E E EER AE 173 Specifiable Trace Stop Condition
302. tem is not possible The input of the RES BREQ or WAIT signal during execution or step execution can be disabled by a setting in the Configuration dialog box 344 D 5 Bus State Controller The wait state controller has a programmable wait mode and a WAIT pin input mode The programmable wait mode is valid when the emulation memory or user external memory is accessed but input to the user WAIT pin is only valid when user external memory is accessed D 6 A D Converter The A D converter has AVcc AVss and ADTRG pins as well as the analog input pins Because the A D converter operates with an independent power supply connect AVcc the power supply pin to the A D power supply on the user system Notes 1 When not using the A D converter connect AVcc to Vcc 2 Because the user system interface cable printed circuit boards and protective circuits are connected between the MCU and the user system in the emulator pod the conversion precision is lower than that of the MCU At final debugging of the user system using the A D converter use the actual SH7046 series F ZTAT microcomputer chip 345 D 7 Emulator Status and Internal Modules Some internal modules do not operate when the emulator is in break mode Table D 1 shows the relation between the emulator s state and operation of the internal modules Table D 1 Emulator State and Operation of Internal Modules Operation During Operation Dur
303. tem will leave trace halt mode if trace halt mode has been specified 5 5 8 Forced Break on Writing to a Write Protected Area or Access to an Access Prohibited Area Use the memory allocation function to set up write protected areas including the internal ROM area and access prohibited areas For details refer to section 5 11 Memory Spaces 5 5 9 Break Due to Trace Buffer Overflow A break occurs when the trace buffer in the E8000S station overflows during trace acquisition Select Break in Buffer Over Flow on the Trace Mode page of the Trace Acquisition dialog box Trace Acquisition Trace Mode Condition A Condition B Condition C Mode M DMA DTC Cycle Trace Buffer Over Flow Time Stamp l 20ns hi Close Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 44 Trace Acquisition Dialog Box Trace Buffer Overflow 168 5 5 10 Timeout Break A break occurs when the execution time or number of passes exceeds the conditions specified on the respective pages of Performance Analysis 1 Select Timeout break of Performance analysis from Emulation mode in the Configuration dialog box Execution Modet Execution Mode2 CPU Operating Mode Emulator Clock 4MHz v Timeout break of Performance analysis v Figure 5 45 Configuration Dialog Box Timeout Break Open the Performance 1 dialog box from the Performance window set the conditions on the Time Out page timeout and Count page maximu
304. tenresrenrssrerrnresrenreseeeees 150 5 5 5 Internal Break Break Condition U cccccceessceceeneceeeneeecesseeeecsenaeeeeseeeeenenee 157 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break eee eee cee cree ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesecesecaecsaeenaeenes 166 D 9 7 Forced Breakssciasis EEE tach enediivacssiisericsnt amc 168 5 5 8 Forced Break on Writing to a Write Protected Area or Access to an Access Prohibited Ated siisii steres oet reen Erite E aneri EErEE TE EE SEE 168 5 5 9 Break Due to Trace Buffer Overflow sssesssseessereesseresrssesreeresresrssreersresreneesrenees 168 5 5 10 Timeout Break ss 3 5cssee 95 225d secs eoe sp teo gs thee ste Sodas tats ts cote teense RE TOERE Soh eaS TESST ia 169 Realtime Trace Functions c cee eecescesecesecssecseecseecseeeseseeeeseeeeeeeaeeeseesesaecsaecsaessaesaeeeas 170 5 6 1 External Bus Trace Function cece iseer E re r erT E RE E 170 3 6 2 Extemal Bus Trace TIMING s sc ecseceshesuecisesesevsebenseveey sug e I e EE n tes 189 5 6 3 Trac Displays essa A A Soke ees Re 190 3 6 4 Trace SearchvPunchons ienen ir E e ai a E eS 193 Measurement of Execution Time sesssseessseesesreessseeereserrreestenresterrssreresrestentesrentesrerresenees 201 5 7 1 Measuring Execution Time to a Break or Termination cies eeeereeeeee 201 5 7 2 Measuring Execution Time between Satisfaction of Specified Conditions 203 Performance Analysis FUnCtion cece e en a n E Ee N T E S 206 5 8 1 Me
305. ter Description lt mode gt Enables or disables the coverage tracing function When off is specified neither cve nor cvd command is available on Enabled off Disabled default lt addropt gt Sets the address range in which the result of coverage tracing will be placed for display Parameter rom can be specified only in the internal ROM enabled mode start lt address gt end lt address gt lt address gt Address numeric To specify one address range of internal RAM H FFFFOO000 to H FFFF3FFF ram1 To specify the other address range of internal RAM H FFFFCOOO to H FFFFFFFF ram2 To specify the address range of internal ROM H 00000000 to H OOOFFFFF rom lt dispopt gt Sets the display format of the result of coverage trace When omitted the executed address range is displayed To display the data as a list of the addresses of instructions that have been executed address To display the data as a list of the addresses of instructions that have not been executed address not To display the data as a list of the addresses of instructions that have been executed or not with the dump format in byte units dump To display the rate of executed or non executed address rate 274 Description e Setting This command sets whether or not the coverage trace function is used e Cancellation This command initializes the result of a coverage trace e Display This command displays the result of coverage t
306. ter collectively referred to as Hitachi pursues a policy of continuing improvement in design performance and safety of the emulator product Hitachi reserves the right to change wholly or partially the specifications design user s manual and other documentation at any time without notice Target User of the Emulator Product This emulator product should only be used by those who have carefully read and thoroughly understood the information and restrictions contained in the user s manual Do not attempt to use the emulator product until you fully understand its mechanism It is highly recommended that first time users be instructed by users that are well versed in the operation of the emulator product RENESAS LIMITED WARRANTY Hitachi warrants its emulator products to be manufactured in accordance with published specifications and free from defects in material and or workmanship Hitachi at its option will repair or replace any emulator products returned intact to the factory transportation charges prepaid which Hitachi upon inspection determine to be defective in material and or workmanship The foregoing shall constitute the sole remedy for any breach of Hitachi s warranty See the Hitachi warranty booklet for details on the warranty period This warranty extends only to you the original Purchaser It is not transferable to anyone who subsequently purchases the emulator product from you Hitachi is not liable for any claim made
307. th the DMA DTC cycle access dma lt countopt gt Specifies the pass count for the breakpoint This parameter can be used when lt channel_number gt is 1 Any value from H 1 to H FFFF can be specified Description Setting Sets an internal break condition When the specified condition is satisfied the user program execution breaks For conditions that can be set see the description of BCUS command lt option gt A sequential break can be specified by using an internal break When sb1 sb2 or sb3 is specified with the GO_OPTION command up to four levels of internal sequential breaks of Break Condition U1 to U4 can be used Cancellation Cancels the current internal breakpoints When the channel number is omitted cancels all internal breakpoints Display Displays set internal breakpoints When the channel number is omitted the emulator displays all internal breakpoints The display format is as follows Break Condition Un lt Enable Disable gt lt Settings gt n Number Enable or Disable Enables or disables current internal breakpoints When the channel number is omitted enables or disables all current internal breakpoints Examples 1 To set an address bus value of H 1000000 lt addropt gt byte data with the lowest bit zero DO bit lt dataopt gt and the write cycle lt r wopt gt for internal breakpoint channel 1 BCUS CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS H 1000000 DATA MASK B 0Q BYTE DIRECTION WRITE To se
308. the search range 308 Description of the ts command lt option gt Parameter lt addropt gt Description Specifies address condition To specify an address condition with no special conditions type all lt address gt To specify an address condition for the program counter type pc lt address gt To specify an address condition in the emulation area type ext To specify an address condition in the internal ROM area type rom To specify an address condition in the internal I O area type io To specify an address condition in the internal RAM area type ram Parameter lt address gt is specified as follows To specify an address condition as a single address address lt value gt To specify an address condition as a range of addresses address lt value1 gt to lt value2 gt To specify an address value with masking address mask lt maskdata gt lt value gt Address numeric lt value1 gt Start address numeric lt value2 gt End address numeric lt maskdata gt Specifies mask data 309 Parameter lt dataopt gt Description Specifies data condition To specify an 8 bit data trace search condition data lt data gt byte To specify a 16 bit data trace search condition data lt data gt word To specify a 32 bit data trace search condition data lt data gt long lt data gt Specify data value numeric Mask specification is as follows To specify an 8 bit data trace search con
309. the user system power is turned off or the clock is stopped according to the emulator state Notes 1 When the user system power is turned off the turn off of the user system power will be detected before the clock will stop the Vcc level used to detect switching off of the power can be set in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box 241 2 The meaning of clock will stop above is the stop of the clock while the user system power is still turned on During User Program Execution e When user system power is turned off VCC Down is displayed in the status bar When power is turned on emulation will resume and the PC of the currently executing user program will be displayed e When clock is stopped User system not ready is displayed and is linked down When using the emulator continuously link up again During Break e When user system power is turned off and clock is stopped User system not ready is displayed and is linked down When using the emulator continuously link up again 5 15 Input Format 5 15 1 Entering Masks Address bus conditions and data bus conditions can be input with masks Addresses can be masked in bits or in 4 bit units When a bit is masked it always satisfies the condition To specify a mask for an address condition specify the mask value in the Mask area The mask for data conditions is specified in the Data area There is a separate Mask list on the Data page of the Br
310. then click the OK button to set that condition as a hardware break condition here a hardware break condition has been set as Break Condition A1 To modify a hardware break condition after it has been created click its entry in the Entry List then click the Edit button to open the Condition A B dialog box Modify the condition then click the OK button 149 To set a new hardware break condition click the New button to open the Condition A B dialog box Specify a condition then click the OK button Any entry in the history of hardware break condition settings displayed in the Condition list on the History page can be registered in the Condition list on the Entry List page Click the entry to select the condition from the Condition list on the History page then click the Entry button After the condition has been registered in the Condition list on the Entry List page it is deleted from the Condition list on the History page To delete a hardware break condition that has been set click the condition s entry to select it from the Condition list box then click the Delete button To duplicate a hardware break condition that has been set click the condition s entry to select it from the Condition list box then click the Duplicate button 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break Overview A hardware sequential break occurs after the selected of channels of a hardware break condition have been satisfied
311. then connected to the user system the emulator will malfunction The emulator s signal ground is connected to the user system s signal ground via the evaluation chip board In the E8000S station the signal ground and frame ground are connected figure 3 8 At the user system connect the frame ground only do not connect the signal ground to the frame ground If it is difficult to separate the frame ground from the signal ground in the user system ground the frame to the same outlet as the 100 V to 240 V power supply of the emulator station figure 3 9 so that the ground potentials become even Signal line E80008S station Evaluation chip board User system Signal ground Frame ground Ground Figure 3 8 Connecting the System Ground 33 A WARNING Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST The user system must be connected to an appropriate ground so as to minimize noise and the adverse effects of ground loops When connecting the evaluation chip board and the user system confirm that the ground pins of the evaluation chip board are firmly connected to the user system s ground Emulator power User system supply cable power supply cable _ _
312. tine within the address range is suspended when execution moves outside the specified range and is restarted when execution returns to the specified address range of the subroutine The execution count count of the number of passes is incremented every time the lt end address gt of the specified address range is passed The execution times of instructions at addresses outside the range that are called from within the specified range are not included in the results of measurement Set the conditions in the Performance 1 to 8 dialog box Set the timeout value and maximum number of passes as the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 2 Measurement is executed in the same way as in mode 1 above except that the execution times of instructions at addresses outside the range that are called from within the specified range are included in the results of measurement The emulator will also measure the maximum minimum execution times over the specified range Set the timeout value and maximum number of passes as the conditions for Performance Analysis 1 Subroutine Time Measurement Mode 3 Measurement starts at the lt start address range gt and halts when it reaches the lt end address range gt The execution count is incremented every time the specified lt end address range gt is passed Access Area Count Measurement Mode Measures the number of times the area set in lt call subrou
313. tine address range gt is accessed by the subroutine set as lt start address gt and lt end address gt The subroutine execution time is measured in subroutine time measurement mode 1 Subroutine Call Count Measurement Mode Measures the number of times the subroutine set in lt call subroutine address range gt is called by the subroutine set as lt start address gt and lt end address gt The subroutine execution time is measured in subroutine time measurement mode 1 Note Subroutine execution times are measured by using the value of address bus on the prefetch cycle When the start or end address is set to an address of the instruction after a branch 207 instruction or the slot after a delayed branch instruction correct measurement is not possible In the access area count measurement mode accesses by the DTC DMA are not counted e Example of subroutine time measurement mode 1 An example of subroutine time measurement mode will be described below Here the start address is assumed to be H 1000 and the end address to be H 1 FFF When the user program is running the emulator will measure the execution time of the user program in the address range from H 1000 to H 1 FFF When the user program jumps to address H 3000 measurement by the emulator will stop When the user program returns from address H 3FFF measurement by the emulator will start again Address moor Address H 1000 Address H 3000 x MCS Measurement range
314. tion and execution from the reset state is thus periodically repeated When the RES signal is input to the MCU a low level pulse is concurrently output on the trigger output probe This function is useful for observing waveforms from the initial state for example during a power on reset up to a specified time The reset intervals can be selected from among 6 5 us 9 8 us 50 us 100 us 500 us 1 ms 5 ms 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 500 ms or 1 s Cycle Reset x x times to repeat 6 5us 9 8us 50us 100us 500us ims 5ms 10ms 50ms 100ms 500ms or 1s Internal sequential break mode An internal sequential break can be specified by using Break Condition U1 to U4 or Reset For details refer to section 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break Break Condition U Sequential X X 2 gt 1 3 gt 2 gt 1 or 4 gt 3 gt 2 gt 1 Timeout break mode A break occurs when the Performance Analysis 1 Time Out specification or Count maximum number of passes specification is satisfied For details refer to section 5 5 10 Timeout Break Timeout break of Performance analysis Timeout trace stop mode Acquisition of trace information is terminated when the Performance Analysis 1 Time Out specification or Count maximum number of passes specification is satisfied For details refer to section 5 6 1 Timeout Trace Stop Timeout trace of Performance analysis 117 Table 5 15 Emulation Modes cont
315. tion A B are set and when the user specifies break or trace with the CSQ command Therefore the user must set Break Condition A B or Trace Condition A B for hardware sequential break or trace sequential stop e The user cannot use this command to enable or disable sequential hardware breaks during user program execution 264 6 2 4 Software Break Commands BP BC BD BE Setting BREAKPOINT BP Cancellation BREAKPOINT_CLEAR BC Display BREAKPOINT_DISPLAY BD Enable or Disable BREAKPOINT_ENABLE BE Command syntax and parameters Setting bp lt address gt count lt count gt Cancellation be lt address gt Display bd Enable or Disable be lt address gt lt mode gt Parameter Type Description lt address gt Numeric Sets breakpoint address When the user sets an odd address the emulator will round it down to an even address lt count gt Numeric Sets the breakpoint pass count within the range from H 1 to H FFFF When the user does not specify the pass count the setting will be H 1 lt mode gt Keyword Enables or disables breakpoints enable Enables breakpoint setting disable Disables breakpoint setting Description Setting This command sets software breakpoints The emulator sets a software breakpoint by replacing the contents of the specified address with a break instruction H 0000 Up to 255 software breakpoints can be set After emulation passes the specified number of breakpo
316. tion of the BREQ signal check box of the Configuration dialog box WAIT signal Selection of whether or not to permit the input of the WAIT signal selection of the WAIT signal check box of the Configuration dialog box Output trigger TRGB The condition for the output of a pulse from the trigger output pin the setting in the TRGB Option group box of the Configuration dialog box Output trigger TRGU The condition for the output of a pulse from the trigger output pin the setting in the TRGU Option group box of the Configuration dialog box Emulation mode The emulator s operating mode the setting in the Emulation mode combo box of the Configuration dialog box Prohibit R W on the fly Whether or not memory access is inhibited while the user program is being executed the setting in the Prohibit R W on the fly check box of the Configuration dialog box Interrupts during step Whether or not a user interrupt is permitted during single step execution the setting information in the Interrupts during step check box of the Configuration dialog box Note The settings may be different from those in the CPU Operating Mode dialog box For details refer to appendix E 9 CPU Operating Mode The Memory sheet has the following contents Table 5 92 Memory Sheet Configuration Item Description Target Device Configuration The memory map stat
317. tions ISA Bus Specifications or the user s manual For details on other connections refer to the related user s manual To install the provided software insert the CD R in the CD ROM drive If there are any applications running exit from them before installing the software Click Run from the Start menu The Run dialog box will be displayed Enter lt Drive gt 7046 setup exe and click the OK button lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive Proceed with installation by following instructions provided by the install wizard 3 4 1 Setting Up the PCI Interface Board on Windows 95 Windows 98 or Windows Me When Using the PC Interface Board e Install the provided software Select PCI Card Driver as the component e Exit the operating system shut down the host computer and turn off the power switch e Install the PCI interface board into the host computer e Turn on the host computer Hardware will be acknowledged and driver installation will start automatically e Select Search for the best driver for your device for driver installation and select Specify a location for the location e Specify lt Drive gt 7046 DRIVERS PCI 95 for the location lt Drive gt is the CD ROM drive e Check that PCIHEI Rev 1 has been detected and complete driver installation 36 When Using the PC Interface Card e Install the provided software Select PC Card Driver PCMCIA as the component e Install the PC interface c
318. tions for the external interrupt signal IRQO to IRQ7 NMI signal RES signal and MRES signal for use in searching General Address Data Bus State Probe Interrupt Time MIRLO IRLI mR A RR High High High en Low bois Low C Low C Don t Care C Don tCare Don t Care Don t Care IRL4 IRLS m IRLE IRLZ C High C High High High C Low C Low C Low Low Don tCae Don tCare C Don t Care Don t Care MRES High Low Low Low C DontCae C Don t Care Don t Care Figure 5 64 Trace Filter Dialog Box Interrupt Page Table 5 72 Interrupt Page Options IRQO to IRQ7 Group Box Option Description High Sets the high level of the external interrupt signal as a search condition Low Sets the low level of the external interrupt signal as a search condition Don t Care The state of the external interrupt signal is not a search condition 198 NMI Group Box Option Description High Sets the high level of the NMI signal as a search condition Low Sets the low level of the NMI signal as a search condition Don t Care The NMI signal is not a search condition RES Group Box Option Description Low Sets the low level of the RES signal as a search condition Don t Care The RES signal is not a search condition MRES Group Box Option Description Low Set
319. tions yiisc civsioss ces ae Ee E e A E E EEE E Eea 193 General Page Options s scssssisceisec estetssesoettocksssbavestupdivh ssdeasbesvessscescestaeestes SEa TE ssi 194 Trace Search Conditions and Pages in the Trace Filter Dialog Box 195 Address Page Options o csscssebsss cise ersen EER EE E E r EEES 196 Bus State Page Options iniii isin isoerssiereseeer esii eroe eseese E EKE eeose 197 Interrupt Page Options 3555sc cscess se ssee sects seases sda sesdet uses cesses svcd secesscstarsscee SREE S S ESS 198 Tame Page Options iias e ienee op eben cvtavenevbch tubs cocbanacut ce tebe secesseey 200 Measutement Mode Ssenari soup E anne ob eas E RTT EE a 207 Modes that are Available in the Performance to 8 Dialog BoxeS eee 210 Pages of the Performance 1 to 8 Dialog BOX o oo eee eeeeeeceeeceseeneecnneenaeenee 213 Options on the General page 0 0 ee eee cee cseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeecesecesecaecnaessaeeneeeas 214 Options on the Address page When Subroutine time measurement mode 1 2 1S Selected cs cx cceende a e eara E AE r e desextep tend heeds deen Easa 215 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine time measurement mode 3 Re d e Ea D E EE ESE E E S E 215 Options on the Address Page When Access area count measurement mode ES e E D EEE E E E EAE E EE PE E E EEE 216 Options on the Address Page When Subroutine call count measurement mode RAe e E DEEE E E E 218 Options of the Time Out Page
320. top condition has been satisfied Auto update Memory items cannot be added until Restart is selected from the pop up menu of the Trace window When user program is executed in cycle reset mode and execution time measurement mode the auto update memory function is not available When the AUM window is opened in cycle reset mode or execution time measurement mode and a user program is executed while the profile function is valid the automatic updating of Auto update Memory items will be halted When a software break count has been specified the user program will be halted temporarily When the auto update memory display is updated while the user program is halted the AUM window may not be displayed correctly When a software break condition has been specified error message EMULATOR BUSY may be displayed The Auto Update Memory window does not support the Double float type If this is specified an error will occur Controlling and Checking the State of MCU The emulator can select the clock to input to the MCU check the operation power supply and clock state of the user system The functions are useful when debugging the user system hardware 240 5 14 1 Selecting Clock for the MCU This emulator supports three types of clock for the MCU external clock input from the user system a crystal oscillator attached on the evaluation chip board and the emulator external clock 12 5 MHz For details on selecting
321. tor s Operating Conditions sessseseesseeesesreerssteersserrrsrrsreeresrenreseeersee 96 5 2 1 Configuration Dialog BOX essssc ic s cesssessessscessesssenccescsvesess eben sbebesvaassssavasbunssvnsscessens 98 5 2 2 CPU Operating Mode Dialog BOX oo eeeeeeceee cee cseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeereneenseenaes 107 5 3 Realtime Emulatioms 5 sicccciss a ccssenss ener ere ekse EE EES EEr R e EEE E EE E 116 XZL TEXCCUMOM nonoi eten EEEE EE E E E EEE EE 116 5 3 2 Trace Halt Modernes ssssceseep tees oss castes sees dabssscoes ls svescstasecsensasesegseavasschivebesgenseas 120 5 3 3 Display of Cause for Termination and Operating Status eee eee eeeeeee 121 SA Step FUMCHONSs svi sce seeesccteseuss os r EEEE EA EA E EE EESE ASTE oops seenbacd EE 123 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 54 1 Step ExecUtoN nsei a ior ereen EEE dest EEE EE EREE EE SKEE ES 123 5 4 2 Interrupts during Step Execution seeesseesssseesesreersstrrreserreeesresrssrrrrereerenresreerss 123 Break Functions i216 nieee ieee bite ee AME Dh eta ae AE A ea BARS 124 5 5 1 Software Break cs siehsiiss aeesseokiines aeeiactsiit gd essai Metered esas 126 5 5 2 Software Sequential Break ee cece cseecneeeeeeeeeeseceeseeeensecsecaecsaeenaeeaee 130 5 5 3 Hardware Break esri eh aeiee onrera peoa estarei raaa SSPE narte E Ero IE TETEE EE aE EEEE ERT 134 5 5 4 Hardware Sequential Break esseseeseeeseeeseseeeesrerrsstrreses
322. tor Functions Section Function Description 5 2 Operating mode setting Sets the operating conditions for the emulator 5 3 Execution Emulation 5 4 Step execution Emulation with step execution 5 5 Break Ten types of break function are provided 5 6 Realtime trace Acquires searches for and displays tracing information 5 7 Execution time Measures the total execution time of the user program measurement 5 8 Performance analysis Displays measurements of the user program s efficiency of execution during execution 5 9 Informational display Displays the various items set in each dialog box 5 10 Trigger output Outputs a low level pulse on the trigger output probe 5 11 Memory space Allocation of emulation memory 5 12 Stack trace Displays the history of called functions 5 13 Displaying memory and Displays memory in one of three ways by parallel access auto update memory short breaks or the auto update memory display function the contents of a range of locations is displayed and the display is updated every 500 ms during execution of the user program 5 14 MCU control and status Checks the clock inputs to the emulator and the user system check 5 15 Entering masks Formats for the input of masks 5 16 Expanded Source Expanded Source window of the HDI window 95 5 2 Setting the Emulator s Operating Conditions The user must set the operating conditions before using the emulator Table 5 2 lists the
323. uential Condition 2 address H 2000 3 address H 3000 R address H 4000 Heset Reset All Set Gondition Cancel Apply Help Figure 5 33 Break Dialog Box after Setting a Hardware Sequential Break Table 5 39 Condition A B Page Options When a Hardware Sequential Break Has Been Specified Option Description Sequential Displays the sequence of break conditions for Break Condition A or B Condition Up to seven points are displayed in the order in which they must be satisfied 1 to 7 Hardware break conditions One reset point is displayed R Reset point setting Edit Modifies the Break Condition A or B setting that was selected in the Sequential Condition list box Clicking this button opens the Condition dialog box Reset All Clears all Break Condition A or B settings in the Sequential Condition list box Click the Edit button to open the Condition dialog box The sequence of hardware break conditions is added by either of the two methods described below 152 a Using the history of hardware break condition settings on the History page Any hardware break condition displayed on the History page of the Condition dialog box can be used as a hardware sequential break condition Click to select a condition from the Condition list on the History page then click the V button the condition is now added to the Sequence list box as No 1 In the same way hardware break cond
324. uisition is stopped and emulation enters the trace halt mode Sequential trace stop An order in which trace conditions must be satisfied can be specified When all of the conditions are satisfied in the specified order trace acquisition will stop Can be specified for Trace Conditions A and B but not for Trace Condition C Trace stop due to an overflow of trace buffer Trace acquisition stops when the trace buffer in the emulator overflows Range trace Trace information is only acquired during execution that satisfies the specified conditions Subroutine trace Instruction and operand accesses are traced during execution in the range between the start address and end address of a specified subroutine or of a subroutine specified by its start and end addresses However when the specified subroutine calls other subroutines the called subroutine will not be traced Range trace in subroutines In this mode trace information is only gathered when access is to instructions and operands in the range specified by the start address and end address during those bus cycles in which the specified conditions are matched Trigger output A pulse is output from the trigger pin when the specified conditions are satisfied Timeout trace stop Trace acquisition stops when the timeout condition specified for Performance Analysis 1 has been exceeded Free Trace Mode Trace information is acquired continuously fr
325. ulation breaks when the Performance Analysis 1 timeout specification or maximum number of passes specification is satisfied Timeout trace of Performance Analysis Trace stops when the Performance Analysis 1 timeout specification or maximum number of passes specification is satisfied Time interval Measurement mode x Executes emulation in time interval measurement mode 1 2 or 3 x 1 2 or 3 Time interval Measurement Condition B Measures the execution time over which a specific condition is satisfied by using Break Condition B or Trace Condition B No Break Emulation with all break conditions disabled Prohibit R W on the fly Selects whether or not to disable access to memory during user program execution initial value Disabled Interrupts during step Selects whether or not to accept interrupts during step execution initial value Disabled Drivers Opens the Driver Details dialog box 101 Execution Mode1 Page Use this page to set the unit of time for counting by the execution time measurement counter timeout detection period for emulation commands multibreak mode and whether or not writing to the internal ROM area and the input of the RES BREQ and WAIT signals is enabled Figure 5 3 Configuration Dialog Box Execution Mode1 Page 102 Table 5 5 Execution Model Page Option The minimum time to be measured by Go command execution De
326. unt D numbers Figure 5 41 Break Condition U1 Dialog Box Count Page Table 5 49 Count Page Options Option Description Don t Care Selects no satisfaction count condition Input area Sets the satisfaction count condition The break occurs when the conditions specified in the Break Condition U dialog box have been satisfied the specified number of times The default is D 1 Any value in the range from D 1 to D 65535 can be set here 164 e Break Condition U Reset Dialog Box Use this page to specify the reset point conditions for sequential breaks Break Condition U Reset Figure 5 42 Break Condition U Reset Dialog Box Table 5 50 Break Condition U Reset Page Options Option Description Address Specifies the reset point conditions when a sequential break is selected Note Specification of reset point conditions is irrelevant if no internal sequential break has been set 165 5 5 6 Internal Sequential Break Overview An internal sequential break set up with Break Condition U1 to U4 occurs when internal break conditions are satisfied in one of three specified orders These orders are referred to as modes and are shown in table 5 51 When a reset point condition is satisfied before satisfaction of Break Condition U1 the satisfaction record for the internal break conditions up to that point is cleared The emulator then restarts checking for satisfaction of the internal sequential br
327. urs numeric from 0 to 999 mm Minutes numeric from 0 to 59 ss Seconds numeric from 0 to 59 uuuuuu Microseconds numeric from 0 to 999999 Searches for trace information that satisfies the specified conditions and displays the information for bus cycles on which it was acquired The search is in the range specified by lt startcycle gt and lt endcycle gt For conditions that can be specified see the description of lt option gt Examples 1 To display trace information with the address bus in the range from H 10027C to H 100304 or the write cycle for the last five instructions of acquired trace information TS RANGE D 5 TO 0 TYPE ALL ADDRESS H 10027C TO H 100304 DIRECTION WRITE 2 To display trace information with the data bus value at H 4750 or the read cycle for the last five instructions of acquired trace information TS RANGE D 5 TO 0 DATA MASK H 4750 LONG DIRECTION READ 312 Section 7 Error Messages 7 1 Emulator Error Messages of the Emulator The emulator system program displays error messages in the format below if an error occurs during emulation command execution Table 7 1 lists error messages Table 7 1 Error Messages Error Message INVALID COMMAND Description and Solution The specified command is invalid or this command cannot be executed in trace halt mode Correctly enter the command INSUFFICIENT MEMORY The size of emulation memory to be allocated with the
328. us of the internal module INTERNAL I O System Memory Resources The remaining capacity of the emulation memory Load Memory Areas The address range of the load module that was loaded 229 The Events sheet has the following content Table 5 93 Events Sheet Configuration Item Description Resources The number of effective breakpoints that have been set 5 10 Trigger Output During execution of the user program the emulator outputs a low level pulse from the trigger output probe under the following two conditions e Trace condition satisfaction e Hardware break condition satisfaction Using this pulse as an oscilloscope s trigger input signal makes it easy to adjust the user system hardware For example the waveform produced when the user program goes to a specified point can be viewed When the trigger output is specified by using of the Execution Mode2 option of the Configuration dialog box a low level pulse is output for 2 bus cycles from the trigger output pin 10 cycles after bus cycles in which hardware break and hardware break conditions were satisfied during emulation The trigger signal is output until the end of the subsequent bus cycle If the conditions are satisfied over consecutive bus cycles the trigger output remains low When the internal ROM RAM is accessed the timing of trigger output will be as shown in figure 5 85 CK
329. used by any other device and that corresponds to one of the PC interface board switch settings Save the file Exit the current setup program Shut down Windows NT 4 0 and turn off the host computer power switch Turn on the host computer Installing the System Program A description of the installation of the system program is given below The E8000S system program must be transferred to flash memory in the E8000S station The emulator cannot be used without the E8000S system program The system programs are stored in SYSTEM under the HDI installation directory Table 3 3 is a list of system programs with descriptions Table 3 3 Contents of Emulator System Programs No File Name Contents of File 1 E8000 SYS System program for the emulator Controls the evaluation ship board and executes various commands such as for emulation Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up 2 SHDCT046 SYS MCU control program Controls the MCU on the evaluation chip board Loaded to the memory of the emulator when the emulator system program is started up 3 SHCNF046 SYS Configuration file for storing the MCU s operating mode and map information Loaded with the emulator system program 4 DIAG SYS Diagnostic and maintenance program Loaded to the memory of the E8000S station for maintenance 47 The system programs are registered by using a dedicated E8000S system installation tool herea
330. used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense VIII RENESAS Preface Thank you for purchasing the emulator for the Hitachi microcomputer SH7046 CAUTION Read section 3 Preparation before Use before using the emulator product Incorrect operation or connection will damage the user system the emulator product and the user program The SH7046 E8000S emulator hereinafter referred to as the emulator is an efficient software and hardware development tool for systems based on Hitachi microcomputer SH7046 By exchanging the device control board and the evaluation chip board this emulator can also be used for systems using other microcomputers The emulator is operated by using the Hitachi Debugging Interface hereafter referred to as HDI This interface program is supported by Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me WindowsNT 4 0 and Windows 2000 This manual describes the emulator functions and operations Please read this manual carefully before use in particular section 1 1 Notes on Usage A CD R for the E8000S Emulator is packaged with the evaluation chip board For details refer to section 3 Preparation before Use Related Manuals Description Notes on Using the PC Interfac
331. utton displays the Performance n dialog box n Number Reset Cancels the Performance Analysis settings that are set in the Condition list box Reset All Cancels settings of all the subroutines set in the Condition list box Select 1 from the Condition list then click the Edit button The Performance 1 dialog box will be displayed Set the conditions for measuring performance then click the OK button The individual pages of the Performance 1 to 8 dialog box are explained in table 5 76 212 Table 5 77 Pages of the Performance 1 to 8 Dialog Box Page Description General Sets the measurement mode Address Sets conditions for the address range Time Out Sets a timeout value When the user program is running in the address range specified by the user the emulator will compare the measured time with the timeout time specified by the user When timeout value setting lt measured time the user program emulation will break the timeout break function While timeout value setting gt measured time the emulator will measure the user program s execution time Count Sets a maximum number of passes Note These settings are only available in Performance Analysis 1 Each page is described in detail below e General page Use this page to set the measurement mode General Address Time Out Count Subroutine time measurement mode 2 Subroutine t
332. which the emulator was purchased 1 3 1 Emulator Table 1 3 lists the emulator components Table 1 3 Emulator Components HS8000EST11H Classification Item Quantity Remarks Hardware E8000S station 1 Trace cable 1 CN1 CN2 CN3 with 4 cores AC power cable 1 Fuse 1 3 A spare Manual Description Notes on 1 HS8000EST11HE using the HS8000EST11H 1 3 2 Device Control Board and Evaluation Chip Board for the SH7046 Tables 1 4 and 1 5 list the device control board and evaluation chip board components Table 1 4 Device Control Board Components for the SH7046 Classification Item Quantity Remarks Hardware Device control board 1 One board to be installed in the E8000S emulator station External probe 1 Probe input 4 Run break state output 1 Trigger output 1 GND 2 Manual Description Notes on 1 HS7046EDD81 HE using the HS7046EDD81H Table 1 5 Evaluation Chip Board Components for the SH7046 Item Product No Quantity Remarks Hardware Evaluation chip 2 Two boards board Connected to the user system by the user system interface cable Software SH7046 E8000S 1 CD R emulator HS7046EBK81SR Additional documents SH7046 E8000S 1 HS7046EBK81 HE P Emulator Notes on Usage Note indicates a manual revision 1 3 3 Options In addition to the E8000S station the options listed in table 1 6 are also available Refer to each option manual for details on these optional components Table 1 6 Optional Component Spe
333. xt step prevents the memory area for the PC interface board being accessed by another program Modify the CONFIG SYS file Use the SYSEDIT program to edit the file e Select Run from the Start menu e Type SYSEDIT and click OK The SYSEDIT will start When EMM386 EXE is used in the CONFIG SYS file the CONFIG SYS file must be modified If the CONFIG SYS file is not used or if EMM386 EXE is not used even when the CONFIG SYS file is used go to the following procedure and modify the SYSTEM_INI file e Locate the line in the CONFIG SYS file that reads device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM 45 Change the line so that it reads as shown below device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM X aaaa bbbb Here aaaa is the upper four digits of Start value and bbbb is the upper four digits of End value For example for the switch set to 6 you would set the line to read device C WINDOWS EMM386 EXE RAM X D800 DBFF Save the CONFIG SYS file The following is about modifying the SYSTEM_INT file Add the following line to the 386Enh section in the SYSTEM_INI file EMMExclude aaaa bbbb Here aaaa is the upper four digits of Start value and bbbb is the upper four digits of End value For example for the switch set to 6 you would set the line to read EMMExclude D800 DBFF Save the SYSTEM INI file and exit the SYSEDIT Restart the host computer Setting Up the PC Interface Board on Windows NT 4 0 The description given below is a
334. y Interrupts during step 2 6V 2 5MHz Emulator Clock 12 5MHz Not used Not used 20ns 100us Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Normal Disabled Disabled 297 6 2 18 Trace Condition Commands TAS TAC TAD e Setting TRACEACQUISITION_SET TAS e Cancellation TRACEACQUISITION_CLEAR TAC e Display TRACEACQUISITION_DISPLAY TAD Command syntax and parameters e Setting tas lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt lt tracetype gt lt option gt lt option gt lt option gt lt addropt gt lt dataopt gt lt accessopt gt lt r wopt gt lt prbopt gt lt nmiopt gt lt irqopt gt lt countopt gt lt delayopt gt e Cancellation tac lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt e Display tad lt type gt channel lt channel_number gt Parameter Type Description lt type gt Keyword Selects the trace condition type a b c Sets Trace Condition A B C lt channel_number gt Numeric or Sets a channel number from 1 to 8 keyword When hardware sequential condition has been specified specify p orr p Sequential point r Reset point lt tracetype gt Keyword Sets conditions for trace information acquisition This parameter cannot be specified when the sequential trace stop is specified type range Range trace type stop Trace stop type subroutine lt subroutine gt Subroutine trace lt option gt cannot be specified type subrange lt
335. y Allocation Function An internal RAM is used as a stack in the sample program 71 4 4 Downloading 4 4 1 Downloading the Sample Program Download the sample program in the ELF DWARF2 format to be debugged e Select Load Program from the File menu The Load Program dialog box is displayed e Click the Browse button The Open dialog box will be displayed e Select the file TUTORIAL ABS and click the Open button Load Program x MV Verify Cancel Eile name D HEW Hdi5 E 8000S voooc tutorialstutorialsD ebu aa Browse T Load only debugging information T Load stack information file SNI file Figure 4 6 Load Program Dialog Box e Click the Open button in the Load Program dialog box The following dialog box will be displayed when the program completes loading In the dialog box the address where the program was loaded is displayed Module name D HEW SHdi5 E 80005 o00d tutorial tutorial D ebug tutorial abs Areas loaded XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXK KKKXKKKKX XXXXXXXKXK KKKXKKKXKX XXXXXXXX XXXXXAXAX Figure 4 7 HDI Dialog Box e Click the OK button 72 4 4 2 Displaying the Source Program The Source window allows the user to display the C C language source program set breakpoints execute the program and select variables so the user can debug a program at the source level e Select Source from the View menu The Open dialo
336. y alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death A DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury A WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury CAUTION CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTE emphasizes essential information lt RENESAS AWARNING Observe the precautions listed below Failure to do so will result in a FIRE HAZARD and will damage the user system and the emulator product or will result in PERSONAL INJURY The USER PROGRAM will be LOST 1 Carefully handle the emulator product to prevent receiving an electric shock because the emulator product has a DC power supply Do not repair or remodel the emulator product by yourself for electric shock prevention and quality assurance Always switch OFF the emulator and user system before connecting or disconnecting any CABLES or PARTS Always before connecting make sure that pin 1 on both sides are correctly aligned Supply power according to the power specifi
337. ystem Section l MOVERVICW Ss ccsccdcai ca ceosssaratiaas R E E I E 1 OVEIVIEW foie EEEE A ti aac einen a tae ee gi eed E Til NOteS ON UW SASS a5 cc soe locb tocar cosa a peveab eE snes decgeneests sped sade pdutadiepnsge Gepsurseogatyeees 1 2 Environmental Conditions eee ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesecesecaecsaecsaecsaecaaesneseseseeeeeeeeaeenas 123 COMPODENIS ienne Ghciwsedeecea S A wat oaneobsepucouscean ds AE AE A ceed Sheawbeckenths 13 3 Emulatoren eek ea eee ek ee eA as 1 3 2 Device Control Board and Evaluation Chip Board for the SH7046 1 353 Optionsica jes oe eee eee i et i i i ee RAES Section 2 Components ai aeea gy vata iasieca E N a adhe eae E 2 1 Emulator Hardware Components s seseeesseeseseeeseseeerssrsreeresterrssrerreerteerestenrssrerrssesresresreet 2 1 1 E8000S Station Components esesseesseseseseeessseeerssrserssesrensesteeresrerrsserrrnsesrreresrent 2 1 2 Device Control Board Components 0 00 0 ee eeeesecesecesecseeceeeneseeeeeeeeseeeereeseennees 2 1 3 Evaluation Chip Board Configuration cece cseecseeereeeeeeeeeeeseeereeeenseenaes 2 1 4 Configuration of User System Interface Cable eee eeeescesecseceeeeseeeneeenes 2 2 Configuration of the Provided CD R oo eee cseeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeecesecsecsaecsaecsaecaeeeaeeeneeees 23 System Cont SuUration ser heen ie E aasigetos aeien ena AU eae tee 2 3 1 System Configuration Using a PC Interface Board ee eee esse cee eneeeneeene S

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Mirage CD Emulator Manual  User Manual 21.5” FHD 1920 x 1080 LCD - I  PCR300 Proximity card Reader for WinLoq User's Manual    Stanton C.402  SP Service Manual Comp.qxd  CSI-57形 - 日立の家電品  Bituthene® 3000  Wasserheizgeräte Water Heaters 12/2001  ElectronS.R.L.  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file